METAL OR PLASTIC | LOTENSION & STACKER | TURN-CURVE & STRAIGHT RUNNING

Conveyor Belt Product Catalog - Volume II

www.ashworth.com
 Table of Contents
Mission Statement & Testimonials.........................2 Straight Running Belts: Postive Driven ..............97
About Ashworth...................................................3 Belt Selection Guide...............................................98
A History of Firsts................................................4 Flat Wire—Standard Duty—FWA1..................102
Innovating The Future.........................................5 Flat Wire—Standard Duty—FWA2..................104
What's New.........................................................6 Flat Wire—Standard Duty—FWA3..................106
Ashworth Factory Service.....................................10 Flat Wire—Standard Duty—FWA4..................108
Flat Wire—Standard Duty—FWA5..................110
Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts......................................15 Flat Wire-Standard Duty-FWA5SC..................112
Flat Wire—Standard Duty—FWB1..................114
Belt Selection Guide...............................................16 Flat Wire—Standard Duty—FWB2..................116
Omni-Pro® Metal Spiral Belts.............................19 Flat Wire—Standard Duty—FWB3..................118
Omni-Pro® 075..................................................20 Flat Wire—Standard Duty—FWB4..................120
Omni-Pro® 100..................................................22 Flat Wire—Standard Duty—FWB5..................122
Omni-Pro® 120..................................................24 Flat Wire—Heavy Duty—FWC1......................124
Omni-Pro® 150..................................................26 Flat Wire—Heavy Duty—FWC2......................126
Small Radius Omni-Pro® ..................................28 Flat Wire—Heavy Duty—FWC6 SB................128
Space Saver Omni-Grid® .................................30 Flat Wire—EZ Transfer—FWH3......................130
Advantage™ Plastic Spiral Belts.......................33 Cleatrac® Belt & Sprocket System...................131
Plastic Belt Air Flow Performance.....................34 Positive Drive Chain Edge (PDCE).................137
Advantage™ 120...............................................38 Eye Link Belts..................................................147
Advantage™ 200...............................................40 Engineering & Maintenance Information
Omni-Flex® Rugged Metal Spiral Belts..............43 Positive Driven: Straight-Running Belt
Omni-Flex® E1 & E2...........................................44 Selection & Engineering Calculations..........156
Omni-Flex® E3...................................................46 Troubleshooting—Flat Wire Belts....................160
Small Radius Omni-Flex® G1 & G3...................48 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven ............161
ExactaStack™.......................................................51 Belt Selection Guide.............................................162
Self-Stacking Spiral Belts..................................52 Ashworth's Performance Guarantee..................163
ExactaStack™ Standard Belt.............................52 Baking Bands..................................................164
ExactaStack™ WD.............................................54 CB5 Baking Band............................................166
Engineering & Maintenance Information CB3 Tortilla Band............................................167
Concepts of Lotension.......................................64 Control Systems..............................................168
Spiral System Requirements.............................66 Balanced Weave Conveyor Belts....................170
Lotension Design Data Sheets.......................69 WG Woven Wire..............................................180
Plastic Belt Tension Ratings..............................72 Lehr Belts........................................................182
Lotension: Spiral Belt Selection Engineering & Maintenance Information
& Engineering Calculations.............................75 Friction Driven: Straight-Running
Installation of Spiral Belts..................................81 Belt Selection & Engineering Calculations.....189
UHMWPE Cage Bar Cap Profiles.....................85 Mesh Designation for Woven Wire Belts.........190
Measuring Overdrive.........................................87 Installation & Tracking.....................................192
Cleaning & Lubricating......................................90 Baking Band Cleaning.....................................195
Troubleshooting Spiral Belts.............................93 Troubleshooting—Baking Bands.....................196
Straight Running Belt Design Data Sheets....... 200
Conveyor Design ............................................202
Glossary of Terms ...............................................233
Appendix A: Wire Selection Guide ....................239
Appendix B: Common Conversion Formulas ...241

LTS0205
Introduction

Mission Statement & Testimonials

"Great service and support. Follow-up was “Very reliable, backed by outstanding support. “Excellent product - Good Value! Exceptional
great. We were very satisfied with our recent Top notch support is very important to me. service - knowledge and ability with continuous
spiral project. Ashworth recognized all of our Ashworth is very knowledgeable and has been ongoing product support. Product is durable
concerns and addressed them. Because of instrumental on getting me up to speed and economical to own."
Ashworth, we no longer have to worry about on lotension." Maintenance Manager
downtime due to belt failure." Maintenance Manager T. Marzetti
Refrigeration Manager General Mills
House of Raeford Farms

“Outstanding customer service and excellent “A great professional team that will pull out all “Ashworth was the original belt supplied with our
product knowledge. The support (ie: Tension the stops to assist a customer. We recently lost spiral freezer. It lasted nearly 20 years! In our
Tests) help us feel confident our system is an oven band and required a new one to be industry we can not afford long breakdowns.
running well and will continue to run trouble fabricated and installed. The entire Ashworth Ashworth has proven reliable and well
free, reducing downtime." team from order taking through logistics did an supported.”
Engineer & Manager outstanding job!” Plant Engineer
Raybern Foods LLC Production Manager S&F Foods
BFG Kitchener

“We've purchased belts from Ashworth for 30 “Ashworth rushed 382 feet of belting for me and “The product we purchased is reliable and
years. We switched to the Ashworth did an exceptional job of getting my factory durable which allows our systems to operate at
ExactaStack™ because Ashworth provides back into production." maximum capacity for a long period of time."
reliable products and services that reduce our Engineering Manager Materials Manager
maintenance costs." Seviroli Foods Energy Sciences, Inc.
Maintenance Manager
Pilgrim's

2 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Introduction
About Ashworth
Tracing its roots to the 1860’s, Ashworth has been a major supplier of conveyor belts to the food processing
industry since 1946 when Ashworth formed the Metal Products Division in Worcester, Massachusetts, and
began producing woven metal conveyor belts. In 1967, Ashworth revolutionized the food processing industry
with the development of its patented lotension spiral system. Today, Ashworth's manufacturing facilities are
located in Winchester, Virginia, and West Bromwich, United Kingdom and has a worldwide network of sales
offices, distributors, and agents.
As the lotension experts, Ashworth offers the most comprehensive range of spiral and turn-curve belting
available on the market. The all-metal Omni-Pro® is the new industry standard, and our Advantage™ series of
plastic and steel hybrid belts has revolutionized the food processing industry. In 2009, we introduced a drop-in
replacement self-stacking spiral belt, ExactaStack™, which is available in all industry-standard sizes and can
be fitted with our patented Advantage™ overlay. We also know a thing or two about straight-running belts; the
industry standard CB5 Baking Band® was introduced in 1963, and the positively driven woven wire Cleatrac®
in 1988. Cleatrac® still provides the tightest transfers in the industry.
We know how important our product performance is to your business and that is why we offer Ashworth
Factory Service, located in Northfield, Minnesota. This group of industry experts brings unparalleled design,
service and support expertise for both spiral and straight-run systems to our customers. From our 24/7 emer-
gency customer service and our full range of factory services to our broad selection of spiral and turn-curve
belting, you can trust Ashworth to keep you running.

Ashworth’s Manufacturing Facility–Winchester, Va.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 3
Introduction

A History of Firsts

1999 Ashworth Offers the First Extended Warranties on Spiral Belting

Ashworth Expands Internationally

The acquisition of Jonge Poerink of Borne, The Netherlands, provides Ashworth with facilities in Europe. The
1995 addition of Jonge Poerink’s broad line of conveyor belts and systems makes Ashworth a global supplier with
the industry’s most extensive range of products and capabilities.

The Benefits of a Plastic Surface Combined with a Backbone of Steel

1991 Ashworth was the first belt supplier to offer Hybrid belts, beginning with Omni-Lite®.

The Tightest Transfers in the Industry

1988 Ashworth introduced the Cleatrac® belt, which offers the tightest product transfers in the industry.

The Revolutionary Lotension Spiral Conveyor System

1967 Ashworth invented the Lotension Spiral Conveyor System and the related metal turn-curve belts that have
become the worldwide standard for cooking, freezing, proofing and cooling applications.

More Options in Turn Curve Belting

1965 Omni-Grid® is introduced and patented, extending Ashworth’s line of turn-curve belts.

True Tracking
1963 Ashworth introduced the true-tracking CB5 Baking Band® that remains the standard oven band in the baking
industry today.

Ashworth’s First Line of Metal Turn-Curve Belting

1959 Ashworth introduces and patents Omni-Flex® turn-curve belts.

Ashworth Opens a Manufacturing Facility in Winchester, VA

1955 Metal belt production is transferred from Worcester, Massachusetts to a new plant in Winchester,
Virginia, which becomes the Belt Division Headquarters.

Ashworth Belting Production Begins

1946 After over 80 years of manufacturing card clothing, Ashworth Bros., Inc., forms the Metal Products
Division and begins production of woven metal conveyor belts in Worcester, Massachusetts.

4 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Introduction
Innovating The Future

Meeting Customer Demand in Japan

2012 Ashworth launches Ashworth Japan K.K. in Tokyo to meet increased demand in Japan.

Innovations in Can Making Mats

Ashworth introduces ToughMat™, its new can making mat for IBO/OBO applications. Featuring PTFE
2011 coatings, ToughMat™ allows for tighter transfers, decreased energy costs and increased reliability
and throughput.

Meeting Customer Demand in Asia

2011 Ashworth opens a new Asia/Pacific regional office in Singapore.

Ashworth Expands Further in Europe

2011 Ashworth Belts BV relocates its sales and support offices from Enschede, NL to Amsterdam, NL to better
serve its clients throughout Europe, the Middle East and Africa.

Ashworth Expands Its Manufacturing Capabilities in Europe

2010 Ashworth opens a new manufacturing facility in West Bromwich, United Kingdom to continue supporting its
customers throughout Europe, The Middle East and Africa including quick-ship orders.

A Self-Stacking Alternative
Ashworth enters the self-stacking spiral belt market with ExactaStack™; designed for both complete instal-
2009 lations or spliced-in sectional repairs. ExactaStack™ is available in all tier heights and widths including wide
belts, and is delivered in our patented Rack & Roll crate system for easy installation and storage.
The New Standard in Lotension Belting
The high strength Omni-Pro® hits the market with patented protrusion leg technology to keep systems run-
2007 ning smoothly. Featuring patents on both the button-less rods and 360° welds, Omni-Pro® becomes the new
standard in lotension belting.
New Technologies and Services Launched
Ashworth Engineering Services becomes Ashworth Factory Service Corporation, and opens its doors
2007 in Northfield, Minnesota. AFS provides both spiral and straight-running belt repair, installation, retrofit
and optimization.

The First & Only NSF & USDA Plastic Spiral Belt
2006 The Advantage™ 120/200 series of belts continues to change the face of the belting industry as it becomes
the first spiral belt to be tested and certified by NSF as well as USDA Accepted for Meat and Poultry.

Celebrating 50 Years of Production in Winchester

2005 Ashworth Bros., Inc. celebrates 50 years of manufacturing quality conveyor belts in Winchester, VA, USA.

Ashworth Introduces Advantage™ Plastic Spiral Belts

Advantage™ spiral and turn-curve belts incorporate modular plastic conveying surface and plastic links
2004 together with stainless steel rods providing the industry’s greatest beam strength and greatest air-flow,
unmatched by all plastic belts.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 5
 ExactaStack™ - Replacement Stacker Belt
Introduction

uu What's New
ExactaStack™ - Replacement Stacker Belt
The ExactaStack™ is available in all widths, tier heights, and mesh
configurations including the patented Advantage™ overlay, for both
spliced-in sections and complete self-stacking belt replacements.
The ExactaStack™ self-stacking spiral belt is a drop-in replace-
ment for standard and wide belt stackers with no system drive
modifications required.
ExactaStack™ is also available with Ashworth’s patented Advan-
tage™ plastic overlay. Because Advantage™ is easy to clean, it is
the market's only plastic spiral belt that is USDA Accepted for meat
and poultry. The combination of ExactaStack™ and Advantage™
makes it the market's first and only self-stacking spiral belt with a
plastic overlay providing a perfect solution for existing sticky prod-
uct applications. Advantage™ has also been proven by ETL Labo-
ratories to have the greatest open area of all plastic spiral modular
belting making it a perfect solution for vertical air-flow patterns in
self-stacking spirals.
ExactaStack™ is manufactured to ensure quality craftsmanship,
quick deliveries and cost savings. With every option available, in-
cluding the Advantage™ overlay, Ashworth can provide the right
belt for many specific production needs to increase capacity and
minimize product damage.

6 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Omni-Pro® 150

Introduction
uu What's New
Omni-Pro® 150
Ashworth Bros., Inc. introduced the 1½-inch pitch Omni-Pro® link
to extend the Omni-Pro® line of spiral/turn-curve conveyor belts.
The 1½-inch pitch Omni-Pro® 150 retains the same design fea-
tures that allow the belt to minimize cage bar wear, maintenance
costs and downtime in your most demanding high-tension spiral
applications. Expanding the Omni-Pro® line reflects Ashworth’s
commitment to meet today’s processing demands.
Omni-Pro® is one of the strongest belts on the market today and
the Omni-Pro® 150 withstands spiral/turn-curve tensions of 400
pounds (136 kg) for 100,000 cycles vs. competing belts that
rate for 50,000 cycles. The increased strength of the Omni-Pro®
comes from the new 360° button-less weld technology utilizing a
“zero tension” design which allows a higher load bearing capacity.
Unlike a traditional bridge weld, the 360° button-less weld is free
from surface imperfections and crevices which improves hygienic
characteristics by eliminating the possibility of bacteria entrap-
ments.
Omni-Pro’s state-of-the-art link design includes a patented “protru-
sion leg” preventing welds from contacting spiral cage bars and
permits the belt to run smoother with less system wear. Each link is
formed with a patented coining process to prevent break-in wear,
reducing belt elongation and increasing belt life. Turn ratios range
from 1.6 to 2.5 and belt widths are available in even widths from 12
to 54 inches for spiral and turn curve applications.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 7
 Small Radius Omni-Pro®
Introduction

uu What's New
Small Radius Omni-Pro®
Ashworth Bros., Inc. introduction of the 3/4-inch pitch Small Radius
Omni-Pro® Belt to extend the Omni-Pro® line of spiral/turn-curve
conveyor belts. The 3/4-inch pitch Small Radius Omni-Pro® retains
the same design features that allow the belt to minimize cage bar
wear, maintenance costs and downtime in your most demanding
high-tension spiral applications.
Omni-Pro® is one of the strongest belts on the market today and
the 3/4-inch pitch Small Radius Omni-Pro® withstands spiral/turn-
curve tensions of 150 pounds (68 kg) for 100,000 cycles vs. com-
peting belts that rate for 50,000 cycles. Turn ratios range from 1.0
to 2.0 and belt widths are available in even widths from 12 to 48
inches for turn curve and spiral applications.

8 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Fatigue Resistant Cleatrac® System

Introduction
uu What's New
Fatigue Resistant Cleatrac® System
Ashworth Bros., Inc. developed a manufacturing process using
a proprietary stainless steel specification to offer a belt having
up to 2.5 times the working strength of our standard Cleatrac®
belting. The strength of the Fatigue Resistant Cleatrac® System
make this the ideal belt for use in tunnel freezers and tunnel oven
applications.
The Fatigue Resistant Cleatrac® consists of a precision balanced
weave wire mesh fabric consisting of alternating right and left-hand
spirals joined by crimped connecting rods, with a matched positive
drive system of sprockets, filler rolls, and support bearings.
Offering meshes in both 16 and 17 gauge stainless steel wire,
Fatigue Resistant Cleatrac® can be used successfully in applica-
tions requiring longer conveyor lengths and increased belt strength.
The Fatigue Resistant Cleatrac® offers reduced belt stretch and
increased belt life.
To ensure correct product orientation and minimize product dam-
age (and operating costs), the Fatigue Resistant Cleatrac® smooth-
ly moves around the industry's smallest diameter sprockets.
Fatigue Resistant Cleatrac® conveyor belting lasts longer, requires
less maintenance and reduces costs because of its more durable
construction compared to single-plane wire designs. The balanced
weave wire mesh design makes it resistant to damage from abra-
sives such as salts, product fines and breading.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 9
 Ashworth Factory Service

uu Ashworth Factory Service

Factory Service for Lotension, Self Stacking Spirals, and Baking Bands

System Service Expert system service, analysis, and optimization

Troubleshooting & Technical Support Available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year
System Refurbishments Complete inventory of system parts to keep you running
Installation & Commissioning Turnkey installation and accountability to our customers
Electronic Controls Retrofit and Maintenance Support, parts, replacement, and upgrades
Proactive Maintenance Program Downtime prevention to maximize service life and throughput

Increase Capacity & Improve Efficiency—On-call 24/7/365

Located in Faribault, Minnesota, Ash- over the phone or a complete system vide food processing companies peace
worth Factory Service Corp. (AFS) of- overhaul, the Ashworth Factory Service of mind with decades of experience,
fers a full range of engineering services team is available 24/7/365 to provide the quality workmanship, and comprehen-
and solutions for Lotension Spiral, Bak- support your company requires to in- sive conveyor belt support.
ing Band, and Stacker systems. Wheth- crease capacity and improve efficiency.
er you need troubleshooting advice Ashworth Factory Service experts pro-

"The technicians at Ashworth Factory Service “Ashworth Factory Service is top-notch. They
are knowledgeable and provide very capable installed the belt, turn-key and stress free, allowing
installation services. Ashworth is easy to work me to focus on other projects. We have reduced
with and completed the installation to meet our waste and downtime, and the belt has increased
plant schedule, plus the belt and service cost efficiency in our proofer.”
less than the competition." Jon Sims
Dale Walenski Maintenance Manager, San Francisco Foods
Plant Engineer, McCain Foods

Lotension Spiral Services Self-Stacking Spiral Services Baking Band Services

Ashworth invented the lotension spi- Ashworth Factory service experts The CB5 Baking Band® was invented
ral in 1967 and remains the expert in have spent thousands of hours opti- in 1963 by Ashworth, and it’s still the
lotension belt development and ser- mizing spiral systems so they can pro- industry standard today. We are the
vice. Our spiral services are geared vide you with services like Ashworth’s experts to rely on for the maintenance
towards improving capacity and ef- turn-key ExactaStackTM installation. and turn-key installation of your bak-
ficiency in your lotension system. We The service includes a new belt that ing bands. AFS experts can prevent
also offer turnkey spiral systems and fits your existing system, a skilled AFS costly damage to your belts caused by
spiral relocation services. No one has technician to install your optimized misalignment and improper settings,
Factory Service

more experience with lotension spiral belt, and an adjustment to your exist- as well as provide training on proper
systems than Ashworth. ing drive system for peak efficiency belt maintenance and tracking, in ad-
and service life. dition to our standard replacement
and optimization services.

Ashworth Factory Service—On-call 24/7/365—Toll-Free: 1-866-204-1414

10 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Ashworth Factory Service

Lotension Self Stacking

Services Baking Bands
Spirals Spirals
Application engineering review n n n

Comprehensive service report n n n

Improve capacity n n n

Recommend drive/system upgrades n n n

Improve air flow techniques n n n

Spiral reconfiguration n n

Modify lengths of in-feed/discharge n n

System Service
Add tiers/change tier pitch n n

Add curve loader conveyors n n

Spiral relocation—across the plant or the country n n

Change direction of spiral n

Alignment of terminal drums and snub rolls n

Belt positioning n

Hot & cold tracking benchmarks n

Available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year n n n

Trouble Shooting/Technical
System corrections or adjustments n n n
Phone Support
System operations support n n n

Turnkey installation n n n
Installation &
On-site installation specialist n n n
Commissioning
Belt commissioning n n n

Full line of belt system parts n n n

Emergency repairs n n n

Replace key components n n n

Spiral upgrades n n

System Refurbishments Replace drive/drum bar caps n n

Replace track cap n n

Replace cage/drum teeth/drive n n

Replace idler sprocket/chain/wagon teeth n n

Replace cage/drum bearings n n

Revisions or replacement of existing systems n n n

Factory Service

Electronic overdrive control n n n

Electronic Controls Retrofit
Touch screen improvement n n n

Safety systems upgrades n n n

Scheduled system audit and recommendations n n n

Proactive Maintenance
Detailed report history n n n
Program
On-site system training n n n

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 11
 Ashworth Factory Service

uu Spiral Belt Tension Test

Technical Specifications

Measurable Tension Range lb. (kg) 100 to 650 (46 to 295)

Suitable Temperature Range ° F (° C) -40 to 120 (-40 to 49) For 120+ Contact Ashworth Engineering
Required Tier Clearance 2.25 (57.2 mm) minimum
in. (mm)
Belt Pitch Capability: 0.5 to 4.75 (12.7 to 120.7)
Display Units Imperial, Metric available upon request

Ashworth’s Spiral Belt Tension Test

Over 40 years ago, Ashworth invented spirals and spiral belting, and named them “Lotension” because low belt tensions improve spiral
performance, prevent breakdowns, and extends belt life. Now, Ashworth offers the Spiral Belt Tension Test to help processors pinpoint
undetected high-tension problems in spirals to extend belt life and prevent unexpected breakdowns.

The Spiral Belt Tension Test is performed with Ashworth's proprietary tension gauge that records belt tension throughout each tier in a spiral.
By loading the recorded data into Ashworth's tension assessment program, a visual graph is created representing the variations in tension
throughout the spiral system. By analyzing the results, Ashworth Factory Service can make recommendations to correct any unforeseen or
potential problems.

The Ashworth Tension Gauge can measure spiral belt tensions of up to 650 lb. with tier spacing as low as 2.25 inches. It is designed to
operate in freezing and ambient conditions, so tension measurements can be taken in fully operational freezers and coolers. The Tension
Gauge can be used on any spiral belt; the belt does not need to be an Ashworth belt in order to be tested.

Ashworth has performed tension tests on numerous spirals and found most operating above the manufacturer’s rating. After locating the high-
tension problems, Ashworth Factory Service can provide solutions to save you from unexpected breakdowns.

Ashworth's Spiral Belt Tension Test is fast, easy and, one phone call away.

Contact Ashworth Factory Service to schedule your Spiral Belt Tension Test
It is fast, easy, and one phone call away.

Toll Free:

1-866-204-1414
Factory Service

12 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Ashworth Factory Service

uu Ashworth Belt Tension Gauge

Ashworth's Tension Assessment Program

Factory Service

Ashworth's Tension Assessment screenshot illustrating the variations in tension throughout a spiral system

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 13
 Ashworth Factory Service

NOTES
Factory Service

14 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Spiral & Turn Curve Belts

As the inventor of the lotension spiral system, Ashworth offers a wide variety of all-metal and metal backbone/
plastic surface hybrid belts for use in lotension systems. These belts allow the end user optimal production
possibilities, while ensuring the strength, durability, and product release characteristics required for the most
demanding applications.

Omni-Pro® Small Radius Omni-Pro ®

spiral Products
ExactaStack™ Advantage™ 120/200

Omni-Flex® Space Saver Omni-Grid®

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 15
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Selection Guide for

Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

k™
ro s

®
- G er
-P iu

ac
rid
ni v
ni d
0 Pro

0 ro
0 ro
5 ro

m a

St
m Ra

O ce S
15 ni-P
10 ni-P
07 ni-P

ta
12 ni-

O all

ac
a
m

m
m
m

Sm

Ex
Sp
O

O
O
O

Specifications Units
Stainless Stainless Stainless
Link Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel
Steel Steel Steel
Stainless Stainless Stainless
Material(s) Rod Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel
Steel Steel Steel
Stainless Stainless Stainless
Mesh Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel
Steel Steel Steel
Turn Ratio 2.2 to 2.5 1.6 to 2.5 1.7 to 2.8 1.6 to 2.5 1.1 to 2.0 0.7 to 2.2 1.7

12.00–40.00 12.00–40.00 12.00–54.00 12.00–54.00 12.00–48.00 12.00–36.00 (420.0, 580.0, 640.0,

Curve
(304.8–1,016.0) (304.8–1,016.0) (304.8–1,371.6) (304.8–1,371.6) (304.8–1,219.2) (304.8–9) 760.0, 920.0, 1,060.0)
spiral belt selection

Width
Limits in.
12.00–48.00 12.00–48.00 12.00–60.00 12.00–60.00
Straight (mm) N/A N/A N/A
(304.8–1,219.2) (304.8–1,219.2) (304.8–1,524.0) (304.8–1,524.0)

1.08 (27.4)
Pitch 0.75 (19.1) 1.08 (27.4) 1.20 (30.5) 1.50 (38.1) 1.08 (27.4) (30.0 to 59.9)
& 0.75 (19)

Maximum Curve* 150 (68) 200 (91) 400 (181) 400 (181) 150 (68) 150 (68) N/A
Tension
Straight* lb. 300 (136) 400 (182) 800 (364) 800 (364) 300 (136) 300 (136) N/A
(kg)
Maximum Curve* N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Belt Pull Straight* N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Spiral Applications
Freezer u u u u u u u
Proofer u u u u u u
Chiller u u u u u u
Cooker u u u u u u
Advantages
Frozen Product Release
Sanitary Design u u u u
Superior Air Flow u u u u u u u
High Load Capacity u u u u
Superior Beam Strength u u u u u u u
Small Footprint u u u u
Special Features
Wear Resistant Links u u u u u u
Fatigue Resistant Pickets
Integral Guard Edge u u u
Weldless Construction
Flippable Design u u u u
Self Stacking u

16 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Selection Guide for

Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

™ ™ ® ® us ®
ge ge ex t x di lex
ta ta l e tan -Fle a
an 0 n i-F u i l R -F
v va 0 n tig sis n al mni
Ad 12 Ad 20 O
m Fa Re Om m
S O
Specifications Units
Stainless Stainless Stainless
Link Acetal Acetal
Steel Steel Steel
Stainless Stainless Stainless
Material(s) Rod Stainless Steel Stainless Steel
Steel Steel Steel
Stainless Stainless Stainless
Mesh Acetal Acetal
Steel Steel Steel
Turn Ratio 1.5 to 2.8 1.5 to 2.8 1.8 to 4.0 1.8 to 4.0 1.0 to 2.0

8.00–40.00 10.00–48.00 6.00–48.00 6.00–48.00 14.00–54.00

Curve
(203.2–1,016.0) (254.0–1,219.2) (152.4–1,219.2) (152.4–1,219.2) (355.6–1,371.6)

spiral belt selection

Width
Limits in.
(mm) 8.00–60.00 10.00–60.00 6.00–48.00 6.00–48.00
Straight N/A
(203.2–1,524.0) (254.0–1,524.0) (152.4–1,219.2) (152.4–1,219.2)

Inside Pickets: 1.084 (27.53)

Pitch 1.20 (30.5) 2.00 (50.8) 1.084 (27.53) 1.084 (27.53)
Outside Pickets: 1.5 (38.1)

Maximum Curve* 200 (91) 300 (136) 300 (136) 400 (181) 300 (136)
Tension
Straight* lb. 400 (182) 600 (273) 600 (273) 800 (362) 600 (273)
(kg)
Maximum Curve* 500 (226) 750 (340) N/A N/A N/A
Belt Pull Straight* 1000 (453) 1500 (680) N/A N/A N/A
Spiral Applications
Freezer u u u u u
Proofer u u
Chiller u u u u u
Cooker
Advantages
Frozen Product Release u u
Sanitary Design u u
Superior Air Flow u u u u u
High Load Capacity u u u u u
Superior Beam Strength u u u u u
Small Footprint u u u
Special Features
Wear Resistant Links
Fatigue Resistant Pickets u u u
Integral Guard Edge u u
Weldless Construction u u
Flippable Design u u u u
Self Stacking

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 17
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

NOTES
spiral belt selection

18 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Omni-Pro® Metal Spiral Belts

Evolutionary Steel Belts That Run

Smoother, Stronger, Longer
Features & Benefits OMNI-PRO® LINK COMPETITOR LINK
 Proven Reliability—All Ashworth
belts are rated for 100,000 cycles
versus competition ratings of only
50,000 cycles

 Reduced Wear—Patented “protru-

sion leg” design enables the belt to
run smoother with less system wear

 Added Strength & Easy to Clean—

Patent pending zero-tension, 360°
buttonless welds increase load bear- Patent Pending
ing capacity and are easier to clean Traditional
Zero Tension,
versus traditional bridge welds Bridge-Tension Weld
360° Buttonless Weld
 Increased Belt Life—Patented
coining feature reduces run-in wear
and increases belt life

spiral Products
Cross-section Cross-section
Patented of 360° of Traditional
Coining Buttonless Bridge Weld
Feature Weld

Omni-Pro® Standard Features Omni-Pro® Options

Omni-Tough® Mesh Overlay Patented Pigtail Spirals Integral Guard Edges Patented Special Mesh Spirals
2½ times stronger than Reduces wire breakage Available for 100/120/150, are A cost effective solution for
conventional overlays and is more durable and easier to clean adding lane dividers or flights
resistant to product sticking in than modular guard edges
freezer applications

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 19
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

¾-Inch Pitch
uu Omni-Pro® 075

Technical Specifications Units

Turn Ratio 2.2 to 2.5

Pitch 0.75 (19.1)
Available Widths: Curve/Spiral 12.00–40.00 (304.8–1016.0)
Available Widths: Straight Run 12.00–48.00 (304.8–1219.2)
Link Height in. (mm) 0.44 (11.1)
Link & Optional Mesh Overlay Material Heavy duty, extended leg, stainless steel
Rod Diameter/Material 0.192 (4.9) stainless steel
Conveying Surface 2.13 (54.1) less than nominal width
Weight See belt weight calculation
Curve/Spiral 150 (68) at 100,000 cycles
Allowable Tension lb. (kg)
Straight Run 250 (114) at 100,000 cycles
Turn Direction Bi-directional (left & right)
Mode of Turning Inside edge collapses in turn
Method of Drive Sprocket driven on links
spiral Products

Available Options
Omni-Tough ® Mesh Overlay
Variable Loop Count Overlay (Patented)
Overlay which has varied loop spacing
across the width of the belt allows the
loops to get progressively closer together
as the spiral goes from the inside of the
belt to the outside of the belt (inside and
Omni-Tough ® is a stainless steel, spring Designation B/U X – Y – Z outside in respect to a turn).
wire, spiral overlay available in 16 and 17
wire gauges. It is 2-1/2 times stronger and Special Spirals (Patented)
fL h
Sp s/F al W ve
ls ot o ave

y
t o idt

rla
gt
r ea

• Available in Omni-Tough® overlay only

en
e
W

more damage-resistant than conventional

ve
f L ila d W

O
f

wire overlays. Omni-Tough ® provides a • One or more spirals on conveying

of
U ce
oo te

o
oo
n

ge

flatter surface than standard overlays and surface are raised

la

/F

au
n
Ba

is also more resistant to product sticking • Used as lane dividers or flights

G
ira

Examples:
ire

in freezer applications.
• Maximum height is equal to belt pitch
W
o

B30-16-16
of
o.

• Available options: height, spacing, loca-

N

o.

U42-16-17
N

tion, shape, and number of lanes in belt

Equilateral Triangle Isosceles Triangle

20 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Omni-Pro® 075 ¾-Inch Pitch

UHMWPE Sprockets
OVERALL Pitch Hub
DIAMETER
Nom. Bore Min. Bore Max.*
PITCH Teeth Diameter Diameter
DIAMETER Size in. (mm) in. (mm)
in. (mm) in. (mm)
#3 12 2.90 (73.7) 2.25 (57.2) 1.00 (25.4) 1.44 (36.6)
Sprockets available in Stainless Steel, Plain Steel, and UHMWPE.
BORE MAX.
UHMWPE material type components have a 150°F (66°C) maximum operating temperature.
BORE MIN. Maximum bore sizes listed for UHMWPE material is based on 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) of material above keyway.
* Maximum bores provide adequate material thickness for standard keyway. Specify special sizes to be used
when necessary.

Supports
HUB HUB
DIAMETER WIDTH Supports are required at a maximum of 18" apart on load side and 24" maximum on return side.
Rollers may also be used. For light loads, support rails may be placed further apart: Consult Ashworth
Engineering for assistance.

Belt Weight Calculation Base Belt Weight

Weight of Base Belt + Weight of Overlay OA Belt Width Base Belt Weight OA Belt Width Base Belt Weight
Steps of calculation: in. (mm) lb/ft (kg/m) in. (mm) lb/ft (kg/m)
• Determine weight of base belt 12 (305) 2.20 (3.3) 32 (813) 4.79 (7.1)
• Calculate conveying surface and convert 14 (356) 2.45 (3.6) 34 (864) 5.05 (7.5)
to units of feet or meters 16 (406) 2.71 (4.0) 36 (914) 5.31 (7.9)
• Calculate square feet (square meter) of 18 (457) 2.97 (4.4) 38 (965) 5.56 (8.3)
mesh/foot (meter) of belt length
20 (508) 3.23 (4.8) 40 (1016) 5.82 (8.7)
• Use the conveying surface and mesh
22 (559) 3.49 (5.2) 42** (1067) 6.08 (9.0)

spiral Products
type to determine weight of mesh
• Add the weight of the base belt to weight 24 (610) 3.75 (5.6) 44** (1118) 6.34 (9.4)
of mesh overlay 26 (660) 4.01 (6.0) 46** (1168) 6.60 (9.8)
• Multiply calculated value by belt length 28 (711) 4.27 (6.4) 48** (1219) 6.86 (10.2)
for total belt weight 30 (762) 4.53 (6.7) **Recommended for Straight run only.

Open Surface Area % for OP75 Omni-Tough® Overlay Weight

Mesh Straight 2.2 Turn 16 ga. (1.6 mm) 17 ga. (1.4 mm)
Mesh
lb/ft² (kg/m²) lb/ft² (kg/m²)
none 74.4 69.7
18 0.65 (3.2) N/A
18-16-16 65.1 58.6
24 0.84 (4.1) N/A
18-16-17 66.3 60.1
30 1.04 (5.1) N/A
24-16-16 62.0 55.0
36 1.24 (6.1) 0.91 (4.4)
24-16-17 63.6 56.9
42 1.44 (7.0) 1.06 (5.2)
30-16-16 58.7 51.1
48 1.64 (8.0) 1.21 (5.9)
30-16-17 60.9 53.7
54 1.84 (9.0) 1.36 (6.6)
36-16-16 55.8 47.6
36-16-17 58.2 50.5
42-16-16 52.7 43.9
42-16-17 55.5 47.3
48-16-16 49.6 40.3
48-16-17 52.8 44.1
54-16-16 46.5 36.6
54-16-17 50.1 40.9

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 21
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

1-Inch Pitch
uu Omni-Pro® 100

Technical Specifications Units

Turn Ratio 1.6 to 2.5

Pitch 1.08 (27.4)
Available Widths: Curve/Spiral 12.00–40.00 (304.8–1016)
Available Widths: Straight Run 12.00–48.00 (304.8–1219.2)
Link Height in. (mm) 0.50 (12.7)
Link & Optional Mesh Overlay Material Heavy duty, extended leg, stainless steel
Rod Diameter/Material 0.192 (4.9) stainless steel
Conveying Surface 2.75 (69.9) less than nominal width
Weight See belt weight calculation
Curve/Spiral 200 (91) at 100,000 cycles
Allowable Tension lb. (kg)
Straight Run 400 (182) at 100,000 cycles
Turn Direction Bi-directional (left & right)
Mode of Turning Inside edge collapses in turn
Method of Drive Sprocket driven on links
spiral Products

Available Options
Omni-Tough ® Mesh Overlay
Variable Loop Count Overlay (Patented)
Overlay which has varied loop spacing
across the width of the belt allows the
loops to get progressively closer together
as the spiral goes from the inside of the
belt to the outside of the belt (inside and
Omni-Tough ® is a stainless steel, spring Designation B/U X – Y – Z outside in respect to a turn).
wire, spiral overlay available in 16 and 17
wire gauges. It is 2-1/2 times stronger and Special Spirals (Patented)
fL h
Sp s/F al W ve
ls ot o ave

y
t o idt

rla
gt
r ea

• Available in Omni-Tough® overlay only

en
e
W

more damage-resistant than conventional

ve
f L ila d W

O
f

wire overlays. Omni-Tough ® provides a • One or more spirals on conveying

of
U ce
oo te

o
oo
n

ge

flatter surface than standard overlays and surface are raised

la

/F

au
n
Ba

is also more resistant to product sticking • Used as lane dividers or flights

G
ira

Examples:
ire

in freezer applications.
• Maximum height is equal to belt pitch
W
o

B30-12-16
of
o.

• Available options: height, spacing, loca-

N

o.

U42-12-17
N

Integral Guard Edges tion, shape, and number of lanes in belt

Integral Guard
Edges are available
for Omni-Pro®
100/120/150 and are
more durable and
easier to clean than
modular guard edges Equilateral Triangle Isosceles Triangle

22 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Omni-Pro® 100 1-Inch Pitch

UHMWPE Sprockets
OVERALL Pitch Hub
DIAMETER
Nom. Bore Min. Bore Max.*
PITCH Teeth Diameter Diameter
DIAMETER Size in. (mm) in. (mm)
in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 4.53 (115.1) 3.90 (99.1) 1.00 (25.4) 2.19 (55.6)
#6 18 6.24 (158.5) 5.65 (143.5) 1.00 (25.4) 3.75 (95.3)
BORE MAX.

BORE MIN.
#8 23 7.96 (202.2) 7.39 (187.7) 1.00 (25.4) 4.00 (101.6)
UHMWPE material type components have a 150°F (66°C) maximum operating temperature.
*Maximum bore sizes listed for UHMWPE material is based on 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) of material above keyway.

Supports
HUB
DIAMETER WIDTH Supports are required at a maximum of 18" apart on load side and 24" maximum on return side.
Rollers may also be used. For light loads, support rails may be placed further apart: Consult Ashworth
Engineering for assistance.

Belt Weight Calculation Base Belt Weight

Weight of Base Belt + Weight of Overlay OA Belt Width Base Belt Weight OA Belt Width Base Belt Weight
in. (mm) lb/ft (kg/m) in. (mm) lb/ft (kg/m)
Steps of calculation:
• Determine weight of base belt 12 (305) 1.86 (2.8) 32 (813) 3.66 (5.4)
• Calculate conveying surface and convert 14 (356) 2.04 (3.0) 34 (864) 3.84 (5.7)
to units of feet or meters 16 (406) 2.22 (3.3) 36 (914) 4.02 (6.0)
• Calculate square feet (square meter) of 18 (457) 2.40 (3.6) 38 (965) 4.20 (6.3)
mesh/foot (meter) of belt length
20 (508) 2.58 (3.8) 40 (1016) 4.38 (6.5)
• Use the conveying surface and mesh
type to determine weight of mesh 22 (559) 2.76 (4.1) 42** (1067) 4.56 (6.8)

spiral Products
• Add the weight of the base belt to weight 24 (610) 2.94 (4.4) 44** (1118) 4.74 (7.1)
of mesh overlay 26 (660) 3.12 (4.6) 46** (1168) 4.92 (7.3)
• Multiply calculated value by belt length 28 (711) 3.30 (4.9) 48** (1219) 5.10 (7.6)
for total belt weight 30 (762) 3.48 (5.2) **Recommended for Straight run only.

Open Surface Area % for Omni-Pro® 100 Omni-Tough® Overlay Weight

mesh straight 1.6 turn 1.7 turn 2.2 turn 16 ga. 17 ga.
none 82.2 78.0 78.2 78.9 Mesh (1.6 mm) (1.4 mm)
lb/ft² (kg/m²) lb/ft² (kg/m²)
18-12-16 72.9 66.4 66.7 67.9
18-12-17 74.1 68.3 68.6 69.7 18 0.55 (2.7) N/A
24-12-16 69.8 62.6 62.9 64.2 24 0.74 (3.6) N/A
24-12-17 71.4 64.6 64.9 65.9 30 0.93 (4.5) N/A
36 1.08 (5.3) 0.82 (4.0)
30-12-16 66.7 58.8 59.1 60.5
42 1.26 (6.2) 0.95 (4.6)
30-12-17 68.7 61.2 61.6 62.9
48 1.44 (7.0) 1.08 (5.3)
36-12-16 63.6 54.9 55.3 56.9
54 1.62 (7.9) 1.22 (6.0)
36-12-17 66.0 57.9 58.6 59.7
42-12-16 60.5 51.1 51.5 53.2
42-12-17 63.3 54.6 55.0 56.5
48-12-16 57.4 47.3 47.7 49.5
48-12-17 60.6 51.2 54.5 53.3
54-12-16 54.3 43.4 43.9 45.8
54-12-17 57.9 47.9 48.3 50.1

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 23
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

1.2-Inch Pitch
uu Omni-Pro® 120

Technical Specifications Units

Turn Ratio 1.7 to 2.5

Pitch 1.20 (30.5)
Available Widths: Curve/Spiral 12.00–54 (304.8–1371.6)
Available Widths: Straight Run 12.00–60 (304.8–1524.0)
Link Height in. (mm) 0.59 (15.0)
Link & Optional Mesh Overlay Material Heavy duty, extended leg, stainless steel
Rod Diameter/Material 0.236 (5.9) stainless steel
Conveying Surface 3.13 (79.5) less than nominal width
Weight See belt weight calculation

Allowable Ten- Curve/Spiral 400 (182) at 100,000 cycles

lb. (kg)
sion Straight Run 800 (364) at 100,000 cycles
Turn Direction Bi-directional (left & right)
Mode of Turning Inside edge collapses in turn
Method of Drive Sprocket driven on links
spiral Products

Available Options
Omni-Tough ® Mesh Overlay
Variable Loop Count Overlay (Patented)
Overlay which has varied loop spacing
across the width of the belt allows the
loops to get progressively closer together
as the spiral goes from the inside of the
belt to the outside of the belt (inside and
Omni-Tough ® is a stainless steel, spring Designation B/U X – Y – Z outside in respect to a turn).
wire, spiral overlay available in 16 and 17
wire gauges. It is 2-1/2 times stronger and Special Spirals (Patented)
fL h
Sp s/F al W ve
ls ot o ave

y
t o idt

rla
gt
r ea

• Available in Omni-Tough® overlay only

en
e
W

more damage-resistant than conventional

ve
f L ila d W

O
f

wire overlays. Omni-Tough ® provides a • One or more spirals on conveying

of
U ce
oo te

o
oo
n

ge

flatter surface than standard overlays and surface are raised

la

/F

au
n
Ba

is also more resistant to product sticking • Used as lane dividers or flights

G
ira

Examples:
ire

in freezer applications.
• Maximum height is equal to belt pitch
W
o

B30-10-16
of
o.

• Available options: height, spacing, loca-

N

o.

U42-10-17
N

Integral Guard Edges tion, shape, and number of lanes in belt

Integral Guard
Edges are available
for Omni-Pro®
100/120/150 and are
more durable and
easier to clean than
modular guard edges Equilateral Triangle Isosceles Triangle

24 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Omni-Pro® 120 1.2-Inch Pitch

Steel Drive Sprockets

OVERALL Pitch Hub
DIAMETER
Nom. Bore Min. Bore Max.*
PITCH Teeth Diameter Diameter
DIAMETER Size in. (mm) in. (mm)
in. (mm) in. (mm)
#6 16 6.11 (155.2) 5.47 (138.9) 0.75 (19.1) 3.00 (76.2)
#8 21 8.05 (204.5) 7.38 (187.5) 0.75 (19.1) 4.00 (101.6)
BORE MAX.
#8-21 tooth sprockets recommended with 7-11/16 in. (195 mm) diameter filler rolls.
BORE MIN.
#6-16 tooth available with 5-3/4 in. (146 mm) diameter filler rolls for retrofitted systems only.
* Maximum bores provide adequate material thickness for standard keyway.
Specify special sizes to be used when necessary.

HUB
Supports
DIAMETER WIDTH
Supports are required at a maximum of 18" apart on load side and 24" maximum on return side.
Rollers may also be used. For light loads, support rails may be placed further apart: Consult Ashworth
Engineering for assistance.

Belt Weight Calculation Base Belt Weight

Weight of Base Belt + Weight of Overlay Base Belt Base Belt Base Belt
OA Belt Width OA Belt Width OA Belt Width
Weight Weight Weight
Steps of calculation: in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
lb/ft (kg/m) lb/ft (kg/m) lb/ft (kg/m)
• Determine weight of base belt
• Calculate conveying surface and convert 12 (305) 2.60 (3.9) 30 (762) 4.80 (7.1) 48 (1219) 7.01 (10.4)
to units of feet or meters 14 (356) 2.84 (4.2) 32 (813) 5.05 (7.5) 50 (1270) 7.25 (10.8)
• Calculate square feet (square meter) of 16 (406) 3.09 (4.6) 34 (864) 5.29 (7.9) 52 (1321) 7.50 (11.2)
mesh/foot (meter) of belt length 18 (457) 3.33 (5.0) 36 (914) 5.54 (8.2) 54 (1372) 7.74 (11.5)
• Use the conveying surface and mesh 20 (508) 3.58 (5.3) 38 (965) 5.78 (8.6) 56 (1422) 7.99 (11.9)
type to determine weight of mesh
22 (559) 3.82 (5.7) 40 (1016) 6.03 (9.0) 58 (1473) 8.23 (12.2)

spiral Products
• Add the weight of the base belt to weight
of mesh overlay 24 (610) 4.07 (6.1) 42 (1067) 6.27 (9.3) 60 (1524) 8.48 (12.6)
• Multiply calculated value by belt length 26 (660) 4.31 (6.4) 44 (1118) 6.52 (9.7)
for total belt weight 28 (711) 4.56 (6.8) 46 (1168) 6.76 (10.1)

Open Surface Area % for Omni-Pro® 120 Omni-Tough® Overlay Weight

Mesh Straight 1.7 Turn 2.2 Turn 16 ga. 17 ga.
none 80.3 75.8 76.7 Mesh (1.6 mm) (1.4 mm)
lb/ft² (kg/m²) lb/ft² (kg/m²)
18-10-16 71.0 64.4 65.6
18-10-17 72.2 65.9 67.1 18 0.53 (2.6) N/A
24-10-16 67.9 60.6 62.0 24 0.69 (3.4) N/A
24-10-17 69.5 62.6 63.9 30 0.86 (4.2) N/A
36 1.03 (5.0) 0.78 (3.8)
30-10-16 64.8 56.8 58.3
42 1.20 (5.9) 0.91 (4.4)
30-10-17 66.8 59.3 60.7
48 1.37 (6.7) 1.03 (5.0)
36-10-16 61.7 53.0 54.6
54 1.54 (7.5) 1.16 (5.7)
36-10-17 64.1 55.9 57.6
42-10-16 58.6 49.2 50.9
42-10-17 61.4 52.6 54.3
48-10-16 55.5 45.4 47.3
48-10-17 58.7 49.3 51.1
54-10-16 52.4 41.6 43.6
54-10-17 56.0 46.0 47.9

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 25
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

1½-Inch Pitch
uu Omni-Pro® 150
Technical Specifications Units

Turn Ratio 1.6 to 2.5

Pitch 1.50 (38.1)
Available Widths: Curve/Spiral 12.00–54 (304.8–1371.6)
Available Widths: Straight Run 12.00–60 (304.8–1524.0)
Link Height in. (mm) 0.59 (15.0)
Link & Optional Mesh Overlay Material Heavy duty, extended leg, stainless steel
Rod Diameter/Material 0.236 (6.0) stainless steel
Conveying Surface 3.13 (79.5) less than nominal width
Weight See belt weight calculation
Curve/Spiral 400 (182) at 100,000 cycles
Allowable Tension lb. (kg)
Straight Run 800 (364) at 100,000 cycles
Turn Direction Bi-directional (left & right)
Mode of Turning Inside edge collapses in turn
Method of Drive Sprocket driven on links
spiral Products

Available Options
Omni-Tough ® Mesh Overlay
Variable Loop Count Overlay (Patented)
Overlay which has varied loop spacing
across the width of the belt allows the
loops to get progressively closer together
as the spiral goes from the inside of the
belt to the outside of the belt (inside and
Omni-Tough ® is a stainless steel, spring Designation B/U X – Y – Z outside in respect to a turn).
wire, spiral overlay available in 16 and 17
wire gauges. It is 2-1/2 times stronger and Special Spirals (Patented)
fL h
Sp s/F al W ve
ls ot o ave

y
t o idt

rla
gt
r ea

• Available in Omni-Tough® overlay only

en
e
W

more damage-resistant than conventional

ve
f L ila d W

O
f

wire overlays. Omni-Tough ® provides a • One or more spirals on conveying

of
U ce
oo te

o
oo
n

ge

flatter surface than standard overlays and surface are raised

la

/F

au
n
Ba

is also more resistant to product sticking • Used as lane dividers or flights

G
ira

Examples:
ire

in freezer applications.
• Maximum height is equal to belt pitch
W
o

B30-8-16
of
o.

• Available options: height, spacing, loca-

N

o.

U42-8-17
N

Integral Guard Edges tion, shape, and number of lanes in belt

Integral Guard
Edges are available
for Omni-Pro®
100/120/150 and are
more durable and
easier to clean than
modular guard edges Equilateral Triangle Isosceles Triangle

26 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Omni-Pro® 150 1½-Inch Pitch

UHMWPE Sprockets
OVERALL Pitch Hub
DIAMETER
Nom. Bore Min. Bore Max.*
PITCH Teeth Diameter Diameter
DIAMETER Size in. (mm) in. (mm)
in. (mm) in. (mm)
#8 17 8.16 (207.3) 7.43 (188.7) 0.75 (19.1) 3 (76.2)
UHMWPE material type components have a 150°F (66°C) maximum operating temperature.
BORE MAX.
*Maximum bore sizes listed for UHMWPE material is based on 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) of material above keyway.
BORE MIN.

Supports
Supports are required at a maximum of 18" apart on load side and 24" maximum on return side.
HUB Rollers may also be used. For light loads, support rails may be placed further apart: Consult Ashworth
DIAMETER WIDTH
Engineering for assistance.

Belt Weight Calculation Base Belt Weight

Weight of Base Belt + Weight of Overlay Base Belt Base Belt Base Belt
OA Belt Width OA Belt Width OA Belt Width
Weight Weight Weight
Steps of calculation: in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
lb/ft (kg/m) lb/ft (kg/m) lb/ft (kg/m)
• Determine weight of base belt
12 (305) 2.30 (3.4) 30 (762) 4.06 (6.0) 48 (1219) 5.82 (8.7)
• Calculate conveying surface and convert
to units of feet or meters 14 (356) 2.49 (3.7) 32 (813) 4.26 (6.3) 50 (1270) 6.02 (9.0)
• Calculate square feet (square meter) of 16 (406) 2.69 (4.0) 34 (864) 4.45 (6.6) 52 (1321) 6.22 (9.3)
mesh/foot (meter) of belt length 18 (457) 2.88 (4.3) 36 (914) 4.65 (6.9) 54 (1372) 6.41 (9.5)
• Use the conveying surface and mesh 20 (508) 3.08 (4.6) 38 (965) 4.84 (7.2) 56 (1422) 6.61 (9.8)
type to determine weight of mesh
22 (559) 3.28 (4.9) 40 (1016) 5.04 (7.5) 58 (1473) 6.80 (10.1)

spiral Products
• Add the weight of the base belt to weight
24 (610) 3.47 (5.2) 42 (1067) 5.24 (7.8) 60 (1524) 7.00 (10.4)
of mesh overlay
• Multiply calculated value by belt length 26 (660) 3.67 (5.5) 44 (1118) 5.43 (8.1)
for total belt weight 28 (711) 3.86 (5.7) 46 (1168) 5.63 (8.4)

Open Surface Area % for Omni-Pro® 150 Omni-Tough® Overlay Weight

Mesh Straight 1.6 Turn 2.2 Turn 16 ga. 17 ga.
Mesh (1.6 mm) (1.4 mm)
none 84.2 81.4 81.3
lb/ft² (kg/m²) lb/ft² (kg/m²)
18-10-16 75.0 69.0 70.4
18 0.53 (2.6) N/A
18-8-17 76.2 70.5 71.8
24 0.69 (3.4) N/A
24-8-16 71.9 65.2 66.7 30 0.86 (4.2) N/A
24-8-17 73.5 67.2 68.6 36 1.03 (5.0) 0.78 (3.8)
30-8-16 68.8 61.4 63.0 42 1.20 (5.9) 0.91 (4.4)
30-8-17 70.8 63.8 65.4 48 1.37 (6.7) 1.03 (5.0)
36-8-16 65.7 57.5 59.3 54 1.54 (7.5) 1.16 (5.7)
36-8-17 68.1 60.5 62.2
42-8-16 62.6 53.7 55.1
42-8-17 65.4 57.2 59.0
48-8-16 59.5 49.9 52.0
48-8-17 62.7 53.8 55.8
54-8-16 56.4 46.0 48.3
54-8-17 60.0 50.5 52.6

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 27
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

¾-Inch Pitch
uu Small Radius Omni-Pro®

Technical Specifications Units

Turn Ratio 1.0 to 2.0

Pitch 0.75 (19.1)
Available Widths 12.00–48.00 (304.8–1219.2)
Link Type/Material: Inside Edge Standard collapsing stainless steel
Link Type/Material: Center Heavy duty non-collapsing links stainless steel
Link Type/Material: Outside Edge in. (mm) Heavy duty collapsing stainless steel
Link Height 0.438 (11.1)
Rod Diameter/Material 0.192 (4.9) stainless steel
Inside: Distance to center link minus 1.621 (41.2)
Conveying Surface
Outside: Overall width minus the distance to the center link, minus 1.873 (47.6)
Weight See belt weight calculation
Curve/Spiral 150 (68) at 100,000 cycles
Allowable Tension lb (kg)
Straight Run 300 (136) at 100,000 cycles
Turn Direction Uni-directional (left or right—must specify direction)
Mode of Turning Inside edge collapses in turn
Method of Drive Sprocket driven on inside and center links only
Optional Mesh Overlay Material Stainless steel
spiral Products

Available Options
Omni-Tough ® Mesh Overlay Variable Loop Count Overlay (Patented)
Overlay which has varied loop spacing
across the width of the belt allows the
loops to get progressively closer together
as the spiral goes from the inside of the
belt to the outside of the belt (inside and
outside in respect to a turn).
Omni-Tough ® is a stainless steel, spring Designation B/U X – Y – Z Special Spirals (Patented)
wire, spiral overlay for all Omni-Grid ®
• Available in Omni-Tough® overlay only
conveyor belt constructions, available in
fL h
Sp s/F al W ve
ls ot o ave

y
t o idt

rla

• One or more spirals on conveying

gt
r ea

en

both 16 and 17 wire gauges. It is 2-1/2

e
W

ve
f L ila d W

surface are raised

O
f

times stronger and more damage-resistant

of
U ce

• Used as lane dividers or flights

oo te

o
oo

than conventional wire overlays without

n

ge
la

/F

au
n
Ba

adding weight. Omni-Tough ® provides • Maximum height is equal to belt pitch

p

G
ira

ire

a flatter surface than standard overlays • Available options: height, spacing, loca-
W
o

and is also resistant to product sticking

of
o.

tion, shape, and number of lanes in belt

N

o.

in freezer applications. Available in both

N

straight and tapered spiral designs.

Designation Examples:
B30-12/16-16
U42-12/16-17

Equilateral Triangle Isosceles Triangle

28 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 ¾-Inch Pitch Small Radius Omni-Pro®

Steel Sprockets *
Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max.**
OVERALL Nom. Size Teeth
DIAMETER PITCH
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
DIAMETER
#3 12 2.90 (73.7) 2.36 (59.9) 1.00 (25.4) 1.44 (36.6)
#3-12 tooth sprockets are available in T303 stainless steel and C1141 hardened steel.
3/4" pitch Omni-Pro® can use #60 roller chain sprockets modified as follows:
BORE MAX. 1. Face off sprocket such that the overall tooth width is 5/16 (7.94)
BORE MIN. 2. Chamfer corners of the newly machined teeth
*Stock Sprocket. More available upon request.
** Maximum bores provide adequate material thickness for standard keyway. Specify special sizes.

HUB HUB UHMWPE Drive Sprockets*

DIAMETER WIDTH
Pitch Hub
Bore Min. Bore Max.**
Nom. Size Teeth Diameter Diameter
Belt Weight Calculation in. (mm) in. (mm)
in. (mm) in. (mm)
Weight of Base Belt + Weight of Overlay #3 12 2.9 (73.7) 2.36 (59.9) 1 (25.4) 1.44 (36.6)
Steps of calculation: *Stock Sprocket. More available upon request.
• Determine weight of base belt ** Maximum bores provide adequate material thickness for standard keyway. Specify special sizes.

• Calculate conveying surface and convert

to units of feet or meters
Base Belt Weight
• Calculate square feet (square meter) of Base Belt Base Belt Base Belt
OA Belt Width OA Belt Width OA Belt Width
Weight Weight Weight
mesh/foot (meter) of belt length in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
lb/ft (kg/m) lb/ft (kg/m) lb/ft (kg/m)
• Use the conveying surface and mesh
type to determine weight of mesh 12 (305) 2.76 (4.1) 26 (660) 4.65 (6.9) 40 (1016) 6.54 (9.7)
• Add the weight of the base belt to weight 14 (356) 3.03 (4.5) 28 (711) 4.92 (7.3) 42 (1067) 6.81 (10.1)

spiral Products
of mesh overlay 16 (406) 3.30 (4.9) 30 (762) 5.19 (7.7) 44 (1118) 7.08 (10.5)
• Multiply calculated value by belt length 18 (457) 3.57 (5.3) 32 (813) 5.46 (8.1) 46 (1168) 7.35 (10.9)
for total belt weight
20 (508) 3.84 (5.7) 34 (864) 5.73 (8.5) 48 (1219) 7.62 (11.3)
22 (559) 4.11 (6.1) 36 (914) 6.00 (8.9)
Open Surface Area % for 24 (610) 4.38 (6.5) 38 (965) 6.27 (9.3)
¾" Small Radius Omni-Pro®
Mesh Straight 1.1 Turn Omni-Tough® Overlay Weight
none 74.4 75.9
16 ga. (1.6 mm) 16 ga. (1.6 mm) 17 ga. (1.4 mm) 17 ga. (1.4 mm)
18-12/16-16 60.1 63.3 Mesh Inside Mesh Outside Mesh Inside Mesh Outside Mesh
18-12/16-17 61.9 64.2 lb/ft² (kg/m²) lb/ft² (kg/m²) lb/ft² (kg/m²) lb/ft² (kg/m²)
24-12/16-16 55.6 58.3 12 0.44 (2.1) 0.57 (2.8) 0.38 (1.9) 0.43 (2.1)
24-12/16-17 58.0 60.6 18 0.63 (3.1) 0.84 (4.1) 0.48 (2.3) 0.63 (3.1)
30-12/16-16 51.1 54.1 24 0.83 (4.1) 1.00 (4.9) 0.62 (3.0) 0.84 (4.1)
30-12/16-17 54.1 56.9 30 1.03 (5.0) 1.27 (6.2) 0.77 (3.8) 0.94 (4.6)
36-12/16-16 46.6 49.8 36 1.23 (6.0) 1.51 (7.4) 0.92 (4.5) 1.12 (5.5)
36-12/16-17 50.2 53.2 42 1.43 (7.0) 1.77 (8.6) 1.07 (5.2) 1.31 (6.4)
42-12/16-16 42.1 45.6 48 1.63 (8.0) 2.02 (9.9) 1.22 (6.0) 1.66 (8.1)
42-12/16-17 46.3 49.5 60 2.03 (9.9) 2.44 (11.9) 1.53 (7.5) 2.07 (10.1)
48-12/16-16 37.6 41.3 Note: 14 and 18 gauge mesh is available for certain applications.

48-12/16-17 42.3 45.8

54-12/16-16 33.0 37.0
54-12/16-17 38.3 42.0

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 29
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

1-Inch Pitch
uu Space Saver Omni-Grid®

Technical Specifications Units

Turn Ratio 1.7 to 2.2

Pitch 1.08 (27.4)
Available Widths 12–36 (304.8–914.4)
Link Height 0.50 (12.7)
Link Material in. (mm) Stainless steel
Optional Mesh Overlay Material Stainless steel
Rod Diameter/Material 0.192 (4.9) stainless steel
Conveying Surface 3.59 (91.2) less than nominal width
Weight See belt weight calculation
Curve/Spiral 150 (68) at 100,000 cycles
Allowable Tension lb. (kg)
Straight Run 300 (136) at 100,000 cycles
Turn Direction Uni-directional (left or right—must specify direction)
Mode of Turning Outside edge expands in turn
Sprocket driven on inside set of links only;
Method of Drive
special dual tooth sprocket required

Available Options
spiral Products

Omni-Tough ® Mesh Overlay Variable Loop Count Overlay (Patented)

Overlay which has varied loop spacing
across the width of the belt allows the
loops to get progressively closer together
as the spiral goes from the inside of the
belt to the outside of the belt (inside and
outside in respect to a turn).
Omni-Tough ® is a stainless steel, spring Designation B/U X – Y – Z
Special Spirals (Patented)
wire, spiral overlay for all Omni-Grid ® con-
• Available in Omni-Tough ® overlay only
of pitch th

veyor belt constructions, available in both

ira Fo We e
/F of ave

G for of L dth

y
rla
Sp s/ al av

O )
ge 8" ng

• One or more spirals on conveying sur-

ire (12oot Wi
of op ter e

ve

16 and 17 wire gauges. It is 2-1/2 times

au 1.0 e
o. Lo la d W

stronger and more damage-resistant than face are raised

U nce

ls ot

conventional wire overlays without adding • Used as lane dividers or flights

la
ni
Ba

weight. Omni-Tough ® provides a flatter • Maximum height is equal to belt pitch

surface than standard overlays and is also • Available options: height, spacing, loca-
N of

resistant to product sticking in freezer ap-

o.

tion, shape, and number of lanes in belt

N

plications. Available in both straight and

tapered spiral designs.
Designation Examples:
B30-12-16
U42-12-17

Equilateral Triangle Isosceles Triangle

30 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 1-Inch Pitch Space Saver Omni-Grid®

UHMWPE Drive Sprockets

Pitch Hub
OVERALL Bore Min. Bore Max.*
DIAMETER PITCH Nom. Size Teeth Diameter Diameter
in. (mm) in. (mm)
DIAMETER in. (mm) in. (mm)
*6 19 6.56 (166.6) 6.03 (153.2) 0.88 (22.4) 4.00 (101.6)
* Maximum bores provide adequate material thickness for standard keyway. Specify special sizes to be used
BORE MAX.
when necessary.
BORE MIN.

HUB
DIAMETER WIDTH

Belt Weight Calculation Base Belt Weight

Weight of Base Belt + Weight of Overlay OA Belt Width Base Belt Weight OA Belt Width Base Belt Weight
Steps of calculation: in. (mm) lb/ft (kg/m) in. (mm) lb/ft (kg/m)
• Determine weight of base belt 12 (305) 2.54 (3.8) 26 (660) 3.85 (5.7)
• Calculate conveying surface and convert 14 (356) 2.73 (4.1) 28 (711) 4.04 (6.0)
to units of feet or meters 16 (406) 2.92 (4.3) 30 (762) 4.23 (6.3)
• Calculate square feet (square meter) of 18 (457) 3.10 (4.6) 32 (813) 4.41 (6.6)
mesh/foot (meter) of belt length
20 (508) 3.29 (4.9) 34 (864) 4.60 (6.8)
• Use the conveying surface and mesh
type to determine weight of mesh 22 (559) 3.48 (5.2) 36 (914) 4.79 (7.1)
• Add the weight of the base belt to weight 24 (610) 3.66 (5.4)

spiral Products
of mesh overlay
• Multiply calculated value by belt length
for total belt weight

Open Surface Area % for Omni-Tough® Overlay Weight

Space Saver Omni-Grid® 16 ga. 17 ga.
Mesh (1.6 mm) (1.4 mm)
Mesh Straight 1.7 Turn lb/ft² (kg/m²) lb/ft² (kg/m²)
none 82.2 85.1 12 0.38 (1.9) 0.29 (1.4)
18-12-16 69.2 74.1 18 0.55 (2.7) 0.42 (2.1)
18-12-17 70.8 75.5 24 0.74 (3.6) 0.56 (2.7)
24-12-16 65.0 70.6 30 0.93 (4.5) 0.68 (3.3)
24-12-17 67.2 72.5 36 1.08 (5.3) 0.82 (4.0)
30-12-16 60.8 67.1 42 1.26 (6.2) 0.95 (4.6)
30-12-17 63.6 69.4 48 1.44 (7.0) 1.08 (5.3)
36-12-16 56.6 63.6 54 1.62 (7.9) 1.21 (5.9)
36-12-17 59.9 66.4 60 1.80 (8.8) 1.35 (6.6)
42-12-16 52.4 60.6 Note: 14 and 18 gauge mesh is
available for certain applications.
42-12-17 56.2 63.3
48-12-16 48.1 56.5
48-12-17 52.5 60.6
54-12-16 43.9 52.9
54-12-17 48.8 57.1

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 31
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

NOTES
spiral Products

32 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Advantage™ Plastic Spiral Belts

Tested. Certified. Safer.

Advantage™ 120 & 200

 Easy to Clean—The ONLY USDA Accepted spiral belt  Strongest Plastic Belt—Stainless steel rods handles 2.5
for meat & poultry, as well as NSF Certified & BISSC 3rd times the tension than the competition’s all-plastic belts in
Party Verified spiral applications
 Greatest Airflow for Shortest Dwell Times—With the  Guaranteed Not to Sag—Stainless steel rods provide
greatest open area, Advantage™ has been ETL proven superior beam strength eliminating the need for addi-
to have up to 370% less back pressure when compared tional support rails, which reduces friction, tension and
to all competitors’ plastic spiral belts energy consumption
 Quick No-Weld Repairs—Patented rod locking design al-  Guaranteed No Black Speck—Acetal links prevent
lows quick, easy assembly using only a screwdriver stainless steels parts from rubbing each other, the cause
of black specks

spiral Products
Compare the rod exposure and 67% open Assembly and disassembly are quick and The Advantage™ 120 and 200 feature
area of Advantage™ 200 (left) to the all- easy, requiring only a screwdriver. unique fully slotted rod openings, allowing
plastic belt competition (right). for more open area and belt strength.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 33
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Plastic Belt Air Flow Performance

Advantage™ 200 and 120 vs. the Competition

Open Area and Air Flow Performance

A primary feature of Ashworth’s Advantage™ belts is their large open area as compared to modular all-plastic
belts. The larger the open area, the easier it is for air to flow through the belt, resulting in shorter dwell times,
greater throughput, and less energy consumption.
To prove how efficient Ashworth’s Advantage™ belts are, Ashworth commissioned Intertek ETL Testing Ser-
vices (ETL), an independent Nationally Registered Testing Laboratory (NRTL), to conduct comparative air flow
tests and quantify air pressure drop (air flow resistance) of all commonly available plastic spiral belts.
ETL’s test setup consisted of a fan controlled by a variable speed drive to vary air flow volumes. Air pressure
upstream and downstream of the belts was measured and collected using inclined manometers.

Procedure
Each conveyor belt sample was clamped to the discharge of a 24" (609.6 mm) high by 18" (457.2 mm) wide
duct in both a fully expanded and a fully collapsed condition. The selected air flow volumes were 1,200 cfm,
1,650 cfm, and 2,100 cfm; typical air flows used in spiral freezers. The test method employed was ANSI/AMCA
210-99, ANSI/ASHRAE 51-1999, American National Standard “Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.”
An orifice metering station was employed for measuring the air volume.
ETL measured the pressure drop across each belt in both an open and closed position at each of the three
air volumes for a total of six readings. The open and closed readings for each air volume were averaged to
simulate the position of a belt in a spiral with the inside edge being fully collapsed and the outside edge being
spiral Products

fully open.

Results
These readings represent the air pressure drop that would be measured as air flows through each tier of the
spiral. Results for 2" (51 mm) pitch belts are shown in Figure 1.

34 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

[Figure 1]

Air Pressure Drop

2″ Pitch Belts

0.350

Sample E Sample E

0.300
Sample B

0.250
Inches of H2O

0.200
Sample B

0.150
Sample F

Sample C
0.100

spiral Products
Advantage 200

Sample F
0.050

0.000
1200 1650 2100

CFM

Sample C
The lower the air pressure drop, the more efficient the belt is since
more air is passing through it. More air flow results in greater air
contact with your product, lower dwell times, and increased pro-
duction. Less air resistance also increases your evaporator fans’
efficiency, resulting in lower electricity bills. ETL’s testing proved
that the Advantage™ 200 (depicted by the dark blue line at the
bottom of Figure 1) performs remarkably better than any of the
competitors’ all-plastic belts.
Ashworth’s Advantage™ 200
The difference in open area between
Ashworth’s Advantage™ 200 and the
competition is unquestionable.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 35
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

For smaller pitched belts, the results were even more dramatic. Ashworth’s Advantage™ 120 belt (depicted by
the dark blue line at the bottom of Figure 2) had 278% less pressure drop than its closest competitor and 401%
less than its worst performing competitor.
Results for belts with pitches of 1.2" to 1.5" (30.48 mm to 38.10 mm) are depicted in Figure 2.

[Figure 2]

Air Pressure Drop

Short Pitch Belts

0.5
Sample H
Sample H
0.45

0.4

Sample G
0.35
Inches of H2O

0.3
spiral Products

0.25
Sample G

0.2

0.15

Advantage 120
0.1

0.05

Ashworth’s Advantage™ 120

0 The difference in open area between
1200 1650 2100 Ashworth’s Advantage™ 120 and
the competition is again evident.
CFM

36 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Summary
The results are clear. Ashworth’s Advantage™ belts are significantly superior in enabling greater air
flow. Advantage™ belts are designed with steel cross rods, rather than plastic cross rods. Steel rods
carry heavier loads than plastic, so the Advantage’s surface modules are less bulky than the all-plastic
modular belts. Less bulky modules increase the belt’s open area and, the greater the open area, the
greater the air flow through the belt. The resulting benefits are reduced dwell times, faster freezing,
higher throughput, and reduced energy consumption.
Note: A copy of the original Intertek ETL test report is available from Ashworth upon request. ETL’s original test data is summarized below.

ETL Test Results—Advantage™ 200 vs. 2" Pitch All-Plastic Belts

Ashworth Advantage™ 200
Belts ETL Sample C ETL Sample F ETL Sample B ETL Sample E
(ETL Sample D)
CFM Belt Position Static Pressure Drop (Inches)
Open 0.010 0.008 0.012 0.017 0.011
1200 Closed 0.047 0.072 0.072 0.183 0.192
Average 0.029 0.040 0.042 0.100 0.102
Open 0.016 0.016 0.024 0.033 0.022
1650 Closed 0.068 0.142 0.136 0.340 0.375
Average 0.042 0.079 0.080 0.187 0.199
Open 0.025 0.027 0.038 0.052 0.035
2100 Closed 0.106 0.216 0.210 0.515 0.590
Average 0.066 0.122 0.124 0.284 0.313

Increased Air Pressure

spiral Products
Drop as Compared to N/A 85% 88% 330% 374%
Advantage™ 200 @ 2100 cfm

Note: Figures denoted in the white cells are ETL’s test readings for open and closed belt positions. Ashworth calculated the average of ETL’s test readings.

ETL Test Results—Advantage™ 120 vs. Short Pitch All-Plastic Belts

Ashworth Advantage™ 120
Belts ETL Sample G ETL Sample H
(ETL Sample A)
CFM Belt Position Static Pressure Drop (Inches)
Open 0.011 0.020 0.040
1200 Closed 0.055 0.224 0.280
Average 0.033 0.122 0.160
Open 0.019 0.040 0.077
1650 Closed 0.103 0.415 0.520
Average 0.061 0.228 0.299
Open 0.030 0.061 0.126
2100 Closed 0.154 0.635 0.795
Average 0.092 0.348 0.461
Increased Air Pressure
Drop as Compared to N/A 278% 401%
Advantage™ 120 @ 2100 cfm
Note: Figures denoted in the white cells are ETL’s test readings for open and closed belt positions. Ashworth calculated the average of ETL’s test readings.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 37
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

1.2-Inch Pitch
uu Advantage™ 120

Technical Specifications Units

Turn Ratio 1.6–2.8

Pitch 1.20 (30.5)
Available Widths: Curve/Spiral 8–40 (203–1016) in 1 (25.4) increments
Available Widths: Straight Run 8–60 (203–1524) in 1 (25.4) increments
in. (mm)
Conveying Surface Full belt width (subtract 1.0 (25.4) from side with guard edges)

Rod Diameter/Material 0.192 (4.9) stainless steel

Link Height 0.56 (14.2)
Weight See belt weight chart
Maximum Temperature 180 (82)
°F (°C)
Minimum Temperature -50 (-45)
Open Area 67% expanded / 61% average in turn
Average Air Pressure Drop inH2O (Pa) 0.061 (15.2) in a turn at 550 FPM
Curve/Spiral 500 (226)
Maximum Belt Pull
Straight Run 1000 (453)
lb. (kg)
Maximum Allow- Curve/Spiral 200 (91) at 100,000 cycles
able Tension Straight Run 400 (182) at 100,000 cycles
spiral Products

Link & Module Material Blue acetal (POM)

Turn Direction Bi-directional (left & right)
Mode of Turning Inside edge collapses in turn
Method of Drive Sprocket driven on links
Patent Number 7,073,662 (And other foreign, domestic, and pending patents)

Available Options
Integrated Guard Edges Lane Dividers Friction Top (FDA Approved)

Optional integrated guard edges are molded Optional rod-anchored stainless steel Optional friction top modules are available
into the link and can be installed on one or lane dividers can be installed at customer for Advantage™ belts. Gray in color,
both belt edges. Available in 1/2" and 1" specified locations within the surface friction top modules are placed within the
(12.7 and 25.4 mm) heights. module section of the belt. Available in 1/2" surface module section of the belt.
and 1" (12.7 and 25.4 mm) heights.

38 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 1.2-Inch Pitch Advantage™ 120

UHMWPE Drive Sprockets

OVERALL Pitch Hub
DIAMETER
Nom. Bore Min. Bore Max.*
PITCH Teeth Diameter Diameter
DIAMETER Size in. (mm) in. (mm)
in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 11 4.19 (106.4) 3.46 (87.9) 0.75 (19.1) 1.75 (44.5)
#5 13 4.90 (124.5) 4.23 (107.4) 0.75 (19.1) 2.25 (57.1)
BORE MAX.

BORE MIN.
#6 16 6.05 (153.7) 5.38 (136.7) 0.75 (19.1) 3.00 (76.2)
#8 21 7.88 (200.2) 7.27 (184.7) 0.75 (19.1) 4.00 (101.6)
*Maximum bores provide adequate material thickness for standard keyway.
Specify special sizes to be used when necessary.

HUB
DIAMETER WIDTH

Belt Weight by Width

Belt Width Belt Weight Belt Width Belt Weight Belt Width Belt Weight
in. (mm) lb/ft. (kg/m) in. (mm) lb/ft. (kg/m) in. (mm) lb/ft. (kg/m)
8 (203) 1.3 (1.9) 26 (660) 4.0 (6.0) 44 (1118) 6.7 (10.0)
10 (254) 1.7 (2.5) 28 (711) 4.3 (6.4) 46 (1168) 6.9 (10.3)
12 (305) 2.0 (3.0) 30 (762) 4.7 (7.0) 48 (1219) 7.2 (10.7)
14 (356) 2.3 (3.4) 32 (813) 4.9 (7.3) 50 (1270) 7.5 (11.2)
16 (406) 2.6 (3.9) 34 (864) 5.2 (7.7) 52 (1321) 7.8 (11.6)
18 (457) 2.9 (4.3) 36 (914) 5.5 (8.2) 54 (1372) 8.1 (12.1)
20 (508) 3.2 (4.8) 38 (965) 5.8 (8.6) 56 (1422) 8.4 (12.5)
22 (559) 3.5 (5.2) 40 (1016) 6.1 (9.1) 58 (1473) 8.7 (12.9)

spiral Products
24 (610) 3.7 (5.5) 42 (1067) 6.4 (9.5) 60 (1524) 9.0 (13.4)

NSF Certification
The Advantage™ 120 is NSF Certified to NSF/3-A/ANSI 14159-3 hygiene
requirements for the design of mechanical belt conveyors used in meat and
poultry processing.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 39
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

2-Inch Pitch
uu Advantage™ 200

Technical Specifications Units

Turn Ratio 1.5 to 2.8

Pitch 2.00 (50.8)
Available Widths: Curve/Spiral 10–48 (254–1219) in 1.0 (25.4) increments
Available Widths: Straight Run 10–60 (254–1524 in 1.0 (25.4) increments
in. (mm)
Conveying Surface Full belt width (subtract 1.25 (31.8) from side with guard edges)
Rod Diameter/Material 0.236 (6.0) stainless steel
Link Height 0.56 (14.2)
Weight See belt weight chart
Maximum Temperature 180 (82)
°F (°C)
Minimum Temperature -50 (-45)
Open Area 67% expanded / 61% average in turn
Average Air Pressure Drop inH2O (Pa) 0.042 (10.5) in a turn at 550 FPM
Curve/Spiral 750 (340)
Maximum Belt Pull
Straight Run 1500 (680)
lb. (kg)
Maximum Allow- Curve/Spiral 300 (136) at 100,000 cycles
able Tension Straight Run 600 (273) at 100,000 cycles
Link & Module Material Blue acetal (POM)
spiral Products

Turn Direction Bi-directional (left & right)

Mode of Turning Inside edge collapses in turn
Method of Drive Sprocket driven on links
Patent Number 7,073,662 (And other foreign, domestic, and pending patents)

Available Options
Integrated Guard Edges Lane Dividers Friction Top (FDA Approved)

Optional integrated guard edges are molded Optional rod-anchored stainless steel Optional friction top modules are available
into the link and can be installed on one or lane dividers can be installed at customer for Advantage™ belts. Gray in color,
both belt edges. Available in 1/2" and 1" specified locations within the surface friction top modules are placed within the
(12.7 and 25.4 mm) heights. module section of the belt. Available in 1/2" surface module section of the belt.
and 1" (12.7 and 25.4 mm) heights.

40 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 2-Inch Pitch Advantage™ 200

UHMWPE Drive Sprockets

Pitch Hub
OVERALL Nom. Bore Min. Bore Max.*
DIAMETER PITCH Teeth Diameter Diameter
Size in. (mm) in. (mm)
DIAMETER in. (mm) in. (mm)
#6 10 6.47 (164.3) 5.59 (142.0) 0.75 (19.1) 3.25 (82.6)
#8 13 8.36 (212.3) 7.55 (191.8) 0.75 (19.1) 4.00 (101.6)
BORE MAX.
*Maximum bores provide adequate material thickness for standard keyway.
BORE MIN. Specify special sizes to be used when necessary.

HUB
DIAMETER WIDTH

Belt Weight by Width

Belt Width Belt Weight Belt Width Belt Weight Belt Width Belt Weight
in. (mm) lb/ft. (kg/m) in. (mm) lb/ft. (kg/m) in. (mm) lb/ft. (kg/m)
10 (254) 1.5 (2.2) 28 (711) 3.9 (5.8) 46 (1168) 6.2 (9.2)
12 (305) 1.8 (2.7) 30 (762) 4.2 (6.3) 48 (1219) 6.5 (9.7)
14 (356) 2.1 (3.1) 32 (813) 4.4 (6.5) 50 (1270) 6.8 (10.1)
16 (406) 2.3 (3.4) 34 (864) 4.7 (7.0) 52 (1321) 7.0 (10.4)
18 (457) 2.6 (3.9) 36 (914) 6.0 (8.9) 54 (1372) 7.3 (10.9)
20 (508) 2.9 (4.3) 38 (965) 5.2 (7.7) 56 (1422) 7.6 (11.3)
22 (559) 3.2 (4.8) 40 (1016) 5.5 (8.2) 58 (1473) 7.8 (11.6)
24 (610) 3.4 (5.1) 42 (1067) 5.8 (8.6) 60 (1524) 8.1 (12.1)

spiral Products
26 (660) 3.6 (5.4) 44 (1118) 6.0 (8.9)

NSF Certification
The Advantage™ 200 is NSF Certified to NSF/3-A/ANSI 14159-3 hygiene
requirements for the design of mechanical belt conveyors used in meat and
poultry processing.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 41
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

NOTES
spiral Products

42 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Omni-Flex® Rugged Metal Spiral Belts

Superior Strength & Load Capacity
for High Speed, High Tension
Spiral and Turn-Curve Applications

Ashworth Omni-Flex® belts are the original turn-curve conveyor belts and have been delivering reliable
performance since 1959. These flat wire belts are constructed with heavy duty, precision formed rod ends
for extended cage life and buttonheads for maximum strength and reduced wear. Unlike straight-running flat
wire belts, Omni-Flex® belts are constructed with slots instead of holes. The slotted design allows the belt to
collapse on either side, for both left-hand and right-hand turns.

Stainless Steel, Heavy Duty Construction

All Omni-Flex® components are precision crafted from premium quality stainless steel to exacting standards.
The finish is smooth and burr-free for easy clean-up and excellent sanitary properties. Two rows of reinforcing
bar links are standard to provide strength.

Broad Range of Sizes & Accessories

Available flat wire mesh dimensions for Omni-Flex® belts include 1" x 1", 1/2" x 1" and 1/3" x 1". Ashworth patent-
ed fatigue-resistant pickets are available on most Omni-Flex® belts and increase belt service life by about 30%.
Other accessories such as guard edges, reinforcing bar links, and lane dividers are available for special needs.

spiral Products
Standard Bar Link Short Slotted Bar Link

Detachable Lane Guard Edge Plate Non-Detachable

Divider Lane Divider

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 43
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

1-Inch Pitch
uu Omni-Flex® E1 & E2

Technical Specifications Units

Turn Ratio 1.8 (without bar links)

Pitch 1.084 (27.5)
Available Widths 6.00–48.00 (152.4–1219.2)
Picket Dimension/Material: E1 & E2 0.500 x .062 (12.7 x 1.6) stainless steel flat wire
Nominal Picket (Mesh) Shape: E1 1.00 x 1.00 (25.4 x 25.4)
Nominal Picket (Mesh) Shape: E2 in. (mm) 0.50 x 1.00 (12.7 x 25.4)
Rod Diameter/Material 0.192 (4.9) / stainless steel
Bar Links Double, heavy duty, collapsing 0.090 (2.3) thick, on inside and outside belt edges
Conveying Surface: Standard Links 0.25 (6.4) less than nominal belt width
Thickness 0.50 (12.7)
Weight See belt weight chart
Allowable Tension lb. (kg) 300 (136) at 100,000 cycles
Turn Direction Bi-directional (left & right)
Mode of Turning Inside edge collapses in turn
Positive drive with matching sprockets spaced a max. of 6 (152.4) apart or
Method of Drive in. (mm)
Friction drive with a minimum 12 (304.8) diameter flat faced drum
spiral Products

Available Options
Guard Edges Lane Dividers Fatigue Resistant Pickets (Patented)
Plates assembled onto belt
edges to prevent product Fatigue Resistant
Picket Side View
from falling off. Guard
edges serve to replace
Guard Edge
bar links on a one-to-one
basis. Available heights
(above the conveying surface) are: 0.50" Detachable Non-Detachable
(12.7 mm), 0.75" (19.1 mm), 1" (25.4 mm), Lane Divider Lane Divider
1.5" (38.1 mm), and 2" (50.8 mm). These special pickets, which are
Detachable or non-detachable plates manufactured with an outward facing
assembled into the belt’s surface to radius centered on the trailing face of the
locate product. Available heights (above picket, are designed to extend the service
the conveying surface) are: 0.50" (12.7 life of the belt by approximately 30%. This
mm), 0.75" (19.1 mm), 1" (25.4 mm), radius serves to lengthen the belt pitch
1.5" (38.1 mm), and 2" (50.8 mm). The in selected openings near the outside
maximum number of lane dividers = Belt edge of the belt. This causes the bar
Width / 9" (228.6 mm). links to bear the full load of the belt in a
turn, relieving stress on the picket, which
increases the belt’s service life.

44 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 1-Inch Pitch Omni-Flex® E1 & E2

Steel Sprockets
Pitch Hub
Bore Min. Bore Max.*
Nom. Size Teeth Diameter Diameter
OVERALL in. (mm) in. (mm)
DIAMETER in. (mm) in. (mm)
PITCH
DIAMETER #4 13 4.53 (115.1) 3.90 (99.1) 1.00 (25.4) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 6.24 (158.5) 5.65 (143.5) 1.00 (25.4) 3.50 (88.9)
#8 23 7.96 (202.2) 7.39 (187.7) 1.00 (25.4) 4.50 (114.3)
BORE MAX.

BORE MIN.

UHMWPE Drive Sprockets

Pitch Hub
Bore Min. Bore Max.*
Nom. Size Teeth Diameter Diameter
in. (mm) in. (mm)
HUB HUB in. (mm) in. (mm)
DIAMETER WIDTH
#4 13 4.53 (115.1) 3.90 (99.1) 1.00 (25.4) 2.19 (55.6)
#6 18 6.24 (158.5) 5.65 (143.5) 1.00 (25.4) 3.75 (95.3)
#8 23 7.96 (202.2) 7.39 (187.7) 1.00 (25.4) 4.00 (101.6)
* Maximum bores provide adequate material thickness for standard keyway. Specify special sizes.

Open Surface Area % for Base Belt Weight

Omni-Flex® E1 Belt Width E1–Weight per Unit of Length E2–Weight per Unit of Length
in. (mm) lb/ft (kg/m) lb/ft (kg/m)
Mesh Straight 2.0 Turn
6 (152) 1.94 (2.9) 2.04 (3.0)
1x1 70.4 64.5
8 (203) 2.46 (3.7) 2.60 (3.9)
10 (254) 2.97 (4.4) 3.16 (4.7)

spiral Products
12 (305) 3.49 (5.2) 3.72 (5.5)
Open Surface Area % for
14 (356) 4.01 (6.0) 4.28 (6.4)
Omni-Flex® E2
16 (406) 4.52 (6.7) 4.84 (7.2)
Mesh Straight 2.0 Turn 18 (457) 5.04 (7.5) 5.39 (8.0)
½x1 64.0 52.0 20 (508) 5.56 (8.3) 5.95 (8.9)
22 (559) 6.07 (9.0) 6.51 (9.7)
24 (610) 6.59 (9.8) 7.07 (10.5)
26 (660) 7.11 (10.6) 7.63 (11.4)
28 (711) 7.62 (11.3) 8.19 (12.2)
30 (762) 8.14 (12.1) 8.74 (13.0)
32 (813) 8.66 (12.9) 9.30 (13.8)
34 (864) 9.17 (13.6) 9.86 (14.7)
36 (914) 9.69 (14.4) 10.42 (15.5)
38 (965) 10.21 (15.2) 10.98 (16.3)
40 (1016) 10.72 (16.0) 11.54 (17.2)
42 (1067) 11.24 (16.7) 12.09 (18.0)
44 (1118) 11.76 (17.5) 12.65 (18.8)
46 (1168) 12.27 (18.3) 13.21 (19.7)
48 (1219) 12.79 (19.0) 13.77 (20.5)
Note: Weights listed apply to standard construction Omni-Flex® with double bar links on both edges of
the belt. Consult Ashworth Engineering for weights of non-standard configured belts.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 45
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

1-Inch Pitch
uu Omni-Flex® E3

Technical Specifications Units

Turn Ratio 2.0 and above (with bar links)

Pitch 1.084 (27.5)
Available Widths 6–48 (152.4–1219.2)
Picket Dimension/Material 0.50 x .05 (12.7 x 1.3) stainless steel flat wire
Nominal Picket (Mesh) Shape 0.33 x 1.00 (8.4 x 25.4)
in. (mm)
Rod Diameter/Material 0.192 (4.9) / stainless steel
Bar Links Double, heavy duty, 0.09 (2.3) thick, on inside and outside belt edges
Conveying Surface: Standard Links 0.25 (6.4) less than nominal belt width
Thickness 0.5 (12.7)
Weight See belt weight chart
Allowable Tension lb. (kg) 300 (136) at 100,000 cycles
Turn Direction Bi-directional (left & right)
Mode of Turning Inside edge collapses in turn
Positive drive with matching sprockets spaced a max. of 6 (152.4) apart or
Method of Drive in. (mm)
Friction drive with a minimum 12 (304.8) diameter flat faced drum
spiral Products

Available Options

Guard Edge Detachable Non-Detachable

Lane Divider Lane Divider
Guard Edges Lane Dividers
Plates assembled onto belt edges to Detachable or non-detachable plates
prevent product from falling off. Guard assembled onto the belt’s surface to
edges serve to replace bar links on a one- locate product. Available heights (above
to-one basis. Available heights (above the the conveying surface) are: 0.50" (12.7
conveying surface) are: 0.50" (12.7 mm), mm), 0.75" (19.1 mm), 1" (25.4 mm),
0.75" (19.1 mm), 1" (25.4 mm), 1.5" (38.1 1.5" (38.1 mm), and 2" (50.8 mm). The
mm), and 2" (50.8 mm). maximum number of lane dividers = Belt
Width / 9" (228.6 mm).

46 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 1-Inch Pitch Omni-Flex® E3

Steel Sprockets
Overall Pitch Hub Hub
Nom. Bore Min. Bore Max.*
OVERALL Teeth Diameter Diameter Diameter Width
Size in. (mm) in. (mm)
DIAMETER PITCH in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
DIAMETER
#4 13 5.03 (127.8) 4.53 (115.1) 3.90 (99.1) 1.50 (38.1) 1.00 (25.4) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 6.65 (168.9) 6.24 (158.5) 5.65 (143.5) 1.50 (38.1) 1.00 (25.4) 3.50 (88.9)
BORE MAX. #8 23 8.39 (213.1) 7.96 (202.2) 7.39 (187.7) 1.50 (38.1) 1.00 (25.4) 4.50 (114.3)
BORE MIN. *Maximum bores provide adequate material thickness for standard keyway. Specify special sizes.

UHMWPE Drive Sprockets

Overall Pitch Hub
Nom. Hub Width Bore Min. Bore Max.*
Teeth Diameter Diameter Diameter
Size in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
HUB in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
DIAMETER WIDTH
#4 13 4.90 (124.5) 4.53 (115.1) 3.90 (99.1) 2.00 (50.8) 1.00 (25.4) 2.19 (55.6)
#6 18 6.65 (168.9) 6.24 (158.5) 5.65 (143.5) 2.00 (50.8) 1.00 (25.4) 3.75 (95.3)
#8 23 8.39 (213.1) 7.96 (202.2) 7.39 (187.7) 2.00 (50.8) 1.00 (25.4) 4.00 (101.6)
* Maximum bores provide adequate material thickness for standard keyway. Specify special sizes.

Open Surface Area % for Base Belt Weight

Omni-Flex® E3 OA Belt Width Base Belt Weight
in. (mm) lb/ft (kg/m)
Mesh Straight 2.0 Turn 6 (152) 2.03 (3.0)
1⁄3 x 1 57.7 49.2 8 (203) 2.58 (3.8)
10 (254) 3.14 (4.7)
12 (305) 3.69 (5.5)

spiral Products
14 (356) 4.24 (6.3)
16 (406) 4.80 (7.1)
18 (457) 5.35 (8.0)
20 (508) 5.90 (8.8)
22 (559) 6.46 (9.6)
24 (610) 7.01 (10.4)
26 (660) 7.56 (11.3)
28 (711) 8.12 (12.1)
30 (762) 8.67 (12.9)
32 (813) 9.22 (13.7)
34 (864) 9.78 (14.6)
36 (914) 10.33 (15.4)
38 (965) 10.88 (16.2)
40 (1016) 11.44 (17.0)
42 (1067) 11.99 (17.8)
44 (1118) 12.54 (18.7)
46 (1168) 13.10 (19.5)
48 (1219) 13.65 (20.3)
Note: Weights listed apply to standard construction Omni-Flex® E3 with double bar links on both edges
of the belt. Consult Ashworth Engineering for weights of non-standard configured belts.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 47
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

1-Inch Pitch
uu Small Radius Omni-Flex® G1 & G3

Technical Specifications Units

Turn Ratio 1.0 and greater

Pitch: Inside Pickets 1.084 (27.5)
Pitch: Outside Pickets 1.50 (38.1)
Available Widths: G1 14.00–54.00 (355.6–1371.6)
Available Widths: G3 12–54 (304.8–1371.6)
Picket Dimension/Material: Inside 0.50 x 0.06 (12.7 x 1.5) stainless steel flat wire
Picket Dimension/Material: Outside 0.50 x 0.05 (12.7 x 1.3) stainless steel flat wire
Nom. Picket (Mesh) Shape: G1 Inside 1.00 x 1.00 (25.4 x 25.4)
in. (mm)
Nom. Picket (Mesh) Shape: G1 Outside 1.00 x 1.50 (25.4 x 38.1)
Nom. Picket (Mesh Shape: G3 Inside 0.50 x 1.00 (12.7 x 25.4)
Nom. Picket (Mesh) Shape: G3 Outside 0.50 x 1.50 (12.7 x 38.1)
Rod Diameter/Material 0.192 (4.9) / stainless steel
Bar Links Double, heavy duty, 0.09 (2.3) thick, assembled in the center of the belt
Conveying Surface: Standard Links 0.25 (6.4) less than nominal belt width
Thickness 0.50 (12.7)
Weight See belt weight chart
Allowable Tension lb. (kg) 300 (136) at 100,000 cycles
spiral Products

Turn Direction Uni-directional (left or right—must specify direction)

Mode of Turning Inside edge collapses in turn
Method of Drive Positive drive with matching sprockets, toothless idlers support outside pickets

Available Options
Bar Links on Inside Edge Lane Dividers Fatigue Resistant Pickets (Patented)
Fatigue Resistant
Picket Side View

Standard Bar Link Short Slotted Bar Link

One double row of bar links at the center of Detachable Non-Detachable

the belt is standard on all Omni-Flex® belts Lane Divider Lane Divider
in order to carry belt tension. A double row These special pickets, which are
of bar links configured at the inside edge of Detachable or non-detachable plates manufactured with an outward facing
the belt is optional. assembled onto the belt’s surface to radius centered on the trailing face of the
Guard Edges locate product. Available heights (above picket, are designed to extend the service
Plates assembled onto belt the conveying surface) are: 0.50" (12.7 life of the belt by approximately 30%. This
edges to prevent product mm), 0.75" (19.1 mm), 1" (25.4 mm), radius serves to lengthen the belt pitch in
from falling off. Guard 1.5" (38.1 mm), and 2" (50.8 mm). The selected openings near the outside edge of
edges serve to replace bar maximum number of lane dividers = Belt the belt. This causes the bar links to bear
links on a one-to-one basis. Width / 9" (228.6 mm). the full load of the belt in a turn, relieving
Guard Edge
Available heights (above stress on the picket, which increases the
the conveying surface) are: 0.50" (12.7 mm), belt’s service life.
0.75" (19.1 mm), 1" (25.4 mm), 1.5" (38.1
mm), and 2" (50.8 mm).

48 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 1-Inch Pitch Small Radius Omni-Flex® G1 & G3

OVERALL
DIAMETER PITCH
DIAMETER

BORE MAX.

BORE MIN.

UHMWPE Drive Sprockets

Pitch Hub
Bore Min. Bore Max.*
Nom. Size Teeth Diameter Diameter
HUB in. (mm) in. (mm)
DIAMETER WIDTH
in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 4.53 (115.1) 3.90 (99.1) 1.00 (25.4) 2.19 (55.6)
#6 18 6.24 (158.5) 5.65 (143.5) 1.00 (25.4) 3.75 (95.3)
#8 23 7.96 (202.2) 7.39 (187.7) 1.00 (25.4) 4.00 (101.6)
* Maximum bores provide adequate material thickness for standard keyway. Specify special sizes.

Open Surface Area % for Base Belt Weight

Omni-Flex® G1 G1 G3
Belt Width
Weight per Unit of Length Weight per Unit of Length
Mesh Straight 1.0 Turn in. (mm)
lb/ft (kg/m) lb/ft (kg/m)
1x1-1x1½ 65.8 66.6
12 (305) N/A N/A 3.49 (5.2)
14 (356) 3.61 (5.4) 4.01 (6.0)

spiral Products
16 (406) 4.07 (6.1) 4.54 (6.8)
Open Surface Area % for 18 (457) 4.54 (6.8) 5.06 (7.5)
Omni-Flex® G3 20 (508) 5.01 (7.5) 5.59 (8.3)
22 (559) 5.47 (8.1) 6.11 (9.1)
Mesh Straight 1.0 Turn
24 (610) 5.94 (8.8) 6.64 (9.9)
½x1-½x1½ 62.6 63.5
26 (660) 6.41 (9.5) 7.16 (10.7)
28 (711) 6.87 (10.2) 7.69 (11.4)
30 (762) 7.34 (10.9) 8.21 (12.2)
32 (813) 7.81 (11.6) 8.74 (13.0)
34 (864) 8.27 (12.3) 9.26 (13.8)
36 (914) 8.74 (13.0) 9.79 (14.6)
38 (965) 9.21 (13.7) 10.31 (15.3)
40 (1016) 9.67 (14.4) 10.84 (16.1)
42 (1067) 10.14 (15.1) 11.36 (16.9)
44 (1118) 10.61 (15.8) 11.89 (17.7)
46 (1168) 11.07 (16.5) 12.41 (18.5)
48 (1219) 11.54 (17.2) 12.94 (19.3)
50 (1270) 12.01 (17.9) 13.46 (20.0)
52 (1321) 12.47 (18.6) 13.99 (20.8)
54 (1372) 12.94 (19.3) 14.51 (21.6)
Note: Weights listed apply to standard construction Small Radius Omni-Flex® with double bar links as-
sembled in the center of the belt and with no bar links along the edges. Consult Ashworth Engineering
for weights of non-standard configured belts.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 49
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

NOTES
spiral Products

50 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

ExactaStack™
Drop-in Replacement Belt for
Self Stacking Spirals

ExactaStack™ & ExactaStack™ WD

 Drop-in Replacement—Available in all widths, tier  Made in the USA—For fast deliveries and competitive pricing.
heights, and mesh configurations for both spliced-in sec-  ExactaStack's "Rack & Roll®" Crating System—For space-
tions and complete belt replacements, no system drive saving storage and quick roll-out/roll-in belt replacements.
modifications required.
 USDA Plastic Overlay—The only stacker belt available
with a plastic module overlay that is both USDA Accepted
for meat and poultry and proven by ETL to have the great-
est open area, perfect for a stacker's vertical airflow.
 Turn-Key—Expert technical E3
support and full turn-key in-
stallation from the belting experts who invented spirals.

spiral Products
ExactaStack™ with the patented ExactaStack™ is shipped in the Rack & ExactaStack™ is available in all widths, tier
Advantage™ plastic module overlay Roll® crating system for easy installation. heights, and mesh configurations for either
sectional or complete replacement.

ExactaStack™ Turn-Key Belt Replacement

 Turn-Key and Stress Free—Skilled Ashworth Factory  What's included?
Service technicians will install your new ExactaStack™
 A completely new ExactaStack™ belt that will meet
belt, inspect the drive system, make the necessary ad-
your production needs
justments for optimal performance, and then provide a
detailed system report certified by our spiral belt experts.  The services of an Ashworth Factory Service Repre-
sentative to recommend the belt that is right for you
 The services of an Ashworth Factory Service techni-
cian to install your optimized belt
 Adjustment of the drive system to match the new belt
and a system inspection report

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 51
 Self-Stacking Spiral Belts

uu ExactaStack™ Standard Belt

Technical Specifications Units

Turn Ratio Approximately 1.7 (designed to fit existing systems)

Pitch 60 is the longitudinal pitch per link; 30 is the intermediate rod spacing.
Available Widths 420, 580, 640, 760
Conveying Surface mm 45 less than belt width
Tier Height 60, 80, 100, 120, 150, 180, 220
Rod Diameter 5.0
Weight See belt weight chart
Material Stainless steel links, rods, and mesh
Turn Direction Clockwise or counterclockwise
Belts will carry the maximum load specified by the system manufacturer for
Allowable Tension
an equivalent belt
Mode of Turning Inside edge collapses in turn

Available Options
Wire Mesh Overlays Special Wire Mesh Overlays
Typically, special mesh configurations can Open Surface Area %
spiral Products

Mesh is specified using the standard be made to match existing belts with non- for ExactaStack™
designation for existing systems, X-Y-Z, as standard mesh overlay. Please consult
shown below. Mesh Straight 1.7 turn
Ashworth engineering.
M6-1.6 57.2 47.5
X = Belt Width Y = Pitch Z = Wire Dia.
Special Plastic Overlay M9-1.6 65.9 58.2
Plastic mesh with nominal 13 mm (0.5”)
42 = 420 mm 6 mm 1.6 mm
openings is available. Maximum operat- M13-1.6 71.3 64.8
58 = 580 mm 9 mm 1.8 mm ing temperature is 180°F. Plastic mesh is M20-1.6 75.6 70.1
64 = 640 mm 13 mm not suitable for applications where caustic
76 = 760 mm 20 mm cleaners are used. Please consult Ash-
worth engineering.

Standard mesh overlay for ExactaStack™

is a right-hand wind, unilateral weave (see
illustration) comprised of two mating spi-
rals. The first terminates with round pig-
tails on the leading side of the spiral. The
second terminates with oval pigtails on
the trailing side of the spiral and has one
less loop across the width of the belt such
that the oval pigtails are nested within the
round pigtails on the adjacent spiral. The
pigtails of both spirals are installed on the
connecting rod joining the links. A washer
is installed between the link and the spirals
on the collapsing side only.

52 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 ExactaStack™

Belt Weight (lb/ft)

Belt Width Link Height Mesh Pitch 6 mm 9 mm 13 mm 20 mm Plastic
60 mm 4.64 4.06 3.68 3.39 4.25
80 mm 5.03 4.45 4.06 3.78 4.64
100 mm 5.41 4.83 4.45 4.16 5.03
420 mm 120 mm 5.80 5.22 4.83 4.55 5.41
150 mm 6.38 5.80 5.41 5.13 5.99
180 mm 6.96 6.38 5.99 5.71 6.57
220 mm 7.73 7.15 6.76 6.48 7.34

60 mm 5.97 5.12 4.59 4.19 5.37

80 mm 6.36 5.50 4.98 4.58 5.75
100 mm 6.74 5.89 5.36 4.96 6.14
580 mm 120 mm 7.13 6.27 5.75 5.35 6.52
150 mm 7.71 6.85 6.33 5.93 7.10
180 mm 8.29 7.43 6.91 6.51 7.68
220 mm 9.06 8.20 7.68 7.28 8.45

60 mm 6.47 5.53 4.95 4.49 5.78

80 mm 6.86 5.92 5.33 4.88 6.17
100 mm 7.25 6.30 5.72 5.26 6.55
640 mm 120 mm 7.63 6.69 6.11 5.65 6.94

spiral Products
150 mm 8.21 7.27 6.68 6.23 7.52
180 mm 8.79 7.85 7.26 6.81 8.10
220 mm 9.56 8.62 8.04 7.58 8.87

60 mm 7.48 6.33 5.64 5.09 6.61

80 mm 7.87 6.72 6.02 5.47 7.00
100 mm 8.25 7.10 6.41 5.86 7.39
760 mm 120 mm 8.64 7.49 6.80 6.25 7.77
150 mm 9.22 8.07 7.38 6.83 8.35
180 mm 9.80 8.65 7.95 7.40 8.93
220 mm 10.57 9.42 8.73 8.18 9.70
Note: Multiply lb/ft x 1.49 to convert to kg/m

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 53
 Self-Stacking Spiral Belts

uu ExactaStack™ WD

Technical Specifications Units

Approximately 1.92 (7 mm rods) / 1.75 (6 mm rods)

Turn Ratio
(designed to fit existing systems)
Pitch 60 is the longitudinal pitch per link; 30 is the intermediate rod spacing
Available Widths 760, 920, 1060
Conveying Surface mm 42 less than belt width
Tier Height Nominal tier heights of 80, 100, 120, 150, 180, 220
Rod Diameter 6.0 or 7.0 depending on belt width
Weight See belt weight chart
Material Stainless steel links, rods, and mesh
Turn Direction Clockwise or counterclockwise
Belts will carry the maximum load specified by the system manufacturer
Allowable Tension
for an equivalent belt
Mode of Turning Inside edge collapses in turn

Available Options
Wire Mesh Overlays Special Wire Mesh Overlays
Typically, special mesh configurations can
Open Surface Area %
spiral Products

Mesh is specified using the standard be made to match existing belts with non- for ExactaStack™ WD
designation for existing systems, X-Y-Z, as standard mesh overlay. Please consult Mesh Straight 1.7 turn
shown below. Ashworth engineering
M6-1.6 50.4 39.1
M9-1.6 59.2 49.9
X = Belt Width Y = Pitch Z = Wire Dia.
M13-1.6 64.5 56.4
76 = 760 mm 6 mm 1.6 mm
92 = 920 mm 9 mm 1.8 mm M20-1.6 68.8 61.7
106 = 1060 mm 13 mm
20 mm

Standard mesh overlay for ExactaStack™

WD is a right-hand wind, unilateral weave
(see illustration) comprised of two mating
spirals. The first terminates with round
pigtails on the leading side of the spiral.
The second terminates with oval pigtails on
the trailing side of the spiral and has one
less loop across the width of the belt such
that the oval pigtails are nested within the
round pigtails on the adjacent spiral. The
pigtails of both spirals are installed on the
connecting rod joining the links. Tension
links are installed between the links and
spirals on both sides of the belt.

54 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 ExactaStack™ WD

Belt Weight (lb/ft)

Mesh Pitch 6 mm 9 mm 13 mm 20 mm
Belt Width Link Height
Wire 1.6 mm 1.8 mm 1.6 mm 1.8 mm 1.6 mm 1.8 mm 1.6 mm 1.8 mm
80 mm 9.57 10.52 8.40 9.04 7.68 8.12 7.10 7.40
100 mm 9.96 10.91 8.79 9.43 8.06 8.51 7.49 7.78
120 mm 10.34 11.29 9.17 9.81 8.45 8.90 7.87 8.17
760 mm
150 mm 10.92 11.87 9.75 10.39 9.03 9.48 8.45 8.75
180 mm 11.50 12.45 10.30 10.97 9.61 10.05 9.03 9.33
220 mm 12.27 13.22 11.10 11.74 10.38 10.83 9.80 10.10

80 mm 13.00 14.21 11.50 12.31 10.57 11.13 9.86 10.23

100 mm 13.38 14.59 11.89 12.70 10.95 11.52 10.24 10.62
120 mm 13.77 14.98 12.27 13.09 11.34 11.90 10.63 11.01
920 mm
150 mm 14.35 15.56 12.85 13.67 11.92 12.48 11.21 11.58
180 mm 14.93 16.14 13.43 14.24 12.50 13.06 11.79 12.16
220 mm 15.70 16.91 14.20 15.02 13.27 13.83 12.56 12.94

80 mm 14.71 16.12 12.93 13.87 11.87 12.53 11.05 11.48

100 mm 15.10 16.51 13.32 14.25 12.26 12.91 11.43 11.87
120 mm 15.48 16.89 13.70 14.64 12.64 13.30 11.82 12.26
1060 mm
150 mm 16.06 17.47 14.28 15.22 13.22 13.88 12.40 12.84
180 mm 16.64 18.05 14.86 15.80 13.80 14.46 12.98 13.41

spiral Products
220 mm 17.41 18.82 15.63 16.57 14.57 15.23 13.75 14.19
Note: Multiply lb/ft x 1.49 to convert to kg/m

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 55
 Self-Stacking Spiral Belts

NOTES
spiral Products

56 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Mesh Diagrams–Omni-Pro®

Omni-Pro ® 075 with B36-16-17 Mesh Omni-Pro ® 075 with B60-16-16 Mesh

mesh diagrams

Omni-Pro ® 100 with No Mesh Omni-Pro ® 100 with B18-12-17 Mesh

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 57
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Mesh Diagrams–Omni-Pro®

Omni-Pro ® 100 with B24-12-16 Mesh Omni-Pro ® 100 with B30-12-17 Mesh
MESH DIAGRAMS

Omni-Pro ® 100 with B36-12-16 Mesh Omni-Pro ® 100 with B48-12-17 Mesh

58 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Mesh Diagrams–Omni-Pro®

Omni-Pro ® 100 with B72-12-17 Mesh Omni-Pro ® 100 with U54-12-16 Mesh
Available on select widths. Contact Customer Service for further information.

mesh diagrams

Omni-Pro ® 120 with B36-10-16 Mesh Omni-Pro ® 120 with U42-10-16 Mesh
Available on select widths. Contact Customer Service for further information.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 59
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Mesh Diagrams–Omni-Pro®

Omni-Pro ® 120 with U48-10-16 Mesh

Available on select widths. Contact Customer Service for further information.
MESH DIAGRAMS

Omni-Pro ® 150 with U24-8-16 Mesh

Available on select widths. Contact Customer Service for further information.

60 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Mesh Diagrams - ExactaStack™

ExactaStack™ with 6 mm mesh ExactaStack™ with 9 mm mesh

mesh diagrams

ExactaStack™ with 13 mm mesh ExactaStack™ with 20 mm mesh

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 61
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Mesh Diagrams–Omni-Flex®

Omni-Flex ® E1 Omni-Flex ® E2
MESH DIAGRAMS

Omni-Flex ® E3

62 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Mesh Diagrams - Advantage™

Advantage™ 120 (Also available for ExactaStack™)

mesh diagrams

Advantage™ 200

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 63
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Concepts of Lotension
Lotension Engineering

Invented By Ashworth
Food manufacturers have increasingly turned to lotension spiral technology as a means of achieving produc-
tion efficiencies in cooking, proofing, cooling, and freezing of their products. Spiral systems offer significant
advantages such as a smaller footprint and increased production capacity. Due to the low tension nature of
the systems, they reduce wear on the belts and other conveyor system components, typically reducing down-
time and replacement costs.

Cage/Drum

Auxiliary Drive

Take-up

Tier

Single Spiral Dual Spiral

[Figure 3] [Figure 4]
Most ovens, proofers, coolers, and freezers have single spirals (Figure 3). These units typically load at the
bottom and discharge product at the top and are optimally employed when the production process requires a
change in elevation. Sometimes, however, dual spirals (Figure 4) are used, with two cages driving the same
belt. This allows the product to be loaded and unloaded on the same production level and/or to further in-
crease dwell time of the product.
Lotension Drive
At the heart of the lotension spiral system is the drum or cage. (“Drum” and “cage” are used interchange-
ably throughout this catalog.) This forms the largest single component of the system, and provides the main
source of drive for the conveyor belt. The typical spiral system is designed with the conveyor belt entering at
the bottom of the drum and exiting at the top although some spirals’ in-feed and out-feed are opposite of this
set-up. During the belt’s travel, its edge is held in tight contact with the drum, so that the friction created by
the wraps of the belt around the drum is sufficient to drive the belt through the system. The drum is usually
driven from underneath by an electric motor and can be either direct or chain-driven. The mechanism that
keeps the belt tight against the drum is the secondary drive, normally called the take-up or auxiliary drive.
The auxiliary drive provides just enough pull on the belt to keep the belt in tight contact with the drum and to
help set belt speed, not to provide the driving force to the belt. This keeps belt tension low, hence, the name
of the system: lotension.

64 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Lotension Engineering
Overdrive
As indicated, the belt is driven through the system by virtue of it being tightly held against the side of the cage
or drum. The tighter the belt is against the drum the more effective the cage is in driving the belt through the
spiral, until the point of maximum effectiveness is reached (without creating unnecessarily high tension levels
within the system). At this point, a small amount of slip, also known as overdrive, exists between the cage and
the conveyor belt. The belt is moving effectively at this speed, so it is unnecessary to increase the amount of
force on the belt (via the auxiliary drive). The relationship between the speed of the belt and the speed of the
cage can be measured in terms of the slip between the surfaces. Without slip, there is no overdrive and the
amount of belt tension can reach high, unsatisfactory levels. This can cause damage to the belt and/or cage
which may lead to system failure.
The amount of overdrive in a lotension spiral system is quantified and controlled. The intent is to set the
amount of slip relative to the desired belt speed, in order to obtain the least amount of force needed to move
the belt. Since the belt is being driven both horizontally and vertically around the cage, overdrive must be
adjusted to compensate for the amount of required vertical movement. For this reason, the amount of slip or
overdrive is measured in terms of vertical movement per revolution or tier pitch. In most lotension systems, a
minimum of 2–4 tiers of overdrive are observed.
Lotension spiral systems are designed to have slip or overdrive built into the system’s operation, so it is
common to have the cage or drum start up before the auxiliary drive. This keeps system tension as low as
possible. When the auxiliary drive starts, the belt is pulled tight around the cage and the conveyor belt starts
to move. Because all belting materials contract in reaction to cold temperatures, this must be accounted for in
design of the system. Multiple safety devices are used in a spiral system, including belt take-up mechanisms
with proximity switches that signal abnormal changes in belt length and tension.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 65
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Spiral System Requirements

Lotension Engineering

The following points are basic engineering considerations to keep in mind when designing and/or operating a
lotension spiral system.

Straight Runs Before & After Curves

Spiral conveyor belts must run straight for certain calculated distances prior to entering, and upon exiting,
curves. Straight runs before and after curves allow the belt’s component parts to fully realign themselves
so that the next curve can be successfully navigated by the belt. Failure to provide the minimal distance of
straight run before or after a curve may result in belt damage. The following guidelines should be observed:
Stainless Steel Belts:
Minimum straight run before and after every turn should be at least 1.5 times the belt width.
Minimum straight run between two opposite curves should be at least 3 times the belt width.
Advantage™ Belts:
Minimum straight run before and after every turn should be at least 1.5 times the belt width.
Minimum straight run between two opposite curves should be at least 2 times the belt width.

Spiral Cage Bar Caps

Stainless Steel Belts:
Ultra High Molecular Weight Polyethylene (UHMWPE) capped cage bars are recommended to drive metal belts.
UHMWPE cage bar cap profiles section.
Advantage™ Belts:
A stainless steel drum, stainless steel cage bars, or UHMWPE-capped cage bars are recommended. Stain-
less steel will typically increase the driving force against the belt’s inside edge. Eliminate any sharp corners
or rough surfaces that might gouge or prematurely wear the belt. Surface should be smooth to the touch.

Turn Curve Capping

UHMWPE is recommended for fixed inside turn rails on conveyors for Advantage™ and metal belts.

Flip-up Detectors
Electrical or mechanical switches are recommended on every tier of an up cage or every other tier of a down
cage and positioned to detect a change in belt position. When Advantage™ belts are specified, it is important
to ensure the detectors are compatible with plastic belts.

Take-up
In a straight run or fixed turn setup, an unsupported loop of belt (catenary sag) following the drive sprockets is
a satisfactory take-up solution. In a spiral system, the following guidelines apply:
Stainless Steel Belts:
A rule of thumb is that the take-up should be able to accommodate 1.0% of the total belt length. This value is
dependent on the temperature differences in the spiral.
Advantage™ Belts:
A double loop take-up with free hanging weight is recommended as plastic belts can require twice as much
take-up travel as all-metal belts. Accordingly, the rule of thumb for Advantage™ belts is that the take-up
should be able to accommodate 2.5% of the total belt length. As with steel belts, the actual value is depen-
dent on the temperature differences in the spiral.

66 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Lotension Engineering
Lubrication
For information on lubricating spiral belting, reference the section, “Cleaning & Lubricating.”

Ground Strap
Belts operating on plastic wear strips will generate and hold a mild static electrical charge. This is particularly
true for plastic belts. To prevent electrical shock, a grounding device should be installed in the return path.

Overdrive
For information on overdrive requirements, please reference the section, “Measuring Overdrive.”

Flipping Spiral Belts

To minimize wear and to maximize the service life of a spiral conveyor belt, Ashworth recommends that the
belt be “flipped” so that the inside of the edge of the belt becomes the outside edge and vice versa. Ashworth
recommends that spiral belts be flipped when one belt edge measures 0.5% longer than the opposite edge
(1/16" per foot [5 mm per meter] of belt).
Flipping a belt requires that the belt must first be un-installed and then re-installed on the spiral. See “Installa-
tion of Spiral Belts” section for more information on this topic.
Note: Belts equipped with optional features such as edge guards, friction modules, lane dividers, or other protruding options cannot be flipped.

Requirements Specific to Plastic Belts

Use in Freezers and Chillers:
Periodic starting and stopping of all plastic belting, including Advantage™ belts, in freezing applications al-
lows accumulated frost on the belt to melt and, upon re-entering the freezer, become ice. Ice accumulation
between the cross rod and body module reduces the design clearance, which could result in breakage of the
modules. In addition, ice accumulation at the belt’s inside edge may prevent the belt from collapsing tightly
enough to adequately grip the drum or cage bars, resulting in loss of the spiral drive. To diminish the likeli-
hood of these problems, periodic stopping and starting of the spiral should be minimized.
Fire Safety Precautions:
Most plastic belting, including the Advantage™ belts, contain thermoplastic components that can burn. If
exposed to an open flame or to temperatures above stated specifications, belts may decompose and emit
toxic fumes. Do not expose plastic belts to extreme temperatures or to an open flame. Additionally, these
belts should not be used following any process, such as an oven, where products could be ignited before be-
ing placed on the belt. Refer to the appropriate MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheet) for other precautions and
emergency response information.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 67
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Spiral System Requirements

Lotension Engineering

Wear Strip Placement

In most cases, the top surface of the wear strips (Figure 5) should be positioned at height according to the
following formula:
A = 1/2 x (PD – BT)
Where:
A = calculated height
PD = sprocket pitch diameter
BT = belt thickness

Belt Thicknesses are:

Omni-Grid® and Omni-Flex® = 0.50" (12.7 mm)
Advantage™ and Omni-Pro® = 0.56" (14.29 mm)

Note: This is only a guideline; it does not take into account the influence of speed. At speeds above 75 ft/min. (23 m/min), Ashworth recommends increasing
the distance A and shortening the wear strips as much as one belt pitch in length.

+ .02" (.05 mm)

A -.02" (.05 mm)
1/2 Hub
Diameter

Pitch Diameter

[Figure 5]

Belt Support Rails

For standard acetal (POM) Advantage™ belts, use UHMWPE-capped or stainless steel support rails. Steel
belts typically require UHMWPE-capped support rails. The notable exception to this requirement is that ovens
may require high temperature caps. Eliminate any sharp corners or rough surfaces that might gouge or pre-
maturely wear the belt. Surface finish should be smooth to the touch.
Support rail spacing should be selected based on the product weight and how evenly the weight is distributed
on the belt surface. On the return path, rails can be spaced up to 20" (500 mm) apart.

68 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Lotension DESIGN
DATA SHEETS

Data Sheet continued on next page

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 69
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts
Lotension DESIGN
DATA SHEETS

Data Sheet continued on next page

70 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Lotension DESIGN
DATA SHEETS

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 71
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Plastic Belt Tension Ratings

Lotension Engineering

Maximum Belt Pull vs. Maximum Allowable Tension

Deciphering the many terms and methodologies used by various conveyor belt manufacturers to quantify
belt tension ratings can be confusing. Phrases such as belt strength, maximum belt pull, permissible tension
strength, maximum allowable tension, and allowable tension can dilute the true purpose of tension ratings.
The most radical tension rating method in the industry is now one of the most common, as it is often used by
all-plastic conveyor belt manufacturers. Ashworth labels this method Maximum Belt Pull. This measurement
(usually measured in pounds or kilograms) represents the absolute maximum amount of tension the belt can
withstand just before it breaks. The reason our competitors use this method is to produce and publish the
highest possible tension ratings for their belts. However, this does not represent an apples-to-apples com-
parison for our customers.
In contrast, Ashworth uses a more conservative and realistic method of measuring tension for most of our
belts. Maximum Allowable Tension is defined as continuous or constant working strength. This rating
method builds in a real-world safety factor as compared to the Maximum Belt Pull rating where no safety fac-
tor is considered. Conservatively rating the belt with a built-in safety factor allows room for the belt to safely
absorb tension peaks that can occur in spiral and turn-curve systems. This rating system lessens the concern
for damaged belts and connected equipment due to excessive system tension.
The difference between a belt rated using the competition’s Maximum Belt Pull method and one rated with
Ashworth’s Maximum Allowable Tension is the difference between a belt that is vulnerable to sudden, unex-
pected damage and a reliable Ashworth belt.
Many all-plastic conveyor belt manufacturers use Maximum Belt Pull terminology in an attempt to disguise the
fact that their belts are not as strong as all-steel or metal/plastic hybrid belts in spiral or turn-curve applica-
tions. Ashworth does not favor this rating method; however, tension ratings for our Advantage™ family of belts
are expressed in terms of Maximum Allowable Tension as well as Maximum Belt Pull. We do this to give our
customers a true apples-to-apples comparison between Ashworth’s hybrid Advantage™ belts and our com-
petitors’ all-plastic modular belts.
The table below illustrates the difference in the measurement techniques:

Maximum Belt Pull Maximum Allowable Tension

Belt Type Difference
(Competition’s Methodology) (Ashworth Methodology)

Advantage™ 200 750 lb. 300 lb. 2.50x

Advantage™ 120 500 lb. 200 lb. 2.50x

As illustrated in the table, the different measurement techniques yield large differences in the results. Maxi-
mum Belt Pull methodology results in tension ratings that are up to 2.5 times the result obtained using Maxi-
mum Allowable Tension. Don’t be fooled by some manufacturers’ rating methodology—make sure you are
comparing apples-to-apples when it comes to tension ratings.

72 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Lotension Engineering
Maximum Allowable Tension Testing and Number of Test Cycles
Are published test ratings from one manufacturer to another directly comparable? Unfortunately, the answer
to this question is no.
First of all, one must be sure the test methodology is comparable, as there is no recognized standard test rat-
ing methodology for either modular plastic or steel conveyor belts for maximum allowable tension. Ashworth
tests its turn-curve conveyor belts on a 90° turn test conveyor where tension ratings are carefully monitored
over the course of the test. A test belt is run for several weeks (more on test cycles below) and inspected on
a regular basis to detect problems with links, rods, modules, sprockets, and any other critical components that
have the potential to cause the belt to fail. Over the many years that Ashworth has been producing conveyor
belts, we have found this test methodology accurate in determining our belts’ maximum allowable tension and
their potential service life in cycles.
Even in cases where the test method is judged to be comparable, a critical issue is how many test cycles are
used in rating the belt. This is important because the majority of belt failures are caused by fatigue, and fa-
tigue is both a function of the stress (i.e., the amount of tension placed on the belt) and the length of time the
belt was subjected to that stress (i.e., the number of fatigue cycles).
The bottom line is that a belt that is rated at 50,000 cycles will have a higher maximum allowable tension
rating than the same belt rated at 100,000 cycles. It is also important to note that, because of the way most
conveyor belts wear, the relationship between maximum allowable tension ratings and fatigue cycles is not
linear, so one cannot assume that a belt rated at 50,000 cycles will have twice the maximum allowable tension
rating as a belt rated at 100,000 cycles.
Unless stated otherwise, all Ashworth maximum allowable tension ratings are published at 100,000 cycles. In
contrast, some of Ashworth competitors quote and/or publish tension ratings at 50,000 cycles. The only way
to make apples-to-apples comparison between different competitors’ tension ratings is to make sure the basic
tests are comparable, and that the tension ratings are specified at the same number of cycles. For more
information on Ashworth’s test methodology, please contact Ashworth.

Straight vs. Curve Runs and Their Affect on Tension Ratings

In addition to the different terminology used in the industry, it is also helpful to understand that almost all con-
veyor belts will have higher tension ratings in straight-running applications than in spiral or turn-curve applica-
tions (all other factors being equal). In straight-run applications, the entire load (i.e. tension) the belt carries
is spread equally across the entire width of the belt. In contrast, in a turn-curve or spiral application the load is
transferred from the interior sections of the belt to the outermost link or module. Consequently, for belts used
in spiral or turn-curve applications, maximum tension ratings will be less than in straight-running applications.
For belts manufactured using drive links on either side of the belt, turn-curve or spiral tension ratings will be
approximately half of the belt’s tension rating for straight-running applications.

Environmental and Application Influences—The Most Important Consideration

By far the most important point to remember about belt tension ratings is that the amount of tension any
particular belt can withstand is based on the complete set of environmental and application factors to which
the belt is exposed. Therefore it is advisable for the spiral operator to consult an Ashworth Sales, Customer
Service or Engineering expert for assistance in selecting the best belt for their particular application.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 73
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

NOTES
Lotension Engineering

74 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Lotension:
Spiral Belt Selection
& Engineering Calculations

Lotension Engineering
The following are basic engineering formulas used in the design of lotension spiral systems.
Contact Ashworth engineering should you require further explanation or assistance.

Belt Selection
Ashworth lotension spiral conveyor belts are available in a wide variety of materials and designs with many
available options. In selecting the belt that is optimal for your application, accurate information and care-
ful consideration of your system’s operating characteristics, the environmental conditions, and your product
specifications are essential.
Use of the "Selection Guide for Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts”, combined with some basic engineering calcula-
tions, will help you select the belt that is right for your particular system. Specific factors to evaluate include:
• Overall dimensions of the installed belt
• Overall dimensions of your spiral equipment and its in-feed and out-feed characteristics
• Characteristics of the product being conveyed including its size, shape, and weight
• Process change in the product during conveyance: cooling, freezing, proofing, and cooking
• Product transfer requirements
• Required levels of cleanliness and sanitation
• Characteristics of the operating environment; temperature, humidity, cleaning methods, and solutions

Turn Ratio
All spiral and turn-curve belts are designed to negotiate curves; however, some are designed to negotiate
tighter turns than others. The turn ratio of the belt designates how tightly the belt will negotiate a turn. The
lower the turn ratio, the tighter the belt will turn. To calculate a belt’s required Turn Ratio (TR), measure and
record the Inside Radius (IR) of the spiral cage and divide this number by the required Belt Width (BW). The
required turn ratio can, therefore, be expressed as:

Turn Ratio = Inside Turn Radius divided by Belt Width

TR = IR / BW
Note: The inside turn radius of the system and the belt width must be in the same unit of measurement, either inches or millimeters.

If the turn ratio of the system does not exactly match one of the available belt ratios, specify the next smaller
belt turn ratio. (Example: If the system turn ratio is 2.1, specify a belt turn ratio of 1.9 rather than 2.2.) In
general, a belt with a given turn ratio will work on a system with a larger turn ratio, but not on a system with a
smaller turn ratio. However, take care not to select a belt with a turn ratio substantially less than the required
system turn ratio. This may cause the belt to vibrate or “chatter” where the inside edge of the belt contacts
the drum. As a rule of thumb, the belt’s turn ratio should be no less than 0.3 of the system’s turn ratio.

Sample Turn Ratio Calculation (Figure 6):

Spiral Cage Diameter = 15' = 180"
IR = 90" (2286 mm)
BW = 38" (965.2 mm) IR = 90"
(2286 mm)
TR = 90" (2286 mm) / 38" (965.2 mm) = 2.36
System requires a belt with a 2.2 turn ratio

[Figure 6]

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 75
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts
Lotension Engineering

Radius Weight (Belt Tension) Calculation for Spiral/Turn-Curve Applications

All spiral belts are designed to carry specific loads. Belt loading or belt tension is expressed in terms of Ra-
dius Weight or, in Ashworth terminology, Allowable Belt Tension. For more information on belt tension ratings,
see the “Plastic Belt Tension Ratings” section.
Radius Weight is calculated using the following formula:
RW = R (WB+WL)(fr/fc)
Where:
RW = Radius Weight or Belt Tension
R = System Radius (i.e., radius to outside edge of belt or tension link)
WB = Weight of Belt per unit of length
WL = Weight of Product per unit of length
fr = Friction coefficient between belt and support rails
fc = Friction coefficient between belt and cage bars
Note: This is a “rule of thumb” formula that provides an approximation of actual belt tension.

Calculation:
Note: Convert all units to feet (ft) and pounds (lb.) or meters (m) and kilograms (kg).

• Calculate the system radius (R) by measuring the inside turn radius and adding the belt width. For small
radius belts, measure from the inside radius to the center link.
• Calculate the weight of the belt (WB). Information on how to calculate WB is contained in the appropriate
product sections of this catalog.
• Determine the weight of product (WL) that will be loaded on one foot (or meter) of belt length. Product loading
information is presented in the following sections.
• Determine the friction coefficient (fr) between the belt and support rails (see Figure 8 on the next page).
• Determine the friction coefficient (fc) between the belt and cage bars (see Figure 8 on the next page).
• Substitute the values into the equation and calculate.
Note: Radius Weight is recommended not to exceed the maximum turn-curve/spiral tension rating provided in the appropriate product specification sections
of this catalog.

Example:
Assuming a radius to the tension link of 10 ft (3.05 m), and a combined weight of the belt plus load equal to
10 lb/ft (14.9 kg/m), with the rail and cage friction both at 0.2, we have:

RW = R x W x (fr / fc)
= 10 x 10 x (0.20 /0.20)
= 100 lb.

or = 3.05 x 14.9 x (0.20 /0.20) x 9.807

= 445 Newtons

76 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Spiral Belt Selection

& Engineering Calculations

Lotension Engineering
Friction Coefficients (Used in Radius Weight Calculations)
[Figure 7]

Stainless belt Acetal belt Acetal belt

Type of product
on UHMWPE on UHMWPE on Stainless
Clean/packaged 0.20 0.15 0.18
Breaded/flour-based 0.27 0.22 0.25
Greasy/fried, temp < 32°F (0°C) 0.30 0.25 0.28
Sticky/sugar-glazed 0.35 0.30 0.33

Product Spacing for Spiral/Turn-Curve Applications

The allowable product spacing per length of belt is the tension link radius divided by the
inside turn radius (Figure 8).

The formula to determine correct product spacing is:

AS = (IR + BW) / IR

Where:
AS = Allowable Spacing 30" (762 mm)
IR = Inside Turn Radius
BW = Belt Width
Sample Spacing Calculation:
IR = Inside Turn Radius = 66" (1676 mm)
BW = Belt Width = 30" (762 mm)
Tension Link Radius
R = 66.0"
= IR + BW (R1676.4 mm)
= 66" (1676 mm) + 30" (762 mm)
= 96" (2438 mm)
Allowable Spacing
= 96" / 66" (2438 mm / 1676 mm)
10"
= 1.46 (254 mm)
Allowable spacing is, therefore, one product length per
1.46 lengths of belt. In other words, 46% of the product
length must be left between products in straight runs to
prevent products from touching in a turn. 4.6"
(116.8 mm)

[Figure 8]

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 77
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts
Lotension Engineering

Round Product Spacing for Spiral Applications

The allowable round product spacing per length of belt is the tension link radius divided by
the product center radius (Figure 9).

The formula to determine round product spacing is:

AS = (IR + BW) / (IR + PC)
30" (762 mm)
Where:
AS = Allowable Spacing
IR = Inside Turn Radius
BW = Belt Width
PC = Product Center
7.5" (190.5 mm)
Sample Spacing Calculation: Product Center
IR = Inside Turn Radius = 66" (1676 mm) Location
BW = Belt Width = 30" (762 mm)
PC = Product Center = 7.5" (191 mm) R = 66.0"
(R1676.4 mm)
Tension Link Radius
= IR + BW
= 66" (1676 mm) + 30" (762 mm)
= 96" (2438 mm) 10"
(254 mm)
Product Center Radius
= IR + PC
= 66" (1676 mm) + 7.5" (191 mm)
= 73.5" (1867 mm) 3.1"
(78.7 mm)
Allowable Round Product Spacing
= 96" / 73.5" (2438 mm + 1867 mm)
= 1.31
Allowable spacing is, therefore, one product length per
1.31 lengths of belt. In other words, 31% of the product [Figure 9]
length must be left between products in straight runs to
prevent products from touching in a turn.

78 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Spiral Belt Selection

& Engineering Calculations

Lotension Engineering
Tips to Reduce Belt Tension and Wear
• Clean product debris from the support rails.

• Clean ice and product debris from the belt, sprockets, and idlers.

• Monitor the effect of temperature on the coefficient of friction between the supports and the belt. Some prod-
ucts may leave a slick residue at room temperature that can become viscous or sticky as the temperature
decreases. At freezing temperatures, the debris may become slick again or leave a rough surface, depend-
ing upon its consistency.

• Lubricate the outside support rails to reduce friction between the belt and rails. See the “Cleaning & Lubricat-
ing” section for more information.

• Increase overdrive (if possible).

• Make sure all idler sprockets are free-turning and that shaft bearings are properly lubricated.

• Clean lubricants off the belt’s inside edge to increase driving friction (spiral systems only).

• Lubricate the inside edge wear strip (fixed turns only).

• Replace worn wear strips on supports and on the inside edge of turns.

• Remove weight from the take-up loop.

• Align sprockets properly and insure that they do not migrate on the shaft.

• Decrease belt speed.

• Most importantly, do not overload the belt beyond its specified rating.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 79
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

NOTES
Lotension Engineering

80 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Installation of Spiral Belts

Lotension Engineering
Preparation
Before installing a new spiral belt, the wear strips should Cage/Drum
be examined for excessive deterioration. These are located
on the belt support rails and usually made from Ultra High
Molecular Weight Polyethylene (UHMWPE). They should
Auxiliary
be clean, smooth, and free from embedded debris. Worn or
Drive
contaminated wear strips should be replaced. Wear strips
should also be examined to see that they are firmly seated Take-up
on the rails and that their leading ends are firmly attached
to the leading ends of the rails. The leading edge of all rails Tier
should be relieved or bent down to prevent catching of the
belt as it comes onto the rails.
UHMWPE cage bar caps on the spiral cage should also
be inspected. If the cage bar caps are heavily grooved or
worn, they should be replaced. Make sure they are firmly Tier Pitch = Change in elevation over one revolution
attached to the cage bars. They should be clean and free
from grease or oils that could reduce the driving friction of the drum. The cage bar caps should also have
rounded or beveled edges where they meet the belt. This prevents the belt edge from catching on the corner
of a cage bar cap and temporarily eliminating all overdrive.
An Advantage™ belt may be installed on cage bar systems with or without cage bar caps. Bare, stainless
steel cage bars will typically increase the driving force against an Advantage™ belt’s inside edge. Take care
to eliminate any sharp corners or rough surfaces that might gouge or prematurely wear the belt. The cage bar
surface finish should be smooth to the touch.
An Advantage™ belt can similarly be installed directly on steel support rails, without UHMWPE wear strips.
When implementing this alternative, the spiral operator should insure that support rails are smooth and sharp
corners eliminated. The spiral operator should also be aware that the friction coefficient for steel is higher
than for UHMWPE, so total belt tension (radius weight) increases with this installation alternative. See the
“Spiral Belt Selection & Engineering Calculations” section for more information on friction coefficients and
radius weight calculations.
Next, check motor rotation in new systems and make sure the proper number of sprockets are on the take-up
drive shaft. A short piece of belting can be used as a template to properly space these sprockets on the shaft
(refer to belt assembly instructions for proper locations). This is also a good time to clean all construction and
repair debris from the system enclosure. This will help prevent the possibility of the belt dragging metal filings
and other sharp debris into the system during installation.
Finally, take a few minutes to plan the actual installation. Determine placement of the rolls of new belt, where
you will feed them into the system, and how you will gather up the old belt (if you are removing it at the same
time). Each spiral system is unique, so no standard plan will suffice; however, some general installation
guidelines are provided in the next section.
Conveyor belting can be heavy and awkward to handle, elevating safety concerns during its installation.
Safety is, therefore, the number one priority during installation of a new belt, so it is important to make sure
all safety procedures are observed, including proper lockout and tagout procedures. Special care should be
taken to know where everyone is prior to starting any machine.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 81
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts
Lotension Engineering

Installation of a New Belt (Not a Replacement)

Always follow proper lockout / tagout procedures to ensure worker safety.
The new belt should be fed into the spiral system in the correct direction of travel. In an Omni-Flex® belt
(Figure 10), the formed flat strip (picket) leads the rod. In Omni-Grid® (Figure 11) and Omni-Pro® belts (Figure
12), the link leads the rod with the link opening opposite the direction of travel. With these belts, the drive
sprocket teeth come in direct contact with the rod, not the flat strip or link.
For Advantage™ belts (Figure 13), the rod leads the link with the link opening (the “legs” of the link) facing
the direction of travel. This appears backward as compared to steel “Grid” belts; however, directional arrows
molded into the Advantage™ links provide the correct visual orientation. On Advantage™ belts, drive sprock-
et teeth directly contact the link which is compressed solidly against the rod

= drive sprocket location

[Figure 10] [Figure 11]

Omni-Flex® Omni-Grid®

Direction Direction
of Travel of Travel

Omni-Pro® Advantage™ Series*

Direction Direction
of Travel of Travel
[Figure 12] [Figure 13]
* Includes Advantage™
120 & Advantage™ 200

82 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Installation of Spiral Belts

Lotension Engineering
New belts are most often installed by pulling the belt onto the support rails at the system in-feed. Once the
belt is wrapped around the cage several times, the system can be energized and the drum used to help pull
the belt through the system, providing the belt is held tightly against it. This can be accomplished by fasten-
ing a section of rope to the leading inside edge of the belt and pulling it tightly against the drum. Additionally,
the take-up drive can sometimes be used to unwind the heavy rolls of new belt so they can be more easily fed
into the system. The ability to utilize the take-up drive will be determined by the system layout and space for
the rolls of new belt.
As the end of a belt roll approaches the feed-in point, the system is de-energized so the next new roll of belt
may be spliced onto the succeeding roll (for splicing instructions, see the appropriate Technical Bulletin on
belt assembly). Because the belt will continue running through the system for several feet after the system
is stopped, it is advisable to know how much the drive will coast after the power is turned off. Otherwise, the
end of the belt could run too far and delay installation.

Splicing During Installation

For an Omni-Flex® type belt, splices should always be made with the preformed buttonhead at the inside edge
of the belt. The nut goes on the outside edge of the belt. Any excess thread should be trimmed off the rod
and the rod and nut should be welded together. However, Omni-Grid® type belts require that both the button-
head and nut be welded to the link. The rod also needs to be welded to the inside of the link at both edges of
the belt. This prevents the possibility of one of the links (usually at the inside edge) from “tenting up.” At this
point, it is a good idea to file or grind these splices and welds smooth to prevent cutting of the cage bars.
An Advantage™ belt is easier to splice than a steel belt, as no welding is required. Follow the assembly
instructions, making sure that the stainless steel rod is fully seated in the link by pushing it in at a slight angle
with a screwdriver or assembly tool. When correctly seated, the end of the steel rod cannot be seen from the
side of the link.
As the installation progresses, make sure the belt is not catching on any framework, baffles, or doors. On tall
systems, ladders or other means of observing and guiding the belt must be employed as it gets higher and
higher off the floor. Never stand on the support rails or the belt as this can damage the rail and/or belt, and it
is unsafe. Be sure that the leading edge of the belt does not catch on the ends of wear strip sections as these
can be pulled loose. Keep in mind that the leading edge of the new belt may turn up or down, and is far more
likely to hang up than other areas of the belt.
Once the belt is completely pulled into the system, the leading edge is spliced to the trailing edge to make it
endless. Prior to splicing, the leading edge should be checked for damage that may have occurred during in-
stallation. If there is any doubt about the condition of the leading edge, it is best to remove a few pitches. New
belts normally lengthen out during the first few weeks of operation. On initial installation, adjust belt length so
as to position the take-up weight just above center in the take-up tower.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 83
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts
Lotension Engineering

Installation of a Replacement Belt

If a newly purchased belt is to serve as a replacement in an existing system and it has been determined that
the wear strips on the cage bars and support rails do not require replacement, then the installation of the
replacement belt is potentially less involved than installation on a completely new system or one requiring cage
bar or support rail cover replacement. When only the belt is replaced, the new belt can be spliced to the old
belt (assuming that the new belt is the same specification as the old) at a point just after the sprocket drive. The
system can then be energized and stopped to remove the old and to pull on new sections of belt, continuing
until the old belt is completely removed and final splice of the new belt is in place.

After Installation
Once the new belt is installed, there are several items that should be examined before the belt is cleaned and
used for production. First, check the system carefully for catch points, especially along the outside edge of
the belt. The in-feed and outrun are particularly vulnerable, as the belt will typically swing wide in these areas.
Also check any flanges on enclosure doors for the potential to catch on the belt when the doors are closed.
While inspecting the system, make sure that the flip-up detectors or product height detectors are not going
to impinge on the belt. If there are any hold-down rails on the system, be sure there is 1/4" to 3/8" clearance
between the belt and the rails. Next, check the location of the drive and idler sprockets. Be sure that they are
centered in the belt or link opening and are locked down to the shaft. Any filler rolls should also be checked to
ensure they are set in place and are the proper size to work with the sprockets.
After the system has been thoroughly checked for proper clearances, it should be energized to confirm it is run-
ning correctly. Start the system out at slow speed and continue to monitor the sprocket placement. Listen and
observe for any indication of belt impingement on the framework or other parts of the system. Note the position
of the take-up drive at start-up and watch whether it rises or falls as the system operates. A take-up roll that
rises indicates reduction of belt tension. A take-up roll that falls indicates that belt tension is rising. The posi-
tion of the take-up should quickly stabilize to a mid-position. Once the system has operated for a few complete
turns, check the overdrive by following the procedure outlined in the Ashworth Technical Bulletin on this subject.
Adjust the overdrive, if necessary, to achieve the lowest possible belt tension with the belt operating smoothly.
If possible, the system should be operated for up to 200 hours before final cleaning and product loading. This is
particularly important for new systems utilizing a steel belt, as this will help the belt components polish each other
and reduce the chances of excessive internal wear. See the “Cleaning & Lubricating” section for further informa-
tion.

84 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

UHMWPE Cage Bar Cap Profiles

Lotension Engineering
1.27

0.38 1.97 1.97

0.25 0.25

0.89 0.89 0.89

0.25

LSA0005 LSA0026 LSA0032

(FITS 1/2” X 1” BAR) (FITS 1/2” X 1” BAR) (FITS 1/2” X 1” BAR)

1.26
1.38
1.19 0.38
0.38

0.13 1.22 0.22

1.44
0.25 0.94

LSA0011 LSA0006 LSA0024

(FITS 9/16” x 1-1/8” BAR SIZE CHANNEL) (FITS 1” x 1” TUBE) (FITS 1” x 1” TUBE)

2.00 1.75
1.75
0.25
0.07 0.38 1.32

0.13
1.44 1.38
0.06
0.75

LSA0013 LSA0028 LSA0029

(FITS 1” x 1” TUBE) (FITS 1” X 1” TUBE) (FITS 1” X 1-1/2” TUBE)

2.27 2.27
1.75

0.13 0.13
0.13
1.38 1.77 1.77

LSA0030 LSA0007 LSA0010

(FITS 1” X 1-1/2” TUBE) (FITS 1-1/2” x 2” TUBE) (FITS 1-1/2” x 2” TUBE)

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 85
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts
Lotension Engineering

1.56 1.82
1.97
0.63 0.89

0.05
0.64 0.64 0.54
0.28 0.95
0.29

LSA0033 LSA0025 LSA0012

(FITS 3/16” X 1-1/4” BAR) (FITS 3/16” X 1-1/2” Bar) (FITS 1-1/2” x 1-1/2” x 1/4” TEE)

1.82 1.97

1.30 0.89
0.23 0.05
0.54
0.65 0.64 0.95
0.25

LSA0018 LSA0034 LSA0021

(FITS 1/4” X 1” BAR) (FITS 1-1/2” x 1-1/2” x 1/4" TEE) (FITS 1-1/2” x 1-1/2” x 1/4” TEE)

2.31
1.97 1.73
2.06
0.10 0.10 0.013
0.42 0.51
0.22

LSA0015 LSA0020 LSA0022

(FITS SHEET METAL CAGE) (FITS SHEET METAL CAGE) (FITS SHEET METAL CAGE)

1.72
2.20
1.00
0.13
0.57

0.38
LSA0023 LSA0031
(FITS SHEET METAL CAGE) (FITS SHEET METAL CAGE)

86 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Measuring Overdrive

Lotension Engineering
Positive overdrive must exist for lotension spiral systems to operate properly. Overdrive is defined as the
amount of slippage between the belt and the drum or cage. This means that the drum surface must move
faster than the inside edge of the belt. If it doesn’t or if the drum surface is moving slower than the belt, high
tension develops within the system, likely resulting in belt damage or failure.

Distance of
Overdrive
@ Inside
Cage Marker

Belt Direction

Belt Marker Distance of

Overdrive @
Outside
Start After One Full Revolution
Measuring overdrive: [Figure 14]
• Stand facing the cage or drum as shown in Figure 14.
• Mark a cage bar or a spot on the drum so that it is easily identifiable.
• Place an object (belt marker) on the inside edge of the belt in line with the cage marker.
• After the object has made one complete revolution, immediately measure the distance between it and the
cage marker along the inside edge of the belt.
• Divide this distance by the tier pitch (distance between two belts levels) to convert to the number of tiers for overdrive.
The formula to determine the number of tiers of overdrive is:
TO = MDI / TP
Where:
TO = Tiers of Overdrive
MDI = Measured Distance of Inside object
TP= Tier Pitch
Sample Overdrive Measurement Calculation:
MDI = Measured Distance of Inside object = 18" (457.2 mm)
TP = Tier Pitch = 6" (152.4)
Tiers of Overdrive
= 18" (457.2 mm) / 6" (152.4 mm)
=3
Sometimes it is difficult to measure the distance moved of an inside object, especially if a wide belt is used.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 87
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts
Lotension Engineering

Overdrive can also be measured at the outside of the edge of the belt, but this distance must be multiplied by
the ratio of the inside radius divided by the outside radius. The following formula is used:

TO = (MDO / TP) x (IR / OR)

Where:
TO = Tiers of Overdrive
MDO = Measured Distance of Outside object
TP = Tier Pitch
IR = Inside Radius
BW = Belt Width
OR = Outside Radius, which equates to the Inside Radius plus the Belt Width

Sample Overdrive Measurement Calculation:

MDO = Measured Distance of Outside object = 26.5" (666.75 mm)
TP = Tier Pitch = 6" (152.4)
IR = Inside Radius = 79.2" (2011.68 mm)
BW = Belt Width = 36" (914.4 mm)
OR = Outside Radius which equates to the IR plus the BW = 115.2" (2926.08 mm)
MDO / TP
= 26.5" (666.75 mm) / 6" (152.4 mm)
= 4.375
IR / OR
= 79.2" (2011.68 mm) / 115.2" (2926.08 mm)
= 0.688
Tiers of Overdrive
= 4.375 x 0.688
=3
Number Tiers of Overdrive = Distance @ Inside
Tier Pitch
OR

Number Tiers of Overdrive = Distance @ Outside x Inside Radius

Tier Pitch Outside Radius*
* Outside Radius = Inside Radius + Belt Width

88 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Measuring Overdrive

Lotension Engineering
Setting Overdrive
Steel Belts:
• Allow a minimum of 2 to 4 tier pitches of overdrive in systems where a steel belt edge contacts a plastic
cage surface.
• Allow a minimum of 1 to 2 tier pitches of overdrive in systems where a steel belt edge contacts a steel
cage surface.
Advantage™ Belts:
• Allow a minimum of 3 to 5 tier pitches of overdrive in systems equipped with UHMWPE-capped cage bars.
• Allow a minimum of 2 to 4 tier pitches of overdrive in systems equipped with stainless steel cage bars or a
stainless steel drum.
These minimums are Ashworth’s recommended values. However, since every system is unique, the over-
drive value may need to exceed recommended minimums and may be as high as equal to one full belt width.
If the belt continually jerks or surges during operation, reduce the overdrive setting until the belt surge stops.
As a rule of thumb, correct tension on the belt is achieved when it is possible to pull the belt an inch from the
cage with moderate hand force. Make a note of the motor current and take-up roll location for future reference.
Experience and testing has proven these ranges appropriate for producing the lowest possible belt tensions.
An approximation of belt tension can be calculated by applying a formula that uses the radius of the system
and the unit weight of the belt. This is referred to as radius weight and is discussed in the “Spiral Belt Selec-
tion & Engineering Calculations”.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 89
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Cleaning & Lubricating

Lotension Engineering

Ashworth Conveyor Belts are to be cleaned and sanitized using the following 7-Step Process.
Step 1: Dry Wipedown
Clean the conveyor belt and related equipment by removing large pieces of soil and food from the belt’s
surfaces. Also make sure compacted debris is removed from the sprockets, idler wheels and support rails
(heretofore referred to as the belt’s support system).
When cleaning the conveyor belt, work in a top-down, inside-edge-of-belt to outside-edge-of-belt pattern.
All subsequent cleaning and sanitizing steps of this procedure are to be completed using this same pattern.

Step 2: Pre-Rinse
Pre-rinse the belt and support system with hot water heated to a temperature of 125°–130°F (52–54°C) and
at a pressure of 150–300 psi (10–20 bar). Care is to be taken that floor drains are kept clear of debris to avoid
pooling of water.

Step 3: Apply Detergent

Apply an appropriate foaming detergent mixture to the belt and support system at 150 psi (10 bar). The
detergent foam can be allowed to remain on the belt for 10–15 minutes, but should not be allowed to dry, as
dried chemical is often more difficult to completely remove and may support the growth of biofilms.

Step 4: Rinse & Inspect

Flood rinse the belt and support system with 40–60 psi (2.8–4.1 bar) water at 125°–130°F (52°–54°C). After
the rinse, inspect the belt and support system components to ensure it is free of soils, water beads, hazes,
films, and other residue. This inspection should be conducted using sight, touch, and smell.

Step 5: Pre-Op the Belt

Verify that all cleaning chemical is removed from the conveyor belt, sprockets, idlers, and support rails. It’s
recommended that pH testing be used as an aid in determining that the belt is free of the detergent. Run the
conveyor belt slowly to help dry it and its supports, and remove any pooled water from the floor.

Step 6: Inspect & Release for Sanitizing

Re-inspect the belt and support system using sensory analysis to detect the presence of bacteria. Ashworth
recommends adenosine triphosphate (ATP) testing be used to verify absence of bacteria. ATP is present in all
animal, vegetable, yeast, and mold cells. Detection of ATP indicates contamination by at least one of these
sources. Correct any noted deficiencies detected by ATP testing and re-lubricate the belt and support rails as
directed by Ashworth. Release the belt for sanitizing.

Step 7: Sanitize the Belt

Apply the appropriate sanitizers at “no rinse” concentrations, following the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Run the belt as the sanitizer is applied in order to ensure that all parts of the belt and support system have been
completely exposed to the chemical. Squeegee any sanitizer that has pooled on the floor into floor drains.

Important Cautionary Notes

1. Ashworth recommends that water pressure not exceed 300 psi (20.7 bar) at any stage of the cleaning
process to avoid contamination resulting from overspray of water and chemicals.
2. A caustic wash may be necessary due to health or other safety requirements. We recommend that

90 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Lotension Engineering
caustic solutions not be left on the belt or used in any stronger concentrations than necessary to meet lo-
cal regulations. Use of these products must strictly follow the manufacturer’s directions.
Of special concern is the use of caustic or harsh chemicals on plastic belts, support rails, and cage bar
caps. These chemicals can soften plastic materials which can lead to damage or failure of the belt and
other components. Food processors should likewise be aware that chlorine-based cleaning products can
also affect stainless steel and rubber components that are common to food processing equipment.
3. Conveyors and equipment that operate Ashworth conveyor belts can be large and often have exposed
moving parts. When working around operating conveying equipment, workers must be aware of possible
safety hazards and work within their company’s safety guidelines to prevent personal injury.
4. It is sound practice to alternate appropriate sanitizers to prevent development of bacteria resistance to
any one sanitizing agent and to prevent overgrowth by certain bacteria strains.

Clean the Support Rails

Cleaning support rails is important for two reasons: First, food debris and other soil do become entrapped
between the closed contact area of the conveyor belt and the support rails. Second, cleaning the support rails
reduces friction between the rails and the belt and, therefore, reduces system tension.
Because the support rails are not adequately cleaned by typical Clean-In-Place (CIP) methodology and
because complete removal of the belt from the rails is usually not part of routine CIP procedures, alternative
methods must sometimes be employed.
One such method is to attach clean, non-abrasive cleaning pads to the underside of the belt and then ener-
gize the system to pull the pads along the entire length of the support rails. Pads should be visually checked
and replaced when they become ineffective at cleaning. Remove the pads before they reach drive sprockets.
It should be noted that this method may not work in every application, and that it is not a substitute for remov-
ing the belt and thoroughly cleaning and sanitizing the support rails using the methodology presented in the
previous section.

Lubricate the Belt

Stainless Steel Belts:
A light application of silicon or other food grade lubricant should be applied to the belt. This allows the belt to
polish the wear surfaces and prevent galling. The lubricant also acts as a film to separate metal contact sur-
faces and minimize wear. On spiral systems, never lubricate the inside belt edge (where it contacts the cage)
in order to maintain proper friction and drive.
Advantage™ Belts:
Lubrication is not required under normal operating conditions. However, lubrication will enhance belt perfor-
mance, particularly at higher belt speeds or when conveying heavy product loads. Make sure any lubricant
used is compatible with the belt material and the product. On spiral systems, never lubricate the inside belt
edge (where it contacts the cage) in order to maintain proper friction and drive.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 91
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts
Lotension Engineering

Suggested lubricants for both stainless steel and plastic belts:

• General Electric GE-SF-18-350
• Dow Corning 200 Fluid
• CLEARCO-SFG-350 Silicon Concentrate
All are acceptable to -60°F (-51°C) and are FDA compliant.
Application Method:
• The lubricant is generally fed from a drip reservoir onto a brush which contacts the belt’s underside in the
return path.
• Install and activate the lubricator for either a predetermined application interval or when the drive motor’s
current consumption indicates excessive belt tension.

Run-in the Belt

Steel Belts:
Just like a new car’s engine that requires a break-in period to allow moving metallic parts to “wear-in,” new
steel conveyor belts also require a break-in period. During this process, microscopic peaks and valleys of
the new belt’s wear surfaces are gently abraded and filed to form a smooth, polished surface. A by-product
of this process is the formation of small black particles, so-called “black specks,” that look like household
pepper. These can collect on the belt or conveyor surfaces and can fall on transported product.
For most steel belts, the optimal run-in period is 150–200 hours which varies somewhat based on belt type
and its application. Typically, Omni-Flex® belts require a slightly longer run-in period and Omni-Grid® and
Omni-Pro® belts require slightly less. During run-in, wash new belts with a mild dishwashing mixture and
re-lubricate every 48 hours. After a successful run-in, the possibility of black speck generation is negligible.

Advantage™ Belts:
A run-in period is not normally required for Advantage™ belts. However, a thorough cleaning is recommend-
ed prior to beginning production.
The following measures will aid in the removal of any debris that is created during run-in:
• Install strong bar magnets at the terminal rolls or at the take-up. The addition of an air knife will assist in blow-
ing the debris off the belt and onto the magnets.
• Ensure the belt is electrically grounded. The belt will carry a small static electrical charge generated from the
friction between the belt and wear strips. This is particularly true for Advantage™ belts. If this charge is not
dissipated, it will tend to hold the debris to the belt surface.
• Periodically wash the walls, floor and ceiling and other surrounding equipment to help eliminate the possibility
of air born contamination of the belt and associated surfaces.
• Periodically measure and adjust belt tension to specified levels. Excess tension accelerates belt wear and
increases the amount of contaminants on the belt and support rails, increasing friction. System tension may
be reduced by increasing overdrive or by cleaning and lubricating the support rails (never lubricate the cage
or the inside edge of the belt).

92 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Troubleshooting Spiral Belts

Lotension Engineering
High Tension
High tension occurs when the coefficient of friction between belt and support rails is higher than coefficient of
friction between belt and cage. The estimated system tension is also called the “Radius Weight” of the system.

The formula for this calculation is:

Radius Weight = Radius x Weight x [f(rail) / f(cage)]
Where:
f = friction
Unequal friction conditions can dramatically alter the system’s tensions.

Example:
Assuming a radius to the tension link of 10 ft (3.05 m), and a combined weight of the belt plus load equal
to 10 lb/ft (14.9 kg/m), with the rail and cage friction both at 0.2, the radius weight or tension equals 100 lb.
(445 Newton’s).

The table below indicates changes in tension when coefficients of friction are altered.
RAILS CAGE fr fc fr/fc RW
Normal Normal 0.2 0.2 1.0 100 (445 N)
Dirty Normal 0.3 0.2 1.5 150 (667 N)
Normal Oily 0.2 0.1 2.0 200 (890 N)
Dirty Oily 0.3 0.1 3.0 300 (1334 N)
Oily Oily 0.1 0.1 1.0 100 (445 N)
Oily Normal 0.1 0.2 0.5 50 (222 N)

Changes in the frictional relationships, caused by oil

and dirt, can have a beneficial or destructive influence High Tension Low Tension
on the belt and its chances for a long useful life.
Smooth Operation Surging
Another common cause of high system tension is a
lack of overdrive. Spiral operators, in an attempt to
make the belt operate smoothly, will sometimes reduce
the overdrive in the system. By doing so, they also T
E
create high belt tension. Often, a compromise between
N
high tension and smoother operation of the system, S Operating
and greater overdrive with its accompanying looping or I Range
surging, is required. In the case of severe or unac- O
ceptable surging, system overdrive should be reduced N
to the point where the belt surging just stops. D
A
N
Figure 15 shows the effect of overdrive on tension. G
E
By examining the surface of the cage bars, a good R
RW*

1 2 3 4 5 6
Overdrive (Tier Pitches)
[Figure 15]

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 93
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts
Lotension Engineering

estimation of the overdrive can be made. If the wear marks on the cage bar wear strips are nearly vertical,
the system has been operating with little or no overdrive, indicating high tension within the system. The marks
are made when the same buttonhead remains on the same cage bar for a long period of time as it rises up or
drops down the cage surface.
Wear marks that are 30°–45° to horizontal will indicate an overdrive in the range of 2 to 4 tier heights. In this
case, the system is operating with the proper amount of tension.
Finally, nearly horizontal wear marks
indicate a very high amount of over-
drive. High overdrive is indicative of low
tension in the system and is not harm-
ful to the belt, even if it causes some
surging. If this is not objectionable to
the application, the overdrive should
not be re-adjusted.
Figure 16 illustrates these markings.

Vertical 30°–45° Horizontal

Wear Marks Wear Marks Wear Marks
(No Overdrive, (Good Overdrive, (High Overdrive,
High Tension) Proper Tension) Low Tension)

[Figure 16]

Other possible causes of high tension within the system include:

• Hold-downs pinching the belt against the support rails
• Belt edge impinging on the conveyor structure
• Hard turning or frozen bearings on a terminal or in the take-up tower area
• Narrow area of the support structure squeezing the belt
• A twisted or crushed cage that has a smaller diameter at the mid-section of its height
• Cage diameter too small to allow continuous contact with the inside belt edge
• Damage to the belt that restricts its ability to collapse correctly around the drum or cage, inhibiting proper
belt-to-cage contact and the drum’s ability to efficiently drive the belt
• Damage to the belt that restricts its ability to flex on the terminals
• Missing cage bar caps, or wear strips missing from the belt supports
• Rods protruding inward and catching on the cage bars
• Loss of overdrive due to belt pitch elongation, causing higher belt speed with no increase in cage speed; this
occurs when overdrive was at lower range of acceptability before stretch

94 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

Lotension Engineering
Jerky Operation
Jerky operation can be caused by a number of potential problems, including:
• Surging caused by high overdrive • Chordal action on the small sprocket at the
• Rod ends protruding in and hanging up on cage bars cage drive
• Stick-slip frictions caused by dirty or otherwise high • Drive motor surging or pulsing
friction wear surfaces

Dirty Systems
Process dirt and belt wear debris may contaminate product and reduce the useful life of the belt if the user
does not practice proper cleaning. Cleaning practices and schedules are application specific. Reference
Technical Bulletin TB-TC-002 for detailed discussion and recommendations.

Ice Build-Up and Damaged Overlays

Ice build-up on terminals and support structures is a fairly evident problem but often hard to solve. The
apparent solution is to defrost more
often to reduce the formation of ice.

Tenting
Tenting is a symptom of too high tension
within a lotension system. The solution Designated Path
is to reduce tension and/or to add hold
down brackets.

Swing Wide
It is normal for a spiral belt to “swing wide”
(Figure 17) as it exits the spiral cage, fol-
lowing a path that is offset but parallel to
the normal tangent line to the cage. Ide-
ally, the spiral and its out-feed should be Actual
Swing Wide Path
designed to incorporate this effect. How-
ever, if the spiral design does not allow for
the natural tendency of the belt to swing [Figure 17]
wide, the belt edge may come in contact with the spiral framework. In this case, the usual reaction of the spiral
operator is to restrict the path of the belt from swinging wide, typically by use of rollers or shoe guides. This is
not recommended as restraining the belt can have several adverse effects on its service life:
• The belt can wear through a shoe guide, allowing the edge to snag. This will eventually cause an increase in
belt tension and damage the belt edge.
• Outside edge restraints can push individual rods inward. The rods can be held in this inward position by belt
tension. There is then a potential for the projecting rods to catch on the vertical cage bar capping, causing
damage to the belt, damage to the cage bar capping, and high belt tension.
• If the belt is pushed into a straight tangent path, the tension carried in the outside edge of the belt is shifted
to the inside edge of the belt, resulting in a pronounced tendency for one edge of the belt to lead the other.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 95
 Lotension Spiral & Turn-Curve Belts

NOTES
Lotension Engineering

96 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

Stainless steel and UHMWPE sprockets are

Cleatrac® System readily available in stock
Tightest Transfer Reduce Operating Costs Available On Demand Fatigue Resistant
 Moves around the  Less expensive than  Stocked in standard widths  2.5 times working strength
industry’s smallest nose chain-edge construction  Complete with sprockets, of conventional Cleatrac
bar–down to 0.2" (5.1 mm)  More durable than support bearings and  Suited for long conveyors
 Minimize product damage, single-plane wire designs filler rolls  Unparalleled belt strength
waste and operating costs.  Longer belt life than pin  Shipped within 24 hours
roll drives

Flat Wire PDCE Eye-Link

Proven Reliability For Exacting Applications Versatile Design
 Manufactured to the indus-  Uniform in pitch  Available in numerous con-
tries tightest tolerances to  Straight tracking figurations of pitch spac-
increase belt life and en-  High tensile strength ing, wire diameter, and
sure smooth operation  Durable under severe loads mesh designs
 More than sixty-five years of  Longer belt life than pin  Options include cross
customer satisfaction. roll drives flights, side plates, chain
edges, and additional bar
Easy to Clean Application Options links for increased strength
 Maximum open area for free  Choose from a variety of
air flow and water drainage chain weights and strengths Inherently Strong
 Customize with different  Extremely durable with
Optimize with Options tension ratings up to 260
conveyor meshes or
 Friction driven for
plastic modules lb. per link row
optimal strength  Roller drive system engag-
 Available with guard edg-
 Sprocket driven for
es, lifts and/or lane dividers es the entire width of the
optimal tracking belt, increasing tension ca-
strAIght Products

 Available in standard or Design Assistance pabilities and belt life

heavy duty  Ashworth's Belt Profession-
 EZ Transfer belt de- als stand ready to assist Precise Conveying
signed for efficient trans- you in selecting the proper  Positively driven for true tracking
fers between conveyors variations and options for  Flat, even surface and rigid
your specific application structure resisting side-to-
side deflection delivers
smooth product conveyance

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 97
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

Selection Guide:
Straight Running Belts
1 2 3 4 5 1
A ) A ) A ) A ) A ) B )
W ty W ty W ty W ty W t y W ty
–F Du –F Du –F Du –F Du –F Du –F Du
ire rd ire rd ire rd ire rd ire rd ire rd
W a W a W a W a W a W a
at nd at nd at nd at nd at nd at nd
Fl Sta Fl Sta Fl Sta Fl Sta Fl Sta Fl Sta
( ( ( ( ( (
Specifications Units
Material(s) Stainless Steel, Carbon & Galvanized Steels, High Temperature Alloys
4.50 - 208 4.50 - 204 3.50 - 208 4.50 - 208
Width Limits 3.50 - 204 (90 - 5182)
(114 - 5283) (114 - 5182) (90 - 5283) (114 - 5283)
in.
Pitch 1.07 (27.2) 0.54 (13.77) 1.07 (27.2)
(mm)
Formed Pickets Formed Pickets Formed Pickets Formed Pickets
Mesh Type
1 x 1 (25.4 x 25.4) 0.5 x 1 (12.7 x 25.4) 0.5 x 0.5 (12.7 x 12.7) 1 x 1 (25.4 x 25.4)
lb/ft
Maximum Tension 350 (522) 500 (745) 420 (626)
kg/m
Open Area % 78 77 77 65 77

Edge Treatment Clinched Welded Clinched Welded Clinched

Method of Drive Positive/Sprockets

Straight Run Applications
Can Washing u
Cookers u u u u u u
Fertilizer Spreading
Filling Lines
Food Processing Conveyance
Freezer Belt
Fryer Belt
General Conveyance u u u u u u
Incline Conveyors
Industrial Dryers
Straight belt selection

Industrial Washers u u
Large Product Transfer
Lehr Oven Belt
Oven/Baking Belt u u u u u u
Package Accumulation u u u u u u
Package Conveyance
Pasteurizing Applications u u u u u u
Product Washing u u u u u u
Quench Tanks u u u u u u
Rubber Parts Handling u
Small Product Transfer u u u u
Veneer and Wood Drying
Washers and Degreasers u u u u u

98 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

Selection Guide:
Straight Running Belts

)
)
)

ty
ty
ty

d 5
ty

Du 1
d 4
d 2

Du 2
d 3

Du
ar B

vy WC
Du
ar B
Du
ar B

vy WC
Du
ar B

)
ty
nd W

ty
nd W
nd W

nd W

ta –F

ea –F
ta –F
ta –F

ea –F
ta –F

W at

W at

W at
W lat
W lat

W lat

(S ire

(H ire
(S re
(S ire

(H re
(S ire

Fl

Fl

Fl
F
F

i
Specifications Units
Material(s) Stainless Steel, Carbon & Galvanized Steels, High Temperature Alloys
3.50 - 204 3.50 - 208
Width Limits 3.50 - 204 (90 - 5182) 4 - 204 (101.6 - 5182)
(90 - 5182) (90 - 5283)
Pitch in. (mm) 1.07 (27.2) 0.54 (13.77) 1.08 (27.53) 1.08 (27.53)
Formed Pickets Formed Pickets Formed Pickets Formed Pickets Formed Pickets Formed Pickets
Mesh Type
1 x 1 (25.4 x 25.4) 0.5 x 1 (12.7 x 25.4) 0.5 x 1 (12.7 x 25.4) 0.5 x 0.5 (12.7 x 12.7) 1 x 1 (25.4 x 25.4) 0.5 x 1 (12.7 x 25.4)
Maximum lb/ft
350 (522) 600 (895) 1350 (2013) 1750 (2609)
Tension kg/m
Open Area % 77 76 76 64 68 62

Edge Treatment Welded Clinched Welded

Method of Drive Positive/Sprocket
Straight Run Applications
Can Washing
Cookers u u u u u u
Fertilizer Spreading u u
Filling Lines
Food Processing Conveyance
Freezer Belt
Fryer Belt
General Conveyance u u u u u u
Incline Conveyors
Industrial Dryers

Straight belt selection

Industrial Washers u u u u u u
Large Product Transfer
Lehr Oven Belt
Oven/Baking Belt u u u u u u
Package Accumulation u u u u
Package Conveyance u u
Pasteurizing Applications u u u
Product Washing u u u u u u
Quench Tanks u u u u u u
Rubber Parts Handling
Small Product Transfer
Veneer and Wood Drying u u
Washers and Degreasers

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 99
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

Selection Guide:
Straight Running Belts

ge e
Ed riv
sfe 3
r)
an H

ain e D
Tr W

ink
c
Z F

Ch sitiv
tra
(E ire–
W lat

eL
ea
F

Ey
Po
Cl
Specifications Units

Material(s) Stainless Steel, Carbon & Galvanized Steels, High Temperature Alloys
4.80 - 178 1.5 - 168 2 - 236
Width Limits Application Specific
(121.8 - 4521) (38 - 4267) (50 - 6000)
in. (mm)
Mesh Chain 1.18 (30), 1.97 (50), 2 (50.8),
Pitch 1.08 (27.53)
Dependent Dependent 2.95 (75)
Unilateral, Balanced,
Formed Pickets
Mesh Type Balanced Weave Conventional or Eye-link and Cross wire
0.5 x 1 (12.7 x 25.4)
Compound Balanced Weave

Maximum lb/ft Up to 450 (670) Dependent on Material Dependent Upon Chain

780 (1161)
Tension kg/m Mesh Dependent and Belt Speed Strength

Mesh Construction Mesh

Open Area % 72
Dependent Dependent Dependent
Welded, Washer Welded,
Edge Treatment Welded Welded Welded
Drilled and Cottered
Positively Driven via Roller or
Method of Drive Positive/Sprocket Sprockets Positively Driven
Drag Chain
Straight Run Applications
Can Ovens / Washers
Can Washing
Cookers u
Fertilizer Spreading u u
Filling Lines u u
Food Processing Conveyance u u
Freezer Belt u u
Straight belt selection

Fryer Belt u u
General Conveyance u u u
Incline Conveyors u
Industrial Dryers u
Industrial Washers u
Lehr Oven Belt
Oven/Baking Belt u u
Package Accumulation u u u
Package Conveyance u
Pasteurizing Applications u
Product Washing
Quench Tanks
Rubber Parts Handling u u
Small Product Transfer u u
Veneer and Wood Drying u
Washers and Degreasers u

100 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

NOTES

Straight belt selection

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 101
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

1-Inch Pitch
uu Flat Wire—Standard Duty—FWA1

Technical Specifications Units

Available Materials Stainless, carbon, and galvanized steels

Rod Diameter 12 gauge, 0.106 (2.7)
Picket Dimension 0.375 high x 0.046 thick (9.5 x 1.2)
Nominal Mesh Opening 1.00 x 1.00 (25.4 x 25.4)
Edge Treatment in. (mm) Clinched
Available Widths 4.50–208.00 (114.3–5283.2)
Conveying Surface Full belt width minus 0.25 (6.4)
Longitudinal Pitch 1.07 (27.2)
Weight lb/ft² (kg/m²) 1.69 (8.3)
Open Area 78%
Maximum Allowable Tension lb/ft (kg/m) 350 (522)
Maximum Temperature °F (°C) Galvanized: 240 (115) Carbon: 1000 (538) Stainless: 1100 (593)
Positively driven with matching sprockets or friction driven with a minimum
Method of Drive in. (mm)
12 (304.8) diameter flat-faced drum

Available Options
Pin-up Attachments Lifts
Pin-up attachments are flat wire strips Lift attachments keep the product from
that lift the product from the belt surface sliding on inclines or declines. The formed
to prevent undesirable marking. They can angle lift uses a flight clip to fasten it to the
also be used to keep the product from belt. The flat bar lift is welded to the belt.
sliding on inclines or declines.
Limits for Use:
Limits for Use: • Maximum Lift Width:
• Maximum height above belt surface Belt Width: 0.5" (12.7 mm)
is 0.38" (9.5 mm) • Lift Thickness: Normal limits are no
• Belt must be supported so that the pin- greater than 0.18" (4.8 mm) or smaller
up can pass through the return path than 0.06" (1.52 mm)
• Lift Height: Check with Engineering if
greater than 6" (152 mm)
• Minimum Lift Spacing: 2" (50.8 mm)
• Belt must be supported so that the lift
can pass through the return path

Pointed top Flat top

strAIght Products

Formed angle Flat bar

102 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 1-Inch Pitch Flat Wire FWA1

Cast Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 6 (2.72) 4.47 (113.5) 3.98 (101.1) 0.75 (19.1) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 10 (4.54) 6.17 (156.7) 4.00 (101.6) 0.75 (19.1) 3.50 (88.9)
#8 23 13 (5.90) 7.89 (200.4) 5.00 (127.0) 0.75 (19.1) 4.50 (114.3)
#12 37 21 (9.53) 12.64 (321.1) 3.50 (88.9) 0.75 (19.1) 3.00 (76.2)
#12 37 21 (9.53) 12.64 (321.1) 5.00 (127.0) 3.00 (76.2) 4.50 (114.3)

Stainless Steel Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 7 (3.18) 4.47 (113.5) 3.98 (101.1) 0.75 (19.1) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 9 (4.08) 6.17 (156.7) 4.00 (101.6) 0.75 (19.1) 3.50 (88.9)
#8 23 12 (5.44) 7.89 (200.4) 5.00 (127.0) 0.75 (19.1) 4.50 (114.3)
#12 37 22 (9.97) 12.64 (321.1) 5.00 (127.0) 1.50 (38.1) 4.50 (114.3)

UHMWPE Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max.*
Nom. Size Teeth lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 1 (0.45) 4.53 (115.1) 3.90 (99.06) 1.00 (25.4) 2.19 (55.6)
#6 18 2 (0.91) 6.24 (158.5) 5.65 (143.5) 1.00 (25.4) 3.75 (95.25)
#8 23 3 (1.36) 7.96 (202.2) 7.39 (187.7) 1.00 (25.4) 4.94 (125.5)
#10 31 5.5 (2.49) 10.72 (272.3) 10.16 (258.1) 1.00 (25.4) 7.13 (181.1)
#12 37 8 (3.63) 12.68 (322.1) 12.22 (310.4) 1.00 (25.4) 8.84 (224.5)
UHMWPE material type components have a 150º F (66º C) maximum operating temperature.
13 through 31 tooth sprockets must have tooth height reduced to 3/8” (9.5 mm) for use with standard weight belts.
*Maximum bore size listed for UHMWPE material is based on 1/2” (12.7) of material above keyway.

strAIght Products

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 103
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

1-Inch Pitch
uu Flat Wire—Standard Duty—FWA2

Technical Specifications Units

Available Materials Stainless, carbon, and galvanized steels

Rod Diameter 12 gauge, 0.106 (2.7)
Picket Dimension 0.375 high x 0.046 thick (9.5 x 1.2)
Nominal Mesh Opening 1 x 1 (25.4 x 25.4)
in. (mm)
Edge Treatment Welded
Available Widths 4.50–204.00 (114.3–5181.6)
Conveying Surface Full belt width minus 0.19 (4.8)
Longitudinal Pitch 1.07 (27.2)
Weight lb/ft² (kg/m²) 1.69 (8.3)
Open Area 78%
Maximum Allowable Tension lb/ft (kg/m) 350 (522)
Maximum Temperature °F (°C) Galvanized: 240 (115) Carbon: 1000 (538) Stainless: 1100 (593)
Positively driven with matching sprockets or friction driven with a minimum
Method of Drive in. (mm)
12 (304.8) diameter flat-faced drum

Available Options
Pin-up Attachments Lifts
Pin-up attachments are flat wire strips Lift attachments keep the product from
that lift the product from the belt surface sliding on inclines or declines. The formed
to prevent undesirable marking. They can angle lift uses a flight clip to fasten it to the
also be used to keep the product from belt. The flat bar lift is welded to the belt.
sliding on inclines or declines.
Limits for Use:
Limits for Use: • Maximum Lift Width:
• Maximum height above belt surface Belt Width: 0.5" (12.7 mm)
is 0.38" (9.5 mm) • Lift Thickness: Normal limits are no
• Belt must be supported so that the pin- greater than 0.18" (4.8 mm) or smaller
up can pass through the return path than 0.06" (1.52 mm)
• Lift Height: Check with Engineering if
greater than 6" (152 mm)
• Minimum Lift Spacing: 2" (50.8 mm)
• Belt must be supported so that the lift
can pass through the return path
strAIght Products

Pointed top Flat top

Formed angle Flat bar

104 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 1-Inch Pitch Flat Wire FWA2

Tack Welding (available on welded-edge belts only)

Tack Welding (available on welded edge belts only)
This process prevents picket compression Normally, two tack welds per pitch are Tack welded on
which results in a narrowing of the belt. located in the second opening from each every third rod on
This is related to high tension typically belt edge. For belt widths 60" (1524 mm) both sides of belt
associated with belt widths of 60" (1524 through 144" (3657.6 mm), belts are welded
mm) and greater. For belts less than 60" every third longitudinal pitch. For belt widths
(1524 mm) wide, tack welding is a customer 144" (3657.6 mm) or greater, tack welds are
Weld
requested option. For belts 60" or wider, placed at every longitudinal pitch.
this option is standard, unless otherwise
requested by the customer.

Cast Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 6 (2.72) 4.47 (113.5) 3.98 (101.1) 0.75 (19.1) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 10 (4.54) 6.17 (156.7) 4.00 (101.6) 0.75 (19.1) 3.50 (88.9)
#8 23 13 (5.90) 7.89 (200.4) 5.00 (127.0) 0.75 (19.1) 4.50 (114.3)
#12 37 21 (9.53) 12.64 (321.1) 3.50 (88.9) 0.75 (19.1) 3.00 (76.2)
#12 37 21 (9.53) 12.64 (321.1) 5.00 (127.0) 3.00 (76.2) 4.50 (114.3)

Stainless Steel Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 7 (3.18) 4.47 (113.5) 3.98 (101.1) 0.75 (19.1) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 9 (4.08) 6.17 (156.7) 4.00 (101.6) 0.75 (19.1) 3.50 (88.9)
#8 23 12 (5.44) 7.89 (200.4) 5.00 (127.0) 0.75 (19.1) 4.50 (114.3)
#12 37 22 (9.97) 12.64 (321.1) 5.00 (127.0) 1.50 (38.1) 4.50 (114.3)

UHMWPE Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max.*
Nom. Size Teeth lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 1 (0.45) 4.53 (115.1) 3.90 (99.06) 1.00 (25.4) 2.19 (55.6)
#6 18 2 (0.91) 6.24 (158.5) 5.65 (143.5) 1.00 (25.4) 3.75 (95.25)
#8 23 3 (1.36) 7.96 (202.2) 7.39 (187.7) 1.00 (25.4) 4.94 (125.5)
strAIght Products

#10 31 5.5 (2.49) 10.72 (272.3) 10.16 (258.1) 1.00 (25.4) 7.13 (181.1)
#12 37 8 (3.63) 12.68 (322.1) 12.22 (310.4) 1.00 (25.4) 8.84 (224.5)
UHMWPE material type components have a 150º F (66º C) maximum operating temperature.
13 through 31 tooth sprockets must have tooth height reduced to 3/8” (9.5 mm) for use with standard weight belts.
*Maximum bore size listed for UHMWPE material is based on 1/2” (12.7) of material above keyway.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 105
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

1-Inch Pitch
uu Flat Wire—Standard Duty—FWA3

Technical Specifications Unit

Available Materials Stainless, carbon, and galvanized steels

Rod Diameter 12 gauge, 0.106 (2.7)
Picket Dimension 0.375 high x 0.046 thick (9.5 x 1.2)
Nominal Mesh Opening 0.50 x 1.00 (12.7 x 25.4)
Edge Treatment in. (mm) Clinched
Available Widths 3.50–208.00 (88.9–5283.2)
Conveying Surface Full belt width minus 0.25 (6.4)
Longitudinal Pitch 1.07 (27.2)
Weight lb/ft² (kg/m²) 2 (9.8)
Open Area 77%
Maximum Allowable Tension lb/ft (kg/m) 500 (745)
Maximum Temperature °F (°C) Galvanized: 240 (115) Carbon: 1000 (538) Stainless: 1100 (593)
Positively driven with matching sprockets or friction driven with a minimum
Method of Drive in. (mm)
12 (304.8) diameter flat-faced drum

Available Options
Pin-up Attachments Lifts Beveled Edges
Pin-up attachments are flat wire strips Lift attachments keep the product from Beveling the edge of the flat wire pickets
that lift the product from the belt surface sliding on inclines or declines. The formed facilitates product transfer by eliminating or
to prevent undesirable marking. They can angle lift uses a flight clip to fasten it to the reducing tippage of sharp edge cans or bottles.
also be used to keep the product from belt. The flat bar lift is welded to the belt. This option offers advantages on all transfer
sliding on inclines or declines. operations where the terminal roll or sprocket
Limits for Use: diameter is smaller than 10" (254 mm).
Limits for Use: • Maximum Lift Width:
• Maximum height above belt surface Belt Width: 0.5" (12.7 mm)
is 0.38" (9.5 mm) • Lift Thickness: Normal limits are no
• Belt must be supported so that the pin- greater than 0.18" (4.8 mm) or smaller
up can pass through the return path than 0.06" (1.52 mm)
• Lift Height: Check with Engineering if
greater than 6" (152 mm)
• Minimum Lift Spacing: 2" (50.8 mm)
• Belt must be supported so that the lift Beveled edge on top surface only
can pass through the return path
strAIght Products

Pointed top Flat top

Formed angle Flat bar

106 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 1-Inch Pitch Flat Wire FWA3

Cast Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 6 (2.72) 4.47 (113.5) 3.98 (101.1) 0.75 (19.1) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 10 (4.54) 6.17 (156.7) 4.00 (101.6) 0.75 (19.1) 3.50 (88.9)
#8 23 13 (5.90) 7.89 (200.4) 5.00 (127.0) 0.75 (19.1) 4.50 (114.3)
#12 37 21 (9.53) 12.64 (321.1) 3.50 (88.9) 0.75 (19.1) 3.00 (76.2)
#12 37 21 (9.53) 12.64 (321.1) 5.00 (127.0) 3.00 (76.2) 4.50 (114.3)

Stainless Steel Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 7 (3.18) 4.47 (113.5) 3.98 (101.1) 0.75 (19.1) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 9 (4.08) 6.17 (156.7) 4.00 (101.6) 0.75 (19.1) 3.50 (88.9)
#8 23 12 (5.44) 7.89 (200.4) 5.00 (127.0) 0.75 (19.1) 4.50 (114.3)
#12 37 22 (9.97) 12.64 (321.1) 5.00 (127.0) 1.50 (38.1) 4.50 (114.3)

UHMWPE Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Hub Width Bore Max.*
Nom. Size Teeth lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 1 (0.45) 4.53 (115.1) 3.90 (99.06) 2.00 (50.8) 2.19 (55.6)
#6 18 2 (0.91) 6.24 (158.5) 5.65 (143.5) 2.00 (50.8) 3.75 (95.25)
#8 23 3 (1.36) 7.96 (202.2) 7.39 (187.7) 2.00 (50.8) 4.94 (125.5)
#10 31 5.5 (2.49) 10.72 (272.3) 10.16 (258.1) 2.00 (50.8) 7.13 (181.1)
#12 37 8 (3.63) 12.68 (322.1) 12.22 (310.4) 2.00 (50.8) 8.84 (224.5)
UHMWPE material type components have a 150º F (66º C) maximum operating temperature.
13 through 31 tooth sprockets must have tooth height reduced to 3/8” (9.5 mm) for use with standard weight belts.
*Maximum bore size listed for UHMWPE material is based on 1/2” (12.7) of material above keyway.

strAIght Products

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 107
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

1-Inch Pitch
uu Flat Wire—Standard Duty—FWA4

Technical Specifications Units

Available Materials Stainless, carbon, and galvanized steels

Rod Diameter 12 gauge, 0.106 (2.7)
Picket Dimension 0.375 high x 0.046 thick (9.5 x 1.2)
Nominal Mesh Opening 0.50 x 1.00 (12.7 x 25.4)
Edge Treatment in. (mm) Welded
Available Widths 3.50–204.00 (88.9–5181.6)
Conveying Surface Full belt width minus 0.19 (4.8)
Longitudinal Pitch 1.07 (27.2)
Weight lb/ft² (kg/m²) 2 (9.8)
Open Area 77%
Maximum Allowable Tension lb/ft (kg/m) 500 (745)
Maximum Temperature °F (°C) Galvanized: 240 (115) Carbon: 1000 (538) Stainless: 1100 (593)
Positively driven with matching sprockets or friction driven with a minimum
Method of Drive in. (mm)
12 (304.8) diameter flat-faced drum

Available Options
Pin-up Attachments Lifts Beveled Edges
Pin-up attachments are flat wire strips Lift attachments keep the product from Beveling the edge of the flat wire pickets
that lift the product from the belt surface sliding on inclines or declines. The formed facilitates product transfer by eliminating or
to prevent undesirable marking. They can angle lift uses a flight clip to fasten it to the reducing tippage of sharp edge cans or bottles.
also be used to keep the product from belt. The flat bar lift is welded to the belt. This option offers advantages on all transfer
sliding on inclines or declines. operations where the terminal roll or sprocket
Limits for Use: diameter is smaller than 10" (254 mm).
Limits for Use: • Maximum Lift Width:
• Maximum height above belt surface Belt Width: 0.5" (12.7 mm)
is 0.38" (9.5 mm) • Lift Thickness: Normal limits are no
• Belt must be supported so that the pin- greater than 0.18" (4.8 mm) or smaller
up can pass through the return path than 0.06" (1.52 mm)
• Lift Height: Check with Engineering if
greater than 6" (152 mm)
• Minimum Lift Spacing: 2" (50.8 mm)
• Belt must be supported so that the lift Beveled edge on top surface only
can pass through the return path
strAIght Products

Pointed top Flat top

Formed angle Flat bar

108 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 1-Inch Pitch Flat Wire FWA4

Cast Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 6 (2.72) 4.47 (113.5) 3.98 (101.1) 0.75 (19.1) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 10 (4.54) 6.17 (156.7) 4.00 (101.6) 0.75 (19.1) 3.50 (88.9)
#8 23 13 (5.90) 7.89 (200.4) 5.00 (127.0) 0.75 (19.1) 4.50 (114.3)
#12 37 21 (9.53) 12.64 (321.1) 3.50 (88.9) 0.75 (19.1) 3.00 (76.2)
#12 37 21 (9.53) 12.64 (321.1) 5.00 (127.0) 3.00 (76.2) 4.50 (114.3)

Stainless Steel Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 7 (3.18) 4.47 (113.5) 3.98 (101.1) 0.75 (19.1) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 9 (4.08) 6.17 (156.7) 4.00 (101.6) 0.75 (19.1) 3.50 (88.9)
#8 23 12 (5.44) 7.89 (200.4) 5.00 (127.0) 0.75 (19.1) 4.50 (114.3)
#12 37 22 (9.97) 12.64 (321.1) 5.00 (127.0) 1.50 (38.1) 4.50 (114.3)

UHMWPE Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max.*
Nom. Size Teeth lb. (kg in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 1 (0.45) 4.53 (115.1) 3.90 (99.06) 1.00 (25.4) 2.19 (55.6)
#6 18 2 (0.91) 6.24 (158.5) 5.65 (143.5) 1.00 (25.4) 3.75 (95.25)
#8 23 3 (1.36) 7.96 (202.2) 7.39 (187.7) 1.00 (25.4) 4.94 (125.5)
#10 31 5.5 (2.49) 10.72 (272.3) 10.16 (258.1) 1.00 (25.4) 7.13 (181.1)
#12 37 8 (3.63) 12.68 (322.1) 12.22 (310.4) 1.00 (25.4) 8.84 (224.5)
UHMWPE material type components have a 150º F (66º C) maximum operating temperature.
13 through 31 tooth sprockets must have tooth height reduced to 3/8” (9.5 mm) for use with standard weight belts.
*Maximum bore size listed for UHMWPE material is based on 1/2” (12.7) of material above keyway.

strAIght Products

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 109
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

½-Inch Pitch
uu Flat Wire—Standard Duty—FWA5

Technical Specifications Units

Available Materials Stainless, carbon, and galvanized steels

Rod Diameter 12 gauge, 0.106 (2.7)
Picket Dimension 0.375 high x 0.046 thick (9.5 x 1.2)
Nominal Mesh Opening 0.50 x 0.50” (12.7 x 12.7)
Edge Treatment in. (mm) Welded
Available Widths 3.50–204.00 (88.9–5181.6)
Conveying Surface Full belt width minus 0.19 (4.8)
Longitudinal Pitch 0.54 (13.7)
Weight lb/ft² (kg/m²) 3.03 (14.8)
Open Area 65%
Maximum Allowable Tension lb/ft (kg/m) 500 (745)
Maximum Temperature °F (°C) Galvanized: 240 (115) Carbon: 1000 (538) Stainless: 1100 (593)
Positively driven with matching sprockets or friction driven with a minimum
Method of Drive in. (mm)
7.50 (190.5) diameter flat-faced drum

Available Options
Pin-up Attachments Lifts
Pin-up attachments are flat wire strips Lift attachments keep the product from
that lift the product from the belt surface sliding on inclines or declines. The flat bar
to prevent undesirable marking. They can lift is welded to the belt.
also be used to keep the product from
sliding on inclines or declines. Limits for Use:
• Maximum Lift Width:
Limits for Use: Belt Width: 0.5" (12.7 mm)
• Maximum height above belt surface is • Lift Thickness: Normal limits are no
0.38" (9.5 mm) greater than 0.18" (4.8 mm) or smaller
• Belt must be supported so that the pin- than 0.06" (1.52 mm)
up can pass through the return path • Lift Height: Check with Engineering if
greater than 6" (152 mm)
• Minimum Lift Spacing: 2" (50.8 mm)
• Belt must be supported so that the lift
can pass through the return path
strAIght Products

Pointed top Flat top

110 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 1
/2-Inch Pitch Flat Wire FWA5

Tack Welding (available on welded-edge belts only)

This process prevents picket compression, Normally, two tack welds per pitch are Tack welded on
which results in a narrowing of the belt. located in the second opening from each every third rod on
This is related to high tension typically belt edge. For belt widths 60" (1524 mm) both sides of belt
associated with belt widths of 60" (1524 through 144" (3657.6 mm), belts are welded
mm) and greater. For belts less than 60" every third longitudinal pitch. For belt widths
(1524 mm) wide, tack welding is a customer 144" (3657.6 mm) or greater, tack welds are
requested option. For belts 60" or wider, placed at every longitudinal pitch. Weld
this option is standard, unless otherwise
requested by the customer.

Machined Cast Iron Dual Tooth Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 22 4 (1.81) 3.81 (96.8) 3.39 (86.1) 0.75 (19.1) 2.25 (57.2)
#6 38 12 (5.44) 6.56 (166.6) 6.17 (156.7) 0.75 (19.1) 4.00 (101.6)
#8 46 14 (6.35) 7.94 (201.7) 7.59 (192.8) 1.00 (25.4) 3.00 (76.2)
#10 62 19 (8.62) 10.70 (271.8) 10.32 (262.1) 1.25 (31.75) 4.00 (101.6)

Machined Stainless Steel Dual Tooth Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 22 4 (1.81) 3.81 (96.8) 3.39 (86.1) 0.75 (19.1) 2.25 (57.2)
#6 38 12 (5.44) 6.56 (166.6) 6.17 (156.7) 0.75 (19.1) 4.00 (101.6)

UHMWPE Single Tooth Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max*
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 22 0.5 (0.23) 3.81 (96.8) 1.00 (25.4) 0.75 (19.1) 2.25 (57.2)
#6 38 1 (0.45) 6.56 (166.6) 1.00 (25.4) 0.75 (19.1) 4.00 (101.6)
#8 46 3 (1.36) 7.94 (201.7) 2.00 (50.8) 1.00 (25.4) 5.00 (127.0)
UHMWPE material type components have a 150º F (66º C) maximum operating temperature.
*Maximum bore size listed for UHMWPE material is based on 1/2 ” (12.7) of material above keyway.
strAIght Products

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 111
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

½-Inch Pitch
uu Flat Wire-Standard Duty-FWA5SC

Technical Specifications Units

Available Materials Stainless or carbon steel

Rod Diameter 12 gauge, 0.106 (2.7)
Picket Dimension 0.375 high x 0.046 thick (9.5 x 1.2)
Nominal Mesh Opening 0.50 x 0.50” (12.7 x 12.7)
Edge Treatment in. (mm) Welded
Available Widths 3.50–208.00 (88.9–5283.2)
Conveying Surface Full belt width minus 0.19 (4.8)
Longitudinal Pitch 0.54 (13.7)
Weight lb/ft² (kg/m²) 3.03 (14.8)
Open Area 65%
Maximum Allowable Tension lb/ft (kg/m) 500 (745)
Maximum Temperature °F (°C) Carbon: 1000 (538) Stainless: 1100 (593)
Positively driven with matching sprockets or friction driven with a minimum
Method of Drive in. (mm)
7.50 (190.5) diameter flat-faced drum

Available Options
Pin-up Attachments Lifts
Pin-up attachments are flat wire strips Lift attachments keep the product from
that lift the product from the belt surface sliding on inclines or declines. The flat bar
to prevent undesirable marking. They can lift is welded to the belt.
also be used to keep the product from
sliding on inclines or declines. Limits for Use:
• Maximum Lift Width:
Limits for Use: Belt Width: 0.5" (12.7 mm)
• Maximum height above belt surface is • Lift Thickness: Normal limits are no
0.38" (9.5 mm) greater than 0.18" (4.8 mm) or smaller
• Belt must be supported so that the pin- than 0.06" (1.52 mm)
up can pass through the return path • Lift Height: Check with Engineering if
greater than 6" (152 mm)
• Minimum Lift Spacing: 2" (50.8 mm)
• Belt must be supported so that the lift
can pass through the return path
strAIght Products

Pointed top Flat top

112 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 1
/2 -Inch Pitch Flat Wire FWA5SC

Tack Welding (available on welded-edge belts only)

This process prevents picket compression, Normally, two tack welds per pitch are Tack welded on
which results in a narrowing of the belt. located in the second opening from each every third rod on
This is related to high tension typically belt edge. For belt widths 60" (1524 mm) both sides of belt
associated with belt widths of 60" (1524 through 144" (3657.6 mm), belts are welded
mm) and greater. For belts less than 60" every third longitudinal pitch. For belt widths
(1524 mm) wide, tack welding is a customer 144" (3657.6 mm) or greater, tack welds are
requested option. For belts 60" or wider, placed at every longitudinal pitch. Weld
this option is standard, unless otherwise
requested by the customer.

Machined Steel or Stainless Tooth Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 22 4 (1.81) 3.81 (96.8) 2.0 (50.8) 0.75 (19.1) 2.25 (57.2)
#6 38 12 (5.44) 6.56 (166.6) 2.0 (50.8) 0.75 (19.1) 4.00 (101.6)

UHMWPE Single Tooth Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max*
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 22 0.5 (0.23) 3.81 (96.8) 1.00 (25.4) 0.75 (19.1) 2.25 (57.2)
#6 38 1 (0.45) 6.56 (166.6) 1.00 (25.4) 0.75 (19.1) 4.00 (101.6)
#8 46 3 (1.36) 7.94 (201.7) 2.00 (50.8) 1.00 (25.4) 5.00 (127.0)
UHMWPE material type components have a 150º F (66º C) maximum operating temperature.
*Maximum bore size listed for UHMWPE material is based on 1/2 ” (12.7) of material above keyway.

strAIght Products

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 113
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

1-Inch Pitch
uu Flat Wire—Standard Duty—FWB1

Technical Specifications Units

Available Materials Stainless, carbon, and galvanized steels

Rod Diameter 11 gauge, 0.121 (3.1)
Picket Dimension 0.375 high x 0.046 thick (9.5 x 1.2)
Nominal Mesh Opening 1.00 x 1.00 (25.4 x 25.4)
Edge Treatment in. (mm) Clinched
Available Widths 4.50–208.00 (114.3–5283.2)
Conveying Surface Full belt width minus 0.25 (6.4)
Longitudinal Pitch 1.07 (27.2)
Weight lb/ft² (kg/m²) 1.87 (9.1)
Open Area 77%
Maximum Allowable Tension lb/ft (kg/m) 420 (626)
Maximum Temperature °F (°C) Galvanized: 240 (115) Carbon: 1000 (538) Stainless: 1100 (593)
Positively driven with matching sprockets or friction driven with a minimum
Method of Drive in. (mm)
12 (305) diameter flat-faced drum

Available Options
Pin-up Attachments Lifts
Pin-up attachments are flat wire strips Lift attachments keep the product from
that lift the product from the belt surface sliding on inclines or declines. The formed
to prevent undesirable marking. They can angle lift uses a flight clip to fasten it to the
also be used to keep the product from belt. The flat bar lift is welded to the belt.
sliding on inclines or declines.
Limits for Use:
Limits for Use: • Maximum Lift Width:
• Maximum height above belt surface Belt Width: 0.5" (12.7 mm)
is 0.38" (9.5 mm) • Lift Thickness: Normal limits are no
• Belt must be supported so that the pin- greater than 0.18" (4.8 mm) or smaller
up can pass through the return path than 0.06" (1.52 mm)
• Lift Height: Check with Engineering if
greater than 6" (152 mm)
• Minimum Lift Spacing: 2" (50.8 mm)
• Belt must be supported so that the lift
can pass through the return path
strAIght Products

Pointed top Flat top

Formed angle Flat bar

114 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 1-Inch Pitch Flat Wire FWB1

Cast Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 6 (2.72) 4.47 (113.5) 3.98 (101.1) 0.75 (19.1) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 10 (4.54) 6.17 (156.7) 4.00 (101.6) 0.75 (19.1) 3.50 (88.9)
#8 23 13 (5.90) 7.89 (200.4) 5.00 (127.0) 0.75 (19.1) 4.50 (114.3)
#12 37 21 (9.53) 12.64 (321.1) 3.50 (88.9) 0.75 (19.1) 3.00 (76.2)
#12 37 21 (9.53) 12.64 (321.1) 5.00 (127.0) 3.00 (76.2) 4.50 (114.3)

Stainless Steel Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 7 (3.18) 4.47 (113.5) 3.98 (101.1) 0.75 (19.1) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 9 (4.08) 6.17 (156.7) 4.00 (101.6) 0.75 (19.1) 3.50 (88.9)
#8 23 12 (5.44) 7.89 (200.4) 5.00 (127.0) 0.75 (19.1) 4.50 (114.3)
#12 37 22 (9.98) 12.64 (321.1) 5.00 (127.0) 1.50 (38.1) 4.50 (114.3)

UHMWPE Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max.*
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 1 (0.45) 4.53 (115.1) 3.90 (99.06) 1.00 (25.4) 2.19 (55.6)
#6 18 2 (0.91) 6.24 (158.5) 5.65 (143.5) 1.00 (25.4) 3.75 (95.25)
#8 23 3 (1.36) 7.96 (202.2) 7.39 (187.7) 1.00 (25.4) 4.94 (125.5)
#10 31 5.5 (2.49) 10.72 (272.3) 10.16 (258.1) 1.00 (25.4) 7.13 (181.1)
#12 37 8 (3.63) 12.68 (322.1) 12.22 (310.4) 1.00 (25.4) 8.84 (224.5)
UHMWPE material type components have a 150º F (66º C) maximum operating temperature.
13 through 31 tooth sprockets must have tooth height reduced to 3/8” (9.5 mm) for use with standard weight belts.
*Maximum bore size listed for UHMWPE material is based on 1/2” (12.7) of material above keyway.

strAIght Products

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 115
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

1-Inch Pitch
uu Flat Wire—Standard Duty—FWB2

Technical Specifications Units

Available Materials Stainless, carbon, and galvanized steels

Rod Diameter 11 gauge, 0.121 (3.1)
Picket Dimension 0.375 high x 0.046 thick (9.5 x 1.2)
Nominal Mesh Opening 1.00 x 1.00 (25.4 x 25.4)
Edge Treatment in. (mm) Welded
Available Widths 4.50–204.00 (114.3–5181.6)
Conveying Surface Full belt width minus 0.25 (6.4)
Longitudinal Pitch 1.07 (27.2)
Weight lb/ft² (kg/m²) 1.82 (8.9)
Open Area 77%
Maximum Allowable Tension lb/ft (kg/m) 420 (626)
Maximum Temperature °F (°C) Galvanized: 240 (115) Carbon: 1000 (538) Stainless: 1100 (593)
Positively driven with matching sprockets or friction driven with a minimum
Method of Drive in. (mm)
12 (304.8) diameter flat-faced drum

Available Options
Pin-up Attachments Lifts
Pin-up attachments are flat wire strips Lift attachments keep the product from
that lift the product from the belt surface sliding on inclines or declines. The formed
to prevent undesirable marking. They can angle lift uses a flight clip to fasten it to the
also be used to keep the product from belt. The flat bar lift is welded to the belt.
sliding on inclines or declines.
Limits for Use:
Limits for Use: • Maximum Lift Width:
• Maximum height above belt surface Belt Width: 0.5" (12.7 mm)
is 0.38" (9.5 mm) • Lift Thickness: Normal limits are no
• Belt must be supported so that the pin- greater than 0.18" (4.8 mm) or smaller
up can pass through the return path than 0.06" (1.52 mm)
• Lift Height: Check with Engineering if
greater than 6" (152 mm)
• Minimum Lift Spacing: 2" (50.8 mm)
• Belt must be supported so that the lift
can pass through the return path
strAIght Products

Pointed top Flat top

Formed angle Flat bar

116 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 1-Inch Pitch Flat Wire FWB2

Tack Welding (available on welded-edge belts only)

This process prevents picket compression, Normally, two tack welds per pitch are Tack welded on
which results in a narrowing of the belt. located in the second opening from each every third rod on
This is related to high tension typically belt edge. For belt widths 60" (1524 mm) both sides of belt
associated with belt widths of 60" (1524 through 144" (3657.6 mm), belts are welded
mm) and greater. For belts less than 60" every third longitudinal pitch. For belt widths
(1524 mm) wide, tack welding is a customer 144" (3657.6 mm) or greater, tack welds are
requested option. For belts 60" or wider, placed at every longitudinal pitch. Weld
this option is standard, unless otherwise
requested by the customer.

Cast Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 6 (2.72) 4.47 (113.5) 3.98 (101.1) 0.75 (19.1) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 10 (4.54) 6.17 (156.7) 4.00 (101.6) 0.75 (19.1) 3.50 (88.9)
#8 23 13 (5.90) 7.89 (200.4) 5.00 (127.0) 0.75 (19.1) 4.50 (114.3)
#12 37 21 (9.53) 12.64 (321.1) 3.50 (88.9) 0.75 (19.1) 3.00 (76.2)
#12 37 21 (9.53) 12.64 (321.1) 5.00 (127.0) 3.00 (76.2) 4.50 (114.3)

Stainless Steel Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 7 (3.18) 4.47 (113.5) 3.98 (101.1) 0.75 (19.1) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 9 (4.08) 6.17 (156.7) 4.00 (101.6) 0.75 (19.1) 3.50 (88.9)
#8 23 12 (5.44) 7.89 (200.4) 5.00 (127.0) 0.75 (19.1) 4.50 (114.3)
#12 37 22 (9.98) 12.64 (321.1) 5.00 (127.0) 1.50 (38.1) 4.50 (114.3)

UHMWPE Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max.*
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 1 (0.45) 4.53 (115.1) 3.90 (99.06) 1.00 (25.4) 2.19 (55.6)
#6 18 2 (0.91) 6.24 (158.5) 5.65 (143.5) 1.00 (25.4) 3.75 (95.25)
#8 23 3 (1.36) 7.96 (202.2) 7.39 (187.7) 1.00 (25.4) 4.94 (125.5)
strAIght Products

#10 31 5.5 (2.49) 10.72 (272.3) 10.16 (258.1) 1.00 (25.4) 7.13 (181.1)
#12 37 8 (3.63) 12.68 (322.1) 12.22 (310.4) 1.00 (25.4) 8.84 (224.5)
UHMWPE material type components have a 150º F (66º C) maximum operating temperature.
13 through 31 tooth sprockets must have tooth height reduced to 3/8” (9.5 mm) for use with standard weight belts.
*Maximum bore size listed for UHMWPE material is based on 1/2” (12.7) of material above keyway.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 117
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

1-Inch Pitch
uu Flat Wire—Standard Duty—FWB3

Technical Specifications Units

Available Materials Stainless, carbon, and galvanized steels

Rod Diameter 11 gauge, 0.121 (3.1)
Picket Dimension 0.375 high x 0.046 thick (9.5 x 1.2)
Nominal Mesh Opening 0.5 x 1 (12.7 x 25.4)
Edge Treatment in. (mm) Clinched
Available Widths 3.50–208.00 (88.9–5283.2)
Conveying Surface Full belt width minus 0.25 (6.4)
Longitudinal Pitch 1.07 (27.2)
Weight lb/ft² (kg/m²) 2.19 (10.71)
Open Area 76%
Maximum Allowable Tension lb/ft (kg/m) 600 (895)
Maximum Temperature °F (°C) Galvanized: 240 (115) Carbon: 1000 (538) Stainless: 1100 (593)
Positively driven with matching sprockets or friction driven with a minimum
Method of Drive in. (mm)
12 (304.8) diameter flat-faced drum

Available Options
Pin-up Attachments Lifts Beveled Edges
Pin-up attachments are flat wire strips Lift attachments keep the product from Beveling the edge of the flat wire pickets
that lift the product from the belt surface sliding on inclines or declines. The formed facilitates product transfer by eliminating or
to prevent undesirable marking. They can angle lift uses a flight clip to fasten it to the reducing tippage of sharp edge cans or bottles.
also be used to keep the product from belt. The flat bar lift is welded to the belt. This option offers advantages on all transfer
sliding on inclines or declines. operations where the terminal roll or sprocket
Limits for Use: diameter is smaller than 10" (254 mm).
Limits for Use: • Maximum Lift Width:
• Maximum height above belt surface Belt Width: 0.5" (12.7 mm)
is 0.38" (9.5 mm) • Lift Thickness: Normal limits are no
• Belt must be supported so that the pin- greater than 0.18" (4.8 mm) or smaller
up can pass through the return path than 0.06" (1.52 mm)
• Lift Height: Check with Engineering if
greater than 6" (152 mm)
• Minimum Lift Spacing: 2" (50.8 mm)
• Belt must be supported so that the lift Beveled edge on top surface only
can pass through the return path
strAIght Products

Pointed top Flat top

Formed angle Flat bar

118 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 1-Inch Pitch Flat Wire FWB3

Cast Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 6 (2.72) 4.47 (113.5) 3.98 (101.1) 0.75 (19.1) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 10 (4.54) 6.17 (156.7) 4.00 (101.6) 0.75 (19.1) 3.50 (88.9)
#8 23 13 (5.90) 7.89 (200.4) 5.00 (127.0) 0.75 (19.1) 4.50 (114.3)
#12 37 21 (9.53) 12.64 (321.1) 3.50 (88.9) 0.75 (19.1) 3.00 (76.2)
#12 37 21 (9.53) 12.64 (321.1) 5.00 (127.0) 3.00 (76.2) 4.50 (114.3)

Stainless Steel Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 7 (3.18) 4.47 (113.5) 3.98 (101.1) 0.75 (19.1) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 9 (4.08) 6.17 (156.7) 4.00 (101.6) 0.75 (19.1) 3.50 (88.9)
#8 23 12 (5.44) 7.89 (200.4) 5.00 (127.0) 0.75 (19.1) 4.50 (114.3)
#12 37 22 (9.98) 12.64 (321.1) 5.00 (127.0) 1.50 (38.1) 4.50 (114.3)

UHMWPE Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max.*
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 1 (0.45) 4.53 (115.1) 3.90 (99.06) 1.00 (25.4) 2.19 (55.6)
#6 18 2 (0.91) 6.24 (158.5) 5.65 (143.5) 1.00 (25.4) 3.75 (95.25)
#8 23 3 (1.36) 7.96 (202.2) 7.39 (187.7) 1.00 (25.4) 4.94 (125.5)
#10 31 5.5 (2.49) 10.72 (272.3) 10.16 (258.1) 1.00 (25.4) 7.13 (181.1)
#12 37 8 (3.63) 12.68 (322.1) 12.22 (310.4) 1.00 (25.4) 8.84 (224.5)
UHMWPE material type components have a 150º F (66º C) maximum operating temperature.
13 through 31 tooth sprockets must have tooth height reduced to 3/8” (9.5 mm) for use with standard weight belts.
*Maximum bore size listed for UHMWPE material is based on 1/2” (12.7) of material above keyway.

strAIght Products

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 119
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

1-Inch Pitch
uu Flat Wire—Standard Duty—FWB4

Technical Specifications Units

Available Materials Stainless, carbon, and galvanized steels, high temperature alloys
Rod Diameter 11 gauge, 0.121 (3.1)
Picket Dimension 0.375 high x 0.046 thick (9.5 x 1.2)
Nominal Mesh Opening 0.5 x 1 (12.7 x 25.4)
Edge Treatment in. (mm) Welded
Available Widths 3.50–204.00 (88.9–5181.6)
Conveying Surface Full belt width minus 0.19 (4.8)
Longitudinal Pitch 1.07 (27.2)
Weight lb/ft² (kg/m²) 2.19 (10.7)
Open Area 76%
Maximum Allowable Tension lb/ft (kg/m) 600 (895)
Maximum Temperature °F (°C) Galvanized: 240 (115) Carbon: 1000 (538) Stainless: 1100 (593)
Positively driven with matching sprockets or friction driven with a minimum
Method of Drive in. (mm)
12 (304.8) diameter flat-faced drum

Available Options
Pin-up Attachments Lifts Beveled Edges
Pin-up attachments are flat wire strips Lift attachments keep the product from Beveling the edge of the flat wire pickets
that lift the product from the belt surface sliding on inclines or declines. The formed facilitates product transfer by eliminating or
to prevent undesirable marking. They can angle lift uses a flight clip to fasten it to the reducing tippage of sharp edge cans or bottles.
also be used to keep the product from belt. The flat bar lift is welded to the belt. This option offers advantages on all transfer
sliding on inclines or declines. operations where the terminal roll or sprocket
Limits for Use: diameter is smaller than 10" (254 mm).
Limits for Use: • Maximum Lift Width:
• Maximum height above belt surface Belt Width: 0.5" (12.7 mm)
is 0.38" (9.5 mm) • Lift Thickness: Normal limits are no
• Belt must be supported so that the pin- greater than 0.18" (4.8 mm) or smaller
up can pass through the return path than 0.06" (1.52 mm)
• Lift Height: Check with Engineering if
greater than 6" (152 mm)
• Minimum Lift Spacing: 2" (50.8 mm)
• Belt must be supported so that the lift Beveled edge on top surface only
can pass through the return path
strAIght Products

Pointed top Flat top

Formed angle Flat bar

120 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 1-Inch Pitch Flat Wire FWB4

Tack Welding (available on welded-edge belts only)

This process prevents picket compression, Normally, two tack welds per pitch are Tack welded on
which results in a narrowing of the belt. located in the second opening from each every third rod on
This is related to high tension typically belt edge. For belt widths 60" (1524 mm) both sides of belt
associated with belt widths of 60" (1524 through 144" (3657.6 mm), belts are welded
mm) and greater. For belts less than 60" every third longitudinal pitch. For belt widths
(1524 mm) wide, tack welding is a customer 144" (3657.6 mm) or greater, tack welds are
requested option. For belts 60" or wider, placed at every longitudinal pitch. Weld
this option is standard, unless otherwise
requested by the customer.

Cast Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 6 (2.72) 4.47 (113.5) 3.98 (101.1) 0.75 (19.1) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 10 (4.54) 6.17 (156.7) 4.00 (101.6) 0.75 (19.1) 3.50 (88.9)
#8 23 13 (5.90) 7.89 (200.4) 5.00 (127.0) 0.75 (19.1) 4.50 (114.3)
#12 37 21 (9.53) 12.64 (321.1) 3.50 (88.9) 0.75 (19.1) 3.00 (76.2)
#12 37 21 (9.53) 12.64 (321.1) 5.00 (127.0) 3.00 (76.2) 4.50 (114.3)

Stainless Steel Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 7 (3.18) 4.47 (113.5) 3.98 (101.1) 0.75 (19.1) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 9 (4.08) 6.17 (156.7) 4.00 (101.6) 0.75 (19.1) 3.50 (88.9)
#8 23 12 (5.44) 7.89 (200.4) 5.00 (127.0) 0.75 (19.1) 4.50 (114.3)
#12 37 22 (9.98) 12.64 (321.1) 5.00 (127.0) 1.50 (38.1) 4.50 (114.3)

UHMWPE Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max.*
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 1 (0.45) 4.53 (115.1) 3.90 (99.06) 1.00 (25.4) 2.19 (55.6)
#6 18 2 (0.91) 6.24 (158.5) 5.65 (143.5) 1.00 (25.4) 3.75 (95.25)
#8 23 3 (1.36) 7.96 (202.2) 7.39 (187.7) 1.00 (25.4) 4.94 (125.5)
#10 31 5.5 (2.49) 10.72 (272.3) 10.16 (258.1) 1.00 (25.4) 7.13 (181.1)
strAIght Products

#12 37 8 (3.63) 12.68 (322.1) 12.22 (310.4) 1.00 (25.4) 8.84 (224.5)
UHMWPE material type components have a 150º F (66º C) maximum operating temperature.
13 through 31 tooth sprockets must have tooth height reduced to 3/8” (9.5 mm) for use with standard weight belts.
*Maximum bore size listed for UHMWPE material is based on 1/2” (12.7) of material above keyway.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 121
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

½-Inch Pitch
uu Flat Wire—Standard Duty—FWB5

Technical Specifications Units

Available Materials Stainless, carbon, and galvanized steels

Rod Diameter 11 gauge, 0.121 (3.1)
Picket Dimension 0.375 high x 0.046 thick (9.5 x 1.2)
Nominal Mesh Opening 0.5 x 0.5” (12.7 x 12.7)
Edge Treatment in. (mm) Welded
Available Widths 3.50–204.00 (88.9–5181.6)
Conveying Surface Full belt width minus 0.19 (4.8)
Longitudinal Pitch 0.54 (13.7)
Weight lb/ft² (kg/m²) 3.18 (15.5)
Open Area 64%
Maximum Allowable Tension lb/ft (kg/m) 600 (745)
Maximum Temperature °F (°C) Galvanized: 240 (115) Carbon: 1000 (538) Stainless: 1100 (593)
Positively driven with matching sprockets or friction driven with a minimum
Method of Drive in. (mm)
7.50 (190.5) diameter flat-faced drum

Available Options
Pin-up Attachments Lifts Beveled Edges
Pin-up attachments are flat wire strips Lift attachments keep the product from Beveling the edge of the flat wire pickets
that lift the product from the belt surface sliding on inclines or declines. The flat bar facilitates product transfer by eliminating or
to prevent undesirable marking. They can lift is welded to the belt. reducing tippage of sharp edge cans or bottles.
also be used to keep the product from This option offers advantages on all transfer
sliding on inclines or declines. Limits for Use: operations where the terminal roll or sprocket
• Maximum Lift Width: diameter is smaller than 10" (254 mm).
Limits for Use: Belt Width: 0.5" (12.7 mm)
• Maximum height above belt surface • Lift Thickness: Normal limits are no
is 0.38" (9.5 mm) greater than 0.18" (4.8 mm) or smaller
• Belt must be supported so that the pin- than 0.06" (1.52 mm)
up can pass through the return path • Lift Height: Check with Engineering if
greater than 6" (152 mm)
• Minimum Lift Spacing: 2" (50.8 mm)
• Belt must be supported so that the lift
can pass through the return path Beveled edge on top surface only
strAIght Products

Pointed top Flat top

Formed angle Flat bar

122 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 1
/2 -Inch Pitch Flat Wire FWB5

Tack Welding (available on welded-edge belts only)

This process prevents picket compression, Normally, two tack welds per pitch are Tack welded on
which results in a narrowing of the belt. located in the second opening from each every third rod on
This is related to high tension typically belt edge. For belt widths 60" (1524 mm) both sides of belt
associated with belt widths of 60" (1524 through 144" (3657.6 mm), belts are welded
mm) and greater. For belts less than 60" every third longitudinal pitch. For belt widths
(1524 mm) wide, tack welding is a customer 144" (3657.6 mm) or greater, tack welds are
requested option. For belts 60" or wider, placed at every longitudinal pitch. Weld
this option is standard, unless otherwise
requested by the customer.

Machined Cast Iron Dual Tooth Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 22 6 (2.72) 3.81 (96.8) 3.39 (86.1) 0.75 (19.1) 2.25 (57.2)
#6 38 10 (4.54) 6.56 (166.6) 6.17 (156.7) 0.75 (19.1) 4.00 (101.6)
#8 46 13 (5.90) 7.94 (201.7) 7.59 (192.8) 1.00 (25.4) 3.00 (76.2)
#10 62 16 (7.26) 10.70 (271.8) 10.32 (262.1) 1.25 (31.75) 4.00 (101.6)

Machined Stainless Steel Dual Tooth Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 22 13 (5.90) 3.81 (96.8) 3.39 (86.1) 0.75 (19.1) 2.25 (57.2)
#6 38 18 (8.16) 6.56 (166.6) 6.17 (156.7) 0.75 (19.1) 4.00 (101.6)

UHMWPE Single Tooth Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max*
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 22 0.5 (0.23) 3.81 (96.8) 3.39 (86.1) 0.75 (19.1) 2.25 (57.2)
#6 38 1 (0.45) 6.56 (166.6) 6.17 (156.7) 0.75 (19.1) 4.00 (101.6)
#8 46 3 (1.36) 7.94 (201.7) 7.55 (191.8) 1.00 (25.4) 5.00 (127.0)
UHMWPE material type components have a 150º F (66º C) maximum operating temperature.
*Maximum bore size listed for UHMWPE material is based on 1/2 ” (12.7) of material above keyway.
strAIght Products

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 123
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

1-Inch Pitch
uu Flat Wire—Heavy Duty—FWC1

Technical Specifications Units

Available Materials Stainless, carbon, and galvanized steels

Rod Diameter 6 gauge, 0.192 (4.9)
Picket Dimension 0.500 high x 0.062 thick (12.7 x 1.6)
Nominal Mesh Opening 1.00 x 1.00” (25.4 x 25.4)
Edge Treatment in. (mm) Welded
Available Widths 3.50–208.00 (88.9–5283.2)
Conveying Surface Full belt width minus 0.25 (6.4)
Longitudinal Pitch 1.08 (27.4)
Weight lb/ft² (kg/m²) 3.47 (16.9)
Open Area 68%
Maximum Allowable Tension lb/ft (kg/m) 1350 (2013)
Maximum Temperature °F (°C) Galvanized: 240 (115) Carbon: 1000 (538) Stainless: 1100 (593)
Positively driven with matching sprockets or friction driven with a minimum
Method of Drive in. (mm)
12 (304.8) diameter flat-faced drum

Available Options
Pin-up Attachments Lifts
Pin-up attachments are flat wire strips Lift attachments keep the product from
that lift the product from the belt surface sliding on inclines or declines. The formed
to prevent undesirable marking. They can angle lift uses a flight clip to fasten it to the
also be used to keep the product from belt. The flat bar lift is welded to the belt.
sliding on inclines or declines.
Limits for Use:
Limits for Use: • Maximum Lift Width:
• Maximum height above belt surface is Belt Width: 0.5" (12.7 mm)
0.38" (9.5 mm) • Lift Thickness: Normal limits are no
• Belt must be supported so that the pin- greater than 0.18" (4.8 mm) or smaller
up can pass through the return path than 0.06" (1.52 mm)
• Lift Height: Check with Engineering if
greater than 6" (152 mm)
• Minimum Lift Spacing: 2" (50.8 mm)
• Belt must be supported so that the lift
can pass through the return path
strAIght Products

Pointed top Flat top

Formed angle Flat bar

124 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 1-Inch Pitch Flat Wire FWC1

Tack Welding (available on welded-edge belts only)

This process prevents picket compression, Normally, two tack welds per pitch are Tack welded on
which results in a narrowing of the belt. located in the second opening from each every third rod on
This is related to high tension typically belt edge. For belt widths 60" (1524 mm) both sides of belt
associated with belt widths of 60" (1524 through 144" (3657.6 mm), belts are welded
mm) and greater. For belts less than 60" every third longitudinal pitch. For belt widths
(1524 mm) wide, tack welding is a customer 144" (3657.6 mm) or greater, tack welds are
requested option. For belts 60" or wider, placed at every longitudinal pitch. Weld
this option is standard, unless otherwise
requested by the customer.

Cast Iron Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 6 (2.72) 4.53 (115.1) 3.91 (99.3) 0.75 (19.1) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 9 (4.08) 6.25 (158.8) 5.66 (143.8) 0.75 (19.1) 3.50 (88.9)
#8 23 12 (5.44) 7.97 (202.4) 7.41 (188.2) 1.00 (25.4) 4.50 (114.3)
#10 31 18 (8.16) 10.72 (272.3) 10.16 (258.1) 1.25 (31.8) 5.50 (139.7)

Stainless Steel Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 6 (2.72) 4.53 (115.1) 3.91 (99.3) 0.75 (19.1) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 9 (4.08) 6.25 (158.8) 5.66 (143.8) 0.75 (19.1) 3.50 (88.9)
#8 23 12 (5.44) 7.97 (202.4) 7.41 (188.2) 1.00 (25.4) 4.50 (114.3)

UHMWPE Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max*
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 1 (0.45) 4.53 (115.1) 3.90 (99.1) 1.00 (25.4) 2.19 (55.6)
#6 18 2 (0.91) 6.24 (158.5) 5.65 (143.5) 1.00 (25.4) 3.75 (95.3)
#8 23 3 (1.36) 7.96 (202.2) 7.39 (187.7) 1.00 (25.4) 4.94 (125.5)
#10 31 5.5 (2.49) 10.72 (272.1) 10.16 (258.1) 1.00 (25.4) 7.13 (181.1)
UHMWPE material type components have a 150º F (66º C) maximum operating temperature.
strAIght Products

*Maximum bore size listed for UHMWPE material is based on 1/2” (12.7) of material above keyway.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 125
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

1-Inch Pitch
uu Flat Wire—Heavy Duty—FWC2

Technical Specifications Units

Available Materials Stainless, carbon, and galvanized steels

Rod Diameter 6 gauge, 0.192 (4.9)
Picket Dimension 0.500 high x 0.062 thick (12.7 x 1.6)
Nominal Mesh Opening 0.50 x 1.00” (12.7 x 25.4)
Edge Treatment in. (mm) Welded
Available Widths 4.00–208.00 (101.6–5283.2)
Conveying Surface Full belt width minus 0.25 (6.4)
Longitudinal Pitch 1.08 (27.4)
Weight lb/ft² (kg/m²) 3.85 (18.8)
Open Area 62%
Maximum Allowable Tension lb/ft (kg/m) 1750 (2609)
Maximum Temperature °F (°C) Galvanized: 240 (115) Carbon: 1000 (538) Stainless: 1100 (593)
Positively driven with matching sprockets or friction driven with a minimum
Method of Drive in. (mm)
12 (304.8) diameter flat-faced drum

Available Options
Pin-up Attachments Lifts
Pin-up attachments are flat wire strips Lift attachments keep the product from
that lift the product from the belt surface sliding on inclines or declines. The formed
to prevent undesirable marking. They can angle lift uses a flight clip to fasten it to the
also be used to keep the product from belt. The flat bar lift is welded to the belt.
sliding on inclines or declines.
Limits for Use:
Limits for Use: • Maximum Lift Width:
• Maximum height above belt surface Belt Width: 0.5" (12.7 mm)
is 0.38" (9.5 mm) • Lift Thickness: Normal limits are no
• Belt must be supported so that the pin- greater than 0.18" (4.8 mm) or smaller
up can pass through the return path than 0.06" (1.52 mm)
• Lift Height: Check with Engineering if
greater than 6" (152 mm)
• Minimum Lift Spacing: 2" (50.8 mm)
• Belt must be supported so that the lift
can pass through the return path
strAIght Products

Pointed top Flat top

Formed angle Flat bar

126 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 1-Inch Pitch Flat Wire FWC2

Tack Welding (available on welded-edge belts only)

This process prevents picket compression, Normally, two tack welds per pitch are Tack welded on
which results in a narrowing of the belt. located in the second opening from each every third rod on
This is related to high tension typically belt edge. For belt widths 60" (1524 mm) both sides of belt
associated with belt widths of 60" (1524 through 144" (3657.6 mm), belts are welded
mm) and greater. For belts less than 60" every third longitudinal pitch. For belt widths
(1524 mm) wide, tack welding is a customer 144" (3657.6 mm) or greater, tack welds are
requested option. For belts 60" or wider, placed at every longitudinal pitch. Weld
this option is standard, unless otherwise
requested by the customer.

Cast Iron Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 6 (2.72) 4.53 (115.1) 3.91 (99.3) 0.75 (19.1) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 9 (4.08) 6.25 (158.8) 5.66 (143.8) 0.75 (19.1) 3.50 (88.9)
#8 23 12 (5.44) 7.97 (202.4) 7.41 (188.2) 1.00 (25.4) 4.50 (114.3)
#10 31 18 (8.16) 10.72 (272.3) 10.16 (258.1) 1.25 (31.8) 5.50 (139.7)

Stainless Steel Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 6 (2.72) 4.53 (115.1) 3.91 (99.3) 0.75 (19.1) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 9 (4.08) 6.25 (158.8) 5.66 (143.8) 0.75 (19.1) 3.50 (88.9)
#8 23 12 (5.44) 7.97 (202.4) 7.41 (188.2) 1.00 (25.4) 4.50 (114.3)

UHMWPE Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max*
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 1 (0.45) 4.53 (115.1) 3.90 (99.1) 1.00 (25.4) 2.19 (55.6)
#6 18 2 (0.91) 6.24 (158.5) 5.65 (143.5) 1.00 (25.4) 3.75 (95.3)
#8 23 3 (1.36) 7.96 (202.2) 7.39 (187.7) 1.00 (25.4) 4.94 (125.5)
#10 31 5.5 (2.49) 10.72 (272.1) 10.16 (258.1) 1.00 (25.4) 7.13 (181.1)
UHMWPE material type components have a 150º F (66º C) maximum operating temperature.
strAIght Products

*Maximum bore size listed for UHMWPE material is based on 1/2” (12.7) of material above keyway.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 127
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

uu Flat Wire—Heavy Duty—FWC6 SB

Technical Specifications Units

Available Materials Stainless, carbon, and galvanized steels

Rod Diameter 6 gauge, 0.192 (4.9)
Picket Dimension 0.500 high x 0.062 thick (12.7 x 1.6)
Nominal Mesh Opening 0.50 x 0.50” (12.7 x 12.7)
Edge Treatment in. (mm) Welded
Available Widths 4.00–208.00 (101.6–5283.2)
Conveying Surface Full belt width minus 0.25 (6.4)
Longitudinal Pitch 1.08 (27.4)
Weight lb/ft² (kg/m²) 5 (24.5)
Maximum Allowable Tension lb/ft (kg/m) 1700 (2534)
Maximum Temperature °F (°C) Galvanized: 240 (115) Carbon: 1000 (538) Stainless: 1100 (593)
Positively driven with matching sprockets or friction driven with a minimum
Method of Drive in. (mm)
12 (305) diameter flat-faced drum

Notes Available Options

This belt is constructed with free-floating, mid-pitch Pin-up Attachments Lifts
rods that modify its nominally sized 0.5" x 0.5". Pin-up attachments are flat wire strips Lift attachments keep the product from
that lift the product from the belt surface sliding on inclines or declines. The formed
to prevent undesirable marking. They can angle lift uses a flight clip to fasten it to the
also be used to keep the product from belt. The flat bar lift is welded to the belt.
sliding on inclines or declines.
Limits for Use:
Limits for Use: • Maximum Lift Width:
• Maximum height above belt surface Belt Width: 0.5" (12.7 mm)
is 0.38" (9.5 mm) • Lift Thickness: Normal limits are no
• Belt must be supported so that the pin- greater than 0.18" (4.8 mm) or smaller
up can pass through the return path than 0.06" (1.52 mm)
• Lift Height: Check with Engineering if
greater than 6" (152 mm)
• Minimum Lift Spacing: 2" (50.8 mm)
• Belt must be supported so that the lift
can pass through the return path
strAIght Products

Pointed top Flat top

Formed angle Flat bar

128 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Flat Wire FWC6 SB

Tack Welding (available on welded-edge belts only)

This process prevents picket compression, Normally, two tack welds per pitch are Tack welded on
which results in a narrowing of the belt. located in the second opening from each every third rod on
This is related to high tension typically belt edge. For belt widths 60" (1524 mm) both sides of belt
associated with belt widths of 60" (1524 through 144" (3657.6 mm), belts are welded
mm) and greater. For belts less than 60" every third longitudinal pitch. For belt widths
(1524 mm) wide, tack welding is a customer 144" (3657.6 mm) or greater, tack welds are
requested option. For belts 60" or wider, placed at every longitudinal pitch. Weld
this option is standard, unless otherwise
requested by the customer.

Cast Iron Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 6 (2.72) 4.53 (115.1) 3.91 (99.3) 0.75 (19.1) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 9 (4.08) 6.25 (158.8) 5.66 (143.8) 0.75 (19.1) 3.50 (88.9)
#8 23 12 (5.44) 7.97 (202.4) 7.41 (188.2) 1.00 (25.4) 4.50 (114.3)
#10 31 18 (8.16) 10.72 (272.3) 10.16 (258.1) 1.25 (31.8) 5.50 (139.7)

Stainless Steel Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 6 (2.72) 4.53 (115.1) 3.91 (99.3) 0.75 (19.1) 2.63 (66.8)
#6 18 9 (4.08) 6.25 (158.8) 5.66 (143.8) 0.75 (19.1) 3.50 (88.9)
#8 23 12 (5.44) 7.97 (202.4) 7.41 (188.2) 1.00 (25.4) 4.50 (114.3)

UHMWPE Drive Sprockets

Weight Pitch Diameter Hub Diameter Bore Min. Bore Max*
Nom. Size Teeth
lb. (kg) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
#4 13 1 (0.45) 4.53 (115.1) 3.90 (99.1) 1.00 (25.4) 2.19 (55.6)
#6 18 2 (0.91) 6.24 (158.5) 5.65 (143.5) 1.00 (25.4) 3.75 (95.3)
#8 23 3 (1.36) 7.96 (202.2) 7.39 (187.7) 1.00 (25.4) 4.94 (125.5)
#10 31 5.5 (2.49) 10.72 (272.1) 10.16 (258.1) 1.00 (25.4) 7.13 (181.1)
UHMWPE material type components have a 150º F (66º C) maximum operating temperature.
strAIght Products

*Maximum bore size listed for UHMWPE material is based on 1/2” (12.7) of material above keyway.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 129
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

uu Flat Wire—EZ Transfer—FWH3

Technical Specifications Units

Available Materials Stainless, carbon, and galvanized steels

Rod Diameter 9 gauge, 0.15 (3.8)
Picket Dimension 3/4 x 0.054 thick (19.1 x 1.4)
Nominal Mesh Opening 0.50 x 1.00” (12.7 x 25.4)
Edge Treatment in. (mm) Welded
Available Widths 4.80 – 178.00 (121.9 – 4521.2)
Conveying Surface Full belt width minus 0.19 (4.8)
Longitudinal Pitch 1.08 (27.4)
Weight lb/ft² (kg/m²) 4.38 (21.4)
Maximum Allowable Tension lb/ft (kg/m) 780 (1163)
Maximum Temperature °F (°C) Galvanized: 240 (115) Carbon: 1000 (538) Stainless: 1100 (593)
Positively driven with matching sprockets or friction driven with a minimum
Method of Drive in. (mm)
12 (304.8) diameter flat-faced drum

EZ Transfer Plate
Width No. of No. of
The EZ Transfer Plate enables efficient OA Loops Openings
transfers from the FWH3 belt to other
conveyors. 4.80" (121.9 mm) 4 7
12.09" (307.1 mm) 10 19
Limits for Use:
24.31" (617.5 mm) 20 39
• The belt’s width must coincide with the
width of the plate which is produced in 36.5" (927.1 mm) 30 59
standard modular widths. 48.72" (1237.5 mm) 40 79
• Proper clearance for the 0.75" (19.1 mm)
thick belt and plate must also be observed. 60.91" (1547.1 mm) 50 99
73.09" (1856.5 mm) 60 119
85.34" (2167.6 mm) 70 139
Transfer plate fingers and belt
97.5" (2476.5 mm) 80 159
109.72" (2786.9 mm) 90 179
121.63" (3089.4 mm) 100 199

Note: Manufacturing tolerances are above

dimensions to the nearest 1/32" + zero–1/8.
strAIght Products

Note: O.A. widths wider than shown =

(No. loops–1) (1.22) + 1.136
Note: Additional loop measurements can be
calculated. Contact Ashworth Engineering
for details.

130 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Cleatrac® Belt & Sprocket System

uu Cleatrac® Belt & Sprocket System

Technical Specifications Units

Available Materials Stainless steel, carbon and galvanized steels, high temperature alloys
Available Widths 1.50–168.00 (38.1–4267.2)
Conveying Surface Full belt width
in. (mm)
Thickness (Mesh Dependent) 0.16–0.35 (4.1–8.9)
Lateral Pitch (Mesh Dependent) 0.20–0.67 (5.1–17.0)
Weight (Mesh Dependent) lb/ft² (kg/m²) 0.67–1.58 (3.3–7.7)
Open Area (Mesh Dependent) 34–74%
Working Strength per Unit of Width lb/ft (kg/m) Up to 1100 (1640)
Maximum Temperature 400 (204)
°F (°C)
Minimum Temperature -40 (-40)
Construction Balanced Weave
Positively driven by a matching minimum diameter drive system consisting
Method of Drive
of sprockets, filler rolls and support bearings

Features

Welded Edge Fatigue Resistant Cleatrac

Fatigue Resistant Cleatrac (CTBFR) is
Ashworth's newest offering in the Cleatrac
Belt & Sprocket System family. Fatigue
Resistant Cleatrac has up to 2.5 times the
working strength of our normal Cleatrac
belts, and can be used in applications
requiring longer conveyor lengths and
increased belt strength. Fatigue Resistant
Cleatrac can improve belt life by reducing
belt stretch and failure. Its suited for both
Cleatrac ® comes standard with welded freezer tunnel and fryer applications.
edges (as shown above). Fatigue Resistant Cleatrac is only available
in stainless steel.

Nose Roll Sizing

Mesh Minimum Diameter
The minimum recommended nose roll Exception: If the application has a conveyor
strAIght Products

diameter for the Cleatrac® belts is 0.63" end-to-end distance of 10' (3 m) or less and CTB 18-16 1.00" (25.4 mm)
(15.9 mm) for the CTB 30, 42, 48, and 60 the belt fits loosely around the conveyor, CTB 30-24 0.50" (12.7 mm)
mesh belts. Generally, use of nose rolls is the minimum nose roll diameter may be
not recommended with CTB 18 mesh belts. decreased as follows: CTB 42-36 0.38" (9.5 mm)
CTB 48-48 0.25" (6.4 mm)
CTB 60-48 0.25" (6.4 mm)
CTB 60-60 0.20" (5.1 mm)

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 131
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

Cleatrac® Meshes
Working Strength per
Thickness Lateral Pitch Weight Opening Size (approx.)
Mesh* Unit of Belt
in. (mm) in. (mm) lb/ft² (kg/m²) in. (mm)
lb/ft (kg/m)
CTB 18-16-16 0.30 (7.6) 0.67 (17.0) 0.67 (3.3) 0.60 x 0.69 (15.2 x 17.5) 100 (149)
CTBFR 18-16-16 0.30 (7.6) 0.67 (17.0) 0.67 (3.3) 0.60 x 0.69 (15.2 x 17.5) 250 (370)
CTB 18-16-14 0.35 (8.9) 0.67 (17.0) 1.13 (5.5) 0.59 x 0.67 (15.0 x 17.0) 250 (372)
CTB 30-24-17 0.29 (7.4) 0.40 (10.2) 0.88 (4.3) 0.35 x 0.45 (8.9 x 11.4) 200 (298)
CTBFR 30-24-17 0.29 (7.4) 0.40 (10.2) 0.88 (4.3) 0.35 x 0.45 (8.9 x 11.4) 500 (745)
CTB 30-24-16 0.26 (6.6) 0.40 (10.2) 1.19 (5.8) 0.34 x 0.44 (8.6 x 11.2) 300 (446)
CTBFR 30-24-16 0.26 (6.6) 0.40 (10.2) 1.19 (5.8) 0.34 x 0.44 (8.6 x 11.2) 750 (1100)
CTB 42-36-17 0.24 (6.1) 0.29 (7.4) 1.35 (6.6) 0.23 x 0.28 (5.8 x 7.1) 325 (484)
CTBFR 42-36-17 0.24 (6.1) 0.29 (7.4) 1.35 (6.6) 0.23 x 0.28 (5.8 x 7.1) 810 (1200)
CTB 42-36-18 0.24 (6.1) 0.29 (7.4) 1.03 (5.0) 0.24 x 0.29 (6.1 x 7.4) 240 (357)
CTBFR 42-36-16 0.25 (6.2) 0.29 (7.4) 1.79 (8.8) 0.24 x 0.29 (6.1 x 7.4) 930 (1400)
CTB 48-48-17 0.24 (6.1) 0.25 (6.4) 1.57 (7.7) 0.20 x 0.20 (5.1 x 5.1) 450 (670)
CTBFR 48-48-17 0.24 (6.1) 0.25 (6.4) 1.57 (7.7) 0.20 x 0.20 (5.1 x 5.1) 1100 (1640)
CTB 60-48-1820 0.16 (4.1) 0.20 (5.1) 0.93 (4.5) 0.16 x 0.21 (4.1 x 5.3) 120 (179)
CTB 60-48-18 0.21 (5.3) 0.20 (5.1) 1.54 (7.5) 0.15 x 0.20 (3.8 x 5.1) 350 (521)
CTB 60-60-18 0.22 (5.6) 0.20 (5.1) 1.58 (7.7) 0.15 x 0.15 (3.8 x 3.8) 350 (521)
Stock belt length is 25 ft (7.62 m), widths vary per mesh. Contact Ashworth for details.

System Requirements
Application Notes
• UHMWPE material type components have a 150° F (66°C) maximum operating temperature.
• Molded Acetal material type components have a 180° F (82°C) maximum operating temperature.

Tunnel Freezers Elevated Temperatures Multiple Belts Driven by

Use with caution as ice and snow Thermal expansion of the belt width may Common Drive Shaft
accumulates in mesh openings or on the adversely affect sprocket engagement with When two or more belts are driven
drive components, prohibiting sprocket the belt openings. If this is evident when belt on a common drive shaft and product
teeth engagement. Install a rotary brush, reaches application temperature, lock only alignment is critical, Ashworth Bros., Inc.,
or similar cleaning method, near sprocket the middle third of the sprockets onto the must be notified at time the purchase
locations to minimize debris. shaft so the outer sprockets can “float” along order is generated so that the belts will
the shaft, allowing for thermal expansion be matched. Slight differences in belt
Soft Dough Products and contraction of the belt. Keep in mind that pitch can affect the alignment of product
strAIght Products

Use with caution as debris may accumulate the shaft will have to be kept clean to allow over longer conveyor runs (typically 10ft
in mesh openings or on the drive sprockets to “float.” For flour-based products (3m) or greater). Replacement belts for
components, prohibiting sprocket teeth in elevated temperatures, arrange the drive these applications require that the order
engagement. Install a rotary brush, or similar configuration such that a shield prevents reference previous purchase orders.
cleaning method, near sprocket locations to debris from accumulating on the shaft and
minimize debris. drive components.

132 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Cleatrac® Belt & Sprocket System

uu Cleatrac® Belt & Sprocket System

Cleatrac® Sprockets
No. of
Stock Bore
Rows Flat-to-Flat Sprocket Width Min. Bore Max. Bore
Sprocket No. (UHMWPE) Note
of in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
in. (mm)
Teeth
CTS 18-8 8 1.51 (38.4) 2.00 (50.8) 0.50 (12.7) 1.00 (25.4) 0.75 (19.1) U
CTS 18-12 12 2.50 (63.5) 2.00 (50.8) 0.63 (16.0) 1.75 (44.5) 1.00 (25.4) U
CTS 18-14 14 2.95 (74.9) 2.00 (50.8) 0.50 (12.7) 1.94 (49.3) N/S U/S
CTS 18-18 18 3.95 (100.3) 2.00 (50.8) 0.50 (12.7) 2.75 (69.9) N/S U/S
CTS 30-8* 8 0.94 (23.9) 1.20 (30.5) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) N/S U/S
CTS 30-12  12 1.60 (40.6) 1.20 (30.5) 0.75 (19.1) 1.00 (25.4) 0.75 (19.1) U/S
CTS 30-14 14 1.91 (48.5) 1.50 (38.1) 0.50 (12.7) 1.25 (31.8) N/S U/S
CTS 30-16 16 2.23 (56.6) 1.20 (30.5) 0.50 (12.7) 1.38 (35.1) N/S U/S
CTS 30-18 18 2.58 (65.5) 1.20 (30.5) 0.50 (12.7) 1.69 (42.9) N/S U/S
CTS 30-20  20 2.89 (73.4) 1.20 (30.5) 0.75 (19.1) 1.88 (47.8) 1.00 (25.4) S
CTS 30-24 24 3.52 (89.4) 1.20 (30.5) 0.50 (12.7) 2.25 (57.2) N/S U/S
CTS 30-26  26 3.84 (97.5) 1.20 (30.5) 0.75 (19.1) 2.50 (63.5) N/S S
CTS 42-12* 12 1.01 (25.7) 1.14 (29.0) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) U
CTS 42-20 20 1.88 (47.8) 1.14 (29.0) 0.75 (19.1) 1.25 (31.8) 0.75 (19.1) U
CTS 42-24  24 2.30 (58.4) 1.14 (29.0) 0.63 (16.0) 1.50 (38.1) 0.75 (19.1) U/S
CTS 42-30 30 2.93 (74.4) 1.14 (29.0) 0.50 (12.7) 1.88 (47.8) N/S U/S
CTS 42-32 32 3.15 (80.0) 1.14 (29.0) 0.50 (12.7) 2.13 (54.1) 1.00 (25.4) U
CTS 42-40 40 4.00 (101.6) 1.14 (29.0) 0.50 (12.7) 2.50 (63.5) N/S U/S
CTS 42-56 56 5.70 (144.8) 1.14 (29.0) 0.50 (12.7) 4.00 (101.6) N/S U/S
CTS 48-20 20 1.34 (34.0) 1.50 (38.1) 0.50 (12.7) 0.63 (16.0) N/S U/S
CTS 48-24 24 1.66 (42.2) 1.50 (38.1) 0.75 (19.1) 1.00 (25.4) N/S U/S
CTS 48-32  32 2.31 (58.7) 1.50 (38.1) 0.94 (23.9) 1.50 (38.1) 0.75 (19.1) U/S
CTS 60-8** 8 0.43 (10.9) 1.00 (25.4) 0.20 (5.1) 0.25 (6.4) 0.20 (5.1) U
CTS 60-12 12 0.77 (19.6) 1.00 (25.4) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) U
CTS 60-24  24 1.74 (44.2) 1.00 (25.4) 0.75 (19.1) 1.00 (25.4) 0.75 (19.1) U/S
CTS 60-42  42 3.16 (80.3) 1.00 (25.4) 1.00 (25.4) 2.13 (54.1) 1.00 (25.4) U/S
CTS 60-54  54 4.09 (103.9) 1.00 (25.4) 1.00 (25.4) 2.75 (69.9) 1.00 (25.4) U
CTS 60-82 82 6.32 (160.5) 1.00 (25.4) 1.00 (25.4) 4.50 (114.3) N/S U
CTS 6060-28  28 1.57 (39.9) 1.00 (25.4) 0.50 (12.7) 0.75 (19.1) 0.75 (19.1) U/S
CTS 6060-40  40 2.34 (59.4) 1.40 (35.6) 0.75 (19.1) 1.63 (41.4) 1.00 (25.4) U/S
CTS 6060-92 92 5.64 (143.3) 1.40 (35.6) 0.50 (12.7) 4.00 (101.6) N/S U/S
* Non-Standard keyway (1/8 in² [3 mm²]) used on 30-8, 42-12 sprockets with 5/8 in. (15.88 mm) bore.
** This is a non-driving component and is not available with a keyway.
N/S denotes sprockets that are not kept in stock.
strAIght Products

U denotes UHMWPE.
S denotes stainless steel.
 Available in cast T303 stainless steel with a 11/16 in. dia. pilot bore.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 133
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

Sprockets

Cleatrac® Sprockets (CTS) • Plastic Cleatrac® sprockets are bored

Minimum diameter sprockets are designed oversized to allow lateral movement on
to positively drive mesh. Positive drive the shaft compensating for changes in
provides true belt travel, and minimum belt width due to temperature. If tight bore
terminal diameters allow close transfer of tolerances are required, they must be
product onto and off the belt. specified at time of order.
• All sprockets can be manufactured in • Set Screws are available upon request.
UHMWPE and machined T303 stainless.
Sprockets marked with a  are available
in cast T303 stainless steel.
• Molded acetal sprockets are available
as CTS18-12, minimum bore diameter Outside Diameter Width
15/16" and maximum bore of 1-1/8" and
CTS60-24, minimum bore diameter of 3/4"
and maximum bore of 1".
• American Standard keyways provided
unless otherwise specified by the
customer. Metric sizes are available. Flat-to-Flat

• Maximum bore sizes listed are with

keyway. For sprockets without keyway,
add American Standard keyway depth to
listed values.

Number of Sprockets
Spacing Between Sprockets
The minimum number of sprockets per A = Max. Spacing Between Sprockets Minimum Spacing
Mesh
shaft (X) can be calculated based on the in. (mm) in. mm
following formula: CTB 18 5.00 (127.0) 0.67 (17.0)
CTB 30 3.25 (82.6) 0.40 (10.2)
X = Belt Width / (A + B)
CTB 42 3.50 (88.9) 0.28 (7.1)
Where: CTB 48 3.25 (82.6) 0.25 (6.4)
A= Maximum allowable spacing CTB 60 3.00 (76.2) 0.20 (5.1)
between sprockets CTB 6060 3.00 (76.2) 0.20 (5.1)
B= Overall Sprocket Width

Fractional values should be rounded

up to the next whole number.
strAIght Products

134 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Cleatrac® Belt & Sprocket System

uu Cleatrac® Belt & Sprocket System

Cleatrac® Filler Rolls Number of Filler Rolls

Cleatrac® Filler Rolls (CTFR) provide mesh The number of filler rolls required can be Where:
support between the sprockets. They are calculated by following the steps below: A = number of gaps between sprockets
available in UHMWPE. B = number of sprockets per shaft
Step 1: A = B–1 C = overall belt width
• Designation is CTFR, followed by the same Step 2: E = C–(B x D) D = overall sprocket width
numeric designation of the sprockets. Step 3: F = E/A E = open space
• Outside diameter is equal to dimension Step 4: G = F/D F = available space per gap
F-F of the sprocket. Bore must match Step 5: GxA=H G = number of filler rolls per gap
that of the sprockets. H = total number of filler rolls required
• Width is the same as the selected sprocket. per shaft
• There are no keyway or set screws in
filler rolls.
Filler Rolls and Stocked Diameters
F-F Stock Bore Diameter W
Filler Roll No.
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
(CTFR)
(Figure 20) (Figure 20) (Figure 19)
18-8 1.51 (38.4) 1.00 (25.4) 2.00 (50.8)
Width
18-12 2.50 (63.5) N/S 2.00 (50.8)
30-8 0.94 (23.9) N/S 1.20 (30.5)
30-12 1.61 (40.6) 1.00 (25.4) 1.20 (30.5)
30-20 2.89 (73.4) N/S 1.20 (30.5)
42-12 1.01 (25.7) 0.50 (12.7) 1.14 (29.0)
42-20 1.88 (47.8) 0.75 (19.1) 1.14 (29.0)
42-24 2.30 (58.4) 1.00 (25.4) 1.14 (29.0)
F-F
48-20 1.34 (34.0) N/S 1.50 (38.1)
48-32 2.30 (58.4) N/S 1.50 (38.1)
Bore
60-8 0.43 (10.9) 0.20 (5.1) 1.00 (25.4)
60-12 0.77 (19.6) 0.50 (12.7) 1.00 (25.4)
60-24 1.74 (44.2) .075 / 1.00 (.19 / 25.4) 1.00 (25.4)
6060-28 1.57 (39.9) N/S 1.00 (25.4)
6060-40 2.34 (59.4) N/S 1.40 (35.6)

Cleatrac® Support Bearings

Cleatrac® Support Bearings (CTSB) are Length F-F

used for intermediate shaft support when
excessive shaft deflection will occur without Width
strAIght Products

their presence.

•Available in UHMWPE only

•Bore must match that of the sprockets
•Designation is CTSB, followed by the same H
numeric designation of the sprockets T
C-C

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 135
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

Number of Support Bearings

The number of support bearings is a func- d = B x {5.1/P x [(Cb x M)2 + [(Ct x T)²]1/2}1/3
tion of the shaft length and shaft diameter.
It is determined by iteration starting with Where:
an assumed shaft diameter, typically the B = 1 for solid shafts M = (Wr x L)/8
maximum bore of the subject sprockets. If P = 6000 for a shaft with keyway
the calculated shaft diameter is larger than P = 8000 for a shaft without keyway Where:
the assumed diameter, the belt width is di- Wr = Resultant weight in pounds of shaft,
vided by 2 to mimic the insertion of a sup- Cb = Service Factor in Bending sprockets, belt, and belt tension
port bearing. If the calculated diameter is Ct = Service Factor in Torsion Wr = [R² + (BT)²]1/2
still larger than the assumed diameter, the T = Torque in units of inch-lb. R = Weight in lb. of (Shaft + One Linear
belt width is divided by 3 to mimic the inser- Foot of Belt + Load/Linear Foot)
tion of 2 support bearings. This procedure T = Belt Tension x 1/2 (Pitch L = Length of shaft between bearings
is continued until the assumed diameter is Diameter of Sprockets) (in inches)
larger than the calculated diameter.
Cb Ct Type Loading
1.5 1.0 gradually applied
1.5–2.0 1.0–1.5 steady load
2.0–3.0 1.5–3.0 suddenly applied minor shock load;
suddenly applied heavy shock load

Cleatrac® Support Bearings

Flat Head
F-F H W Base T Base L Screw Size
Bearing No. (CTSB) Fasteners C-C
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (metric)
in. (mm)
18-8 1.51 (38.4) 1.01 (25.7) 0.75 (19.1) 0.38 (9.7) 2.25 (57.2) 1.50 (38.1) 5/16 (M8)
18-12 2.50 (63.5) 1.50 (38.1) 0.75 (19.1) 0.50 (12.7) 2.25 (57.2) 1.50 (38.1) 5/16 (M8)
30-8 0.94 (23.9) 0.73 (18.5) 0.50 (12.7) 0.38 (9.7) 1.50 (38.1) 1.00 (25.4) 1/4 (M6)
30-12 1.61 (40.9) 1.06 (26.9) 0.75 (19.1) 0.38 (9.7) 2.25 (57.2) 1.50 (38.1) 5/16 (M8)
30-20 1.44 (36.6) 1.89 (48.0) 0.75 (19.1) 0.38 (9.7) 2.25 (57.2) 1.50 (38.1) 5/16 (M8)
42-12 1.01 (25.7) 0.76 (19.3) 0.50 (12.7) 0.38 (9.7) 1.50 (38.1) 1.00 (25.4) 1/4 (M6)
42-20 1.88 (47.8) 1.23 (31.2) 0.75 (19.1) 0.38 (9.7) 2.25 (57.2) 1.50 (38.1) 5/16 (M8)
42-24 2.30 (58.4) 1.45 (36.8) 0.75 (19.1) 0.38 (9.7) 2.25 (57.2) 1.50 (38.1) 5/16 (M8)
48-20 1.34 (34.0) 0.92 (23.4) 0.75 (19.1) 0.38 (9.7) 2.25 (57.2) 1.50 (38.1) 5/16 (M8)
48-32 2.30 (58.4) 1.45 (36.8) 0.75 (19.1) 0.38 (9.7) 2.25 (57.2) 1.50 (38.1) 5/16 (M8)
60-8* 0.43 (10.9) 0.84 (21.3) 0.50 (12.7) 0.38 (9.7) 1.50 (38.1) 1.00 (25.4) No.10 (M5)
60-12 0.77 (19.6) 0.70 (17.8) 0.50 (12.7) 0.38 (9.7) 1.50 (38.1) 1.00 (25.4) 1/4 (M6)
60-24* 1.74 (44.2) 1.13 (28.7) 0.75 (19.1) 0.38 (9.7) 2.25 (57.2) 1.50 (38.1) 5/16 (M8)
strAIght Products

6060-28 1.57 (39.9) 0.91 (23.1) 0.75 (19.1) 0.38 (9.7) 2.25 (57.2) 1.50 (38.1) 5/16 (M8)
6060-40 2.34 (59.4) 1.44 (36.6) 0.75 (19.1) 0.38 (9.7) 2.25 (57.2) 1.50 (38.1) 5/16 (M8)
* Cleatrac® support bearings carried in stock

136 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Positive Drive Chain Edge (PDCE)

uu Positive Drive Chain Edge (PDCE)

Technical Specifications

Available Materials
Stainless steel, carbon and galvanized steels, high temperature steel alloys
(Mesh and Connector Rods)
Minimum Width* Defined by customer specified chain and mesh widths
Maximum Mesh Width* No absolute maximum width; dependent on customer application and belt specifications
Conveying Surface Equal to mesh width or inside guard edge dimension if guard edges are used
Weight Dependent on mesh, rod, and chain weights
Allowable Tension Defined by chain strength
Available Mesh Types Balanced weave, compound balanced weave, or conventional weave
Turn Capability Straight run only
Maximum Temperature Dependent on chain type and material; see section on chains, described below

Method of Drive Positive drive via matching chain and sprockets

Notes
* When specifying a PDCE belt, three dimensions PDCE belt assemblies employing steel
are required; overall belt width, distance between roller chains are widely used in conveyor
chain centers, and maximum mesh width. Typically,
applications because of uniformity of pitch,
only one of these dimensions is critical and the
belt will be designed around that dimension. The high tensile strength and relatively light
other two are calculated based on the required belt weight. An almost unlimited variety of
construction. If the critical dimension is not given, custom-designed PDCE belts are possible,
Ashworth will use the chain centers dimension as combining the numerous types of mesh,
the hold or critical dimension for manufacture of
chain, and cross supports (rods).
the belting.

Chains

Roller Chains Drag Chains

Ashworth can incorporate almost any pre- Drag Chains are defined as any chain that itive drive conveyors employing detachable
cision roller chain; such as RC50, C2060H, does not have a roller. Pintle Chains fall into link chains are used in applications where
or C2082H. Chain types can be either this class and have great durability and will light loads and slow speeds predominate.
single or double pitch, and double pitch handle medium loads at low speeds. Fabri- These chains must be well lubricated and
chains can have either a standard or over- cated from malleable iron, they will operate are normally used where nonabrasive oper-
sized roller. satisfactorily at temperatures up to 600°F ating conditions exist.
(316°C). For handling heavy loads, a high
Engineering Class Bushed Roller Chains Chain manufacturers’ catalogs afford com-
strength cast alloy is recommended. For se-
are all-steel chains, appropriate for heavy- plete data, specifications, and types of at-
verely corrosive conditions or temperatures
duty service and for difficult operating con- tachments available for all types of chains
strAIght Products

in excess of 1050°F (566°C), several types

ditions. Heavy duty, long pitch oversized that can be incorporated into Ashworth
of cast stainless steel alloys are available.
roller chains are also commercially available PDCE belts.
and may be incorporated in PDCE belts. Detachable link chains are also available in
either malleable iron or pressed steel. Pos-

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 137
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

Mesh
A PDCE belt’s mesh can be of any balanced Meshes on PDCE belts can be manufactured in one of three ways:
weave, compound balanced weave, or
conventional weave variety. However, the • Thicker than normal mesh is woven to accommodate large cross supports or
second count (SC) number is a function accommodate the cross supports, which when a very dense mesh is specified.
of cross support spacing, unless a special are inserted through the spirals. The • Mesh is of standard thickness and is
spiral* is used or the cross support is spirals are all of uniform size throughout attached to the top of the cross supports
attached to the underside of the mesh. (for the belt. (flat bars channels or angles).
more information see the section on “Mesh • Mesh is of standard thickness but is
Designation for Woven Wire Belts.” * A special spiral is larger than a standard spiral
interspersed with special spirals* to
and can be manufactured in various shapes such
as oval, diamond, square, etc.

Cross Supports

Rods Pipe/Rod Flat Bar

Rods are frequently used as cross supports. Rods can be inserted through any pipe or Any commercially made or manufactured
Their length is generally the same as the tubing which is commercially available and flat bar available may be used as cross
overall width of the belt. Rod edges are the combination is then inserted through the supports. The flat bar’s length is determined
either welded, washer welded, brazed, mesh. The pipe/tubing length is typically the by type of chain used and its attachment.
washer brazed, or drilled and cottered as same width as the mesh. The flat bar may be inserted through the
specified. Winged rods are used to hold the mesh or attached to the underside of
chain sideplates in place when pin-size rods Turned-Down Rod mesh as specified. When attached to the
are used with either riveted hollow pins or When the rod diameter is oversized for the underside, the flat bar is plug-welded or
cottered chains, and are located on every chain according to the previous chart, the brazed to the mesh through slots or holes in
chain pitch. When used as cross supports ends of the rods can be turned down to the the flat bar. In general, the flat bar is bolted
and engage the chain as pins, the standard standard pin diameter to engage the chain. to the chain, but in some cases it is welded
size of the rods is as follows: to the chain sideplate.
Channel or Angle
ANSI Number Rod Diameter Any commercially-made or manufactured
RC35 and RC41 0.135" (3.4 mm) channel or angle available may be used as
cross supports. These are normally plug-
RC40, C2040 & C2042 0.152" (3.9 mm) welded or brazed to the underside of mesh.
RC50, C2050 & C2052 0.196" (5.0 mm) In general, channel or angle cross supports
are bolted to a chain attachment, but in some
RC60, C2060H & C2062H 0.230" (5.8 mm)
cases are welded to the chain sideplate.
RC80, C2080H & C2082H 0.307" (7.8 mm)
strAIght Products

138 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Positive Drive Chain Edge (PDCE)

uu Positive Drive Chain Edge (PDCE)

Available Options

Guard Edges Guard edges are generally plates that Flights (Lifts or Cleats)
Guard edges are located on the inside of may be offset, of interlocking design, or Generally, flights are attached to the belt by
the chain. Height above the belt surface flat plates that are assembled in either a welding or brazing them to the mesh and/or
and material is customer specified. Guard shingled or staggered arrangement. Plates the guard edges (if applicable). The style,
edges are usually used with round cross can be square or rectangular and either material, height, and spacing above the belt
supports (rods, turned down rods, or pipe/ flared or notched as required (Figure 18). surface is customer specified. The length of
rod) which are inserted through holes in the Plates with double tabs may be used. The the flight is usually the same as the mesh
guard edge. bottom tabs may be inserted through the width but can be narrower if specified.
mesh or the tabs may straddle the mesh
and are welded or brazed to it. Whenever Usually, flights are produced from formed
guard edges are specified, the inside guard angle stock, although commercially
edge (IGE) dimension should be specified available flat bar, keystock, cut sheet metal,
by the customer. or other customer specified shapes may
be used. Angle types usually have slots
Guard Edge Shapes: or holes punched in the bottom to facilitate
plug-welding to the mesh. It should be
noted that flights are not meant to carry
product up inclines but are just to prevent
product slippage.

Wipers
Wiper attachments, typically fabricated from
wire mesh, hang from the bottom surface of
the belt to wipe debris from drip pans, trays,
Notched—Used to Standard Flared—Used to bins, etc. These attachments are typically
allow reverse bends prevent gaps when attached to belt mesh with a straight or
traversing sprockets crimped connector rod. Mesh designation
(if applicable), material, length below belt
[Figure 18] surface, width of wiper, and spacing are
customer specified.

Belt Tension Calculations

Note: The reduction of chain pull due

T = (wLfr +WLfr+ WH) x C to weight of the conveyor belt going
downhill on the return side usually can
be neglected and is omitted from the
Where:
inclined conveyor formula.
T = Belt tension in lb. (Newtons) (Total Chain Pull)
w = Weight of belt in pounds per linear foot (kg per linear meter) Friction Factor for Chains
W = Belt weight + Product Weight in pounds per linear foot (kg per linear meter) f = 0.35 for drag chain, non-rotating rollers,
or sliding on side plates on metal
L = Length of Conveyor measured center to center of pulleys in feet (meters).
strAIght Products

f = 0.20 for drag chain, non-rotating rollers,

fr = Friction factor between belt chain and belt supports (track) dimensionless. or sliding on side plates on UHMWPE
H = Rise of incline conveyor in feet (meters), f = 0.10 for chains moving on rollers

(Positive if conveyor inclines, negative if it declines) Increase above values by 50% when
C = Force conversion factor poorly lubricated.
1.0 if Imperial
9.8 if Metric

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 139
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven Chain Edge Specifications

Belt Tension Calculations (Cont.)

Maximum Single Strand Chain Pull Ultimate Strength Required in Chain:

For 2 strand conveyor uniformly loaded, For speeds under 25 ft. per min: use 5 times maximum single strand chain pull.
use 50% of total chain pull (T). For speeds 25 ft. to 50 ft. per min: use 6 times maximum single strand chain pull.
For 3 strand conveyor uniformly loaded, For speeds 50 ft. to 100 ft. per min: use 7 times maximum single strand chain pull.
use 33% of total chain pull (T). For speeds over 100 ft. per min: use 8 times maximum single strand chain pull.
For 4 strand conveyor uniformly loaded,
use 25% of total chain pull (T). Above values are for normal operating conditions. For unusual conditions, such as in ovens,
corrosive solutions, or handling abrasive materials, consult with an Ashworth Engineer.
These values are for chains that are uniformly
spaced across the width of the conveyor.

Power Requirements
The power requirements of a speed reducing Horsepower requirements are calculated with
gear box or a reduction unit needed to the following formula:
transmit power to the conveyor are usually
in terms of torque output at a specific speed. Output H.P. of Reducer =
The following formula is used:
Torque Required (inch–lb.) x Output R.P.M.
Torque Output (inch–lb.) = 63,025
Total Chain Pull x 1/2 (Pitch Diameter of
Chain Edge Drive Sprocket) Motor H.P. =
Output H.P. + losses in the speed reducer
Note: It is common practice to select a reduc-
tion unit whose output is substantially more than To select the proper size of the motor to drive
the theoretical requirements as determined by a conveyor through a speed reducer, use the
this formula. This is done to allow for high start- chart in Figure 19*
ing friction, lack of rigidity in the conveyor frame,
poor lubrication, misalignment of parts, and non-
[Figure 19]
uniform loading.

Motor HP Required for Torque and Speed Output of Reduction Unit

R.P.M. =
70
xxBelt Speed (inch/min.)xx
65
3.14 x Pitch Diameter of 60

Chain Drive Sprockets 55

2 HP
50
45 1-1/2 HP
These formulas apply where direct drive
Rev./min.

40 1/2 HP
is used from the reduction unit to the drive 35 3/4 HP
2 HP
shaft of the chain edge sprockets. 30 1/3 HP

25
1/4 HP
If additional speed reduction between the 20
15
gear box and the conveyor drive shaft is 1/6 HP
10
strAIght Products

used, then the requirements of the unit are

5
as follows: 0
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000

Torque Required =
Torque (inch-lb.)
x Torque (as calculated above)
x Chain Edge Sprocket Speedx
* The values in this chart are representative of commercial worm gear reduction units on the market, but
Reduction Unit Output Speed they should be used as a guide only. Consult the recommendations of the manufacturer of the particular
unit to be used in each installation.

140 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Positive Drive Chain Edge (PDCE)

ANSI Double Pitch Roller Conveyor Chains ANSI Double Pitch Roller Conveyor Chains
C Type Standard Rollers C Type Oversized Steel Rollers
ANSI No. Units C2040 C2050 C2060H C2080H ANSI No. Units C2042 C2052 C2062H C2082H
Pitch–P 1.000 1.250 1.500 2.000 Pitch–P 1.000 1.250 1.500 2.000
Roller Width–W 0.312 0.375 0.500 0.625 Roller Width–W 0.312 0.375 0.500 0.625
Roller Diameter–R 0.312 0.400 0.469 0.625 Roller Diameter–R 0.625 0.750 0.875 1.125
Plate Height–H 0.463 0.593 0.683 0.935 Plate Height–H 0.463 0.593 0.683 0.935
in. in.
Plate Thickness–T 0.060 0.080 0.125 0.156 Plate Thickness–T 0.060 0.080 0.125 0.156
Pin Diameter–D 0.156 0.200 0.234 0.312 Pin Diameter–D 0.156 0.200 0.234 0.312
Overall Width–F 0.320 0.403 0.586 0.699 Overall Width–F 0.320 0.403 0.586 0.699
Overall Width–G 0.377 0.453 0.662 0.813 Overall Width–G 0.377 0.453 0.662 0.813
Average Weight Per Foot 0.340 0.560 1.010 1.670 Average Weight Per Foot 0.580 0.880 1.480 2.400
lb. lb.
Average Ultimate Strength 3,960 6,600 12,100 19,800 Average Ultimate Strength 3,960 6,600 12,100 19,800
Finish Carbon Steel Finish Carbon Steel

Nickel Plated ANSI Conveyor Chains Nickel Plated ANSI Conveyor Chains
C Type C Type
ANSI No. Units C2042NP C2052NP C2062HNP C2082HNP ANSI No. Units C2040NP C2050NP C2060HNP C2080HNP
Pitch–P 1.000 1.250 1.500 2.000 Pitch–P 1.000 1.250 1.500 2.000
Roller Width–W 0.312 0.375 0.500 0.625 Roller Width–W 0.312 0.375 0.500 0.625
Roller Diameter–R 0.625 0.750 0.875 1.125 Roller Diameter–r 0.312 0.400 0.469 0.625
Plate Height–H 0.463 0.593 0.683 0.935 Plate Height–H 0.463 0.593 0.683 0.935
in. in.
Plate Thickness–T 0.060 0.080 0.125 0.156 Plate Thickness–T 0.060 0.080 0.125 0.156
P Diameter–D 0.156 0.200 0.234 0.312 Pin Diameter–D 0.156 0.200 0.234 0.312
strAIght Products

Overall Width–F 0.320 0.403 0.586 0.699 Overall Width–F 0.320 0.403 0.586 0.699
Overall Width–G 0.377 0.453 0.662 0.813 Overall Width–G 0.377 0.453 0.662 0.813
Average Weight Average Weight Per
0.580 0.880 1.480 2.400 0.340 0.560 1.010 1.670
Per Foot Foot
lb. lb.
Average Ultimate Average Ultimate
3,700 6,100 11,880 20,900 3,700 6,100 11,880 20,900
Strength Strength
Finish Nickel Plated Finish Nickel Plated

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 141
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven Chain Edge Specifications

ANSI Standard Single Strand Nickel Plated ANSI Single Strand

Chains Roller Chains
ANSI No. Units 35 40 50 60 80 ANSI No. Units 35NP 40NP 50NP 60NP 80NP
Pitch–P 0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750 1.000 Pitch–P 0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750 1.000
Roller Width–W 0.188 0.312 0.375 0.500 0.625 Roller Width–W 0.188 0.312 0.375 0.500 0.625
Roller Diameter–R 0.200 0.312 0.400 0.469 0.625 Roller Diameter–R 0.200 0.312 0.400 0.469 0.625
Plate Height–H 0.340 0.463 0.579 0.673 0.935 Plate Height–H 0.340 0.463 0.579 0.673 0.935
in. in.
Plate Thickness–T 0.050 0.060 0.080 0.094 0.125 Plate Thickness–T 0.050 0.060 0.080 0.094 0.125
P Diameter–D 0.141 0.156 0.200 0.234 0.312 Pin Diameter–D 0.141 0.156 0.200 0.234 0.312
Overall Width–F 0.230 0.320 0.401 0.500 0.636 Overall Width–F 0.230 0.320 0.401 0.500 0.636
Overall Width–G 0.284 0.375 0.450 0.549 0.750 Overall Width–G 0.284 0.375 0.450 0.549 0.750
Average Weight Per Foot 0.240 0.420 0.710 0.970 1.680 Average Weight Per Foot 0.240 0.420 0.71 0.970 1.680
Average Ultimate lb. Average Ultimate lb.
2,100 3,700 6,100 8,500 14,500 2,100 3,700 6,100 8,500 14,500
Strength Strength
Finish Carbon Steel Finish Nickel Plated

Stainless Steel ANSI Conveyor Stainless Steel ANSI Single Strand

“304 Series” Chains “304 Series” Chains
ANSI No. Units C2040SS C2050SS C2060HSS C2080HSS Item No. Units 35SS 40SS 50SS 60SS 80SS
Pitch–P 1.000 1.250 1.500 2.000 Pitch–P 0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750 1.000
Roller Width–W 0.312 0.375 0.500 0.625 Roller Width–W 0.188 0.312 0.375 0.500 0.625
Roller Diameter–r 0.312 0.400 0.469 0.625 Roller Diameter–R 0.200 0.312 0.400 0.469 0.625
Plate Height–H 0.463 0.593 0.683 0.935 Plate Height–H 0.340 0.463 0.579 0.673 0.935
in. in.
Plate Thickness–T 0.060 0.080 0.125 0.156 Plate Thickness–T 0.050 0.060 0.080 0.094 0.125
strAIght Products

Pin Diameter–D 0.156 0.200 0.234 0.312 P Diameter–D 0.141 0.156 0.200 0.234 0.312
Overall Width–F 0.320 0.403 0.586 0.699 Overall Width–F 0.230 0.320 0.401 0.500 0.636
Overall Width–G 0.377 0.453 0.662 0.813 Overall Width–G 0.284 0.375 0.450 0.549 0.750
Average Weight Average Weight Per
0.340 0.560 1.010 1.670 0.240 0.420 0.710 0.970 1.680
Per Foot lb. Foot lb.
Working Load 98 154 250 415 Working Load 59 98 154 231 397
Finish Stainless Steel Finish Stainless Steel

142 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Positive Drive Chain Edge (PDCE)

Chain Specifications

Specialty ANSI Extended Pitch Specialty ANSI Extended Pitch

Hollow Pin Chains Hollow Pin Chains
C2040 C2050 C2060 C2080 ANSI No. Units C2042HP C2052HP C2062HP C2082HP
Item No. Units
HP HP HP HP Pitch–P 1.000 1.250 1.500 2.000
Pitch–P 1.000 1.250 1.500 2.000 Roller Width–W 0.312 0.375 0.500 0.625
Bushing Width–W 0.312 0.375 0.500 0.625 Roller Diameter–R 0.625 0.750 0.875 1.125
Bushing Diameter–R 0.312 0.400 0.469 0.625 Plate Height–H 0.463 0.579 0.673 0.935
Plate Height–H 0.463 0.579 0.673 0.935 Plate Thickness–T in. 0.059 0.077 0.094 0.125
Plate Thickness–T in. 0.059 0.077 0.094 0.125 Pin Diameter–D 0.223 0.286 0.331 0.449
Pin Diameter–D1 0.223 0.286 0.331 0.449 Pin Diameter–D2 0.157 0.202 0.237 0.316
Pin Inner Diameter–D2 0.157 0.202 0.237 0.316 Overall Width–F 0.319 0.394 0.492 0.638
Overall Width–F 0.319 0.394 0.492 0.638 Overall Width–G 0.358 0.453 0.547 0.695
Overall Width–G 0.358 0.453 0.547 0.695 Average Weight Per
0.550 0.820 1.320 2.250
Average Weight Per Foot 0.310 0.510 0.840 1.410 Foot
lb.
Average Ultimate lb. Average Ultimate
2,700 4,500 6,100 11,400 2,700 4,500 6,100 11,400
Strength Strength
Finish Carbon Steel Finish Carbon Steel

Specialty ANSI Single Strand ANSI Single Strand Chains

Hollow Pin Chains with Attachments A-1
Item No. Units 40 HP 50 HP 60 HP 80 HP Item No. Units 35 40 50 60 80
Pitch–P 0.500 0.625 0.750 1.000 Pitch–P 0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750 1.000
Bushing Width–W 0.312 0.375 0.500 0.625 A 0.516 0.688 0.969 1.094 1.547
Bushing Diameter–R 0.312 0.400 0.469 0.625 B 0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750 1.000
Plate Height–H 0.463 0.579 0.673 0.935 E in. 0.313 0.375 0.562 0.625 0.750
Plate Thickness–T in. 0.059 0.077 0.094 0.125 F 0.109 0.141 0.203 0.203 0.266
Pin Diameter–D 0.223 0.286 0.331 0.449 G 0.250 0.312 0.406 0.469 0.625
strAIght Products

Pin Inner Diameter–D2 0.157 0.202 0.235 0.318 T 0.050 0.060 0.080 0.094 0.125
Overall Width–F 0.319 0.394 0.492 0.638 Average Ultimate
lb. 2,100 3,700 6,100 8,500 14,500
Overall Width–G 0.358 0.453 0.547 0.695 Strength
Average Weight Per Foot 0.360 0.580 0.860 1.480 Finish Carbon Steel
Average Ultimate lb.
2,700 4,500 6,100 11,400
Strength
Finish Carbon Steel

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 143
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven Chain Edge Specifications

ANSI Double Pitch Roller Chains

with Attachments A-1 & A-2
Item No. (Attachment) Units C2040 (A1) C2042 (A2) C2050 (A1) C2052 (A2) C2060H (A1) C2062H (A2) C2080H (A1) C2082H (A2)
Pitch–P 1.000 1.250 1.500 2.000
A 0.742 0.945 1.203 1.516
B 0.500 0.625 0.844 1.094
E 0.750 1.000 1.125 1.500
in.
F 0.141 0.203 0.203 0.266
G 0.359 0.437 0.578 0.750
I N/A 0.375 N/A 0.469 N/A 0.563 N/A 0.750
T 0.060 0.080 0.125 0.156
Average Ultimate
lb. 3,960 6,600 12,100 19,800
Strength
Finish Carbon Steel

Engineering 400 Series Engeerg 400 Series Ptle Chas

Pintle Chains with Attachments A-1
Item No. Units 442 452 455 462 488 Item No. Units 445 A-1(R) 445 A-1(L)
Pitch–P 1.375 1.506 1.630 1.634 2.609 Pitch–P 1.630
Bearing Width–W 1.060 1.088 1.120 1.440 1.618 A 1.594
Bearing Diameter–R 0.560 0.690 0.620 0.720 0.880 B 1.160
Max. Sprocket Face–J in. 0.620 0.620 0.690 0.880 0.940 E 0.880
in.
Pin Diameter–D 0.310 0.375 0.375 0.438 0.438 F 0.280
Plate Height–H 0.750 0.838 0.838 0.938 0.938 G 0.750
strAIght Products

Overall Width Riveted–G 1.875 2.060 2.060 2.375 2.750 I 0.375

Average Weight Per Foot lb. 1.400 2.000 1.900 2.500 2.900 T 0.188
Average Tensile Strength 6,000 7,000 7,300 8,800 11,000 Average Ultimate Strength lb. 6,000
Finish Carbon Steel Finish Carbon Steel

144 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Straight Running Belts: Conventional Weave Mesh Specifications

Conventional Weave Meshes

Approx. Approx.
Mesh Approx. Open- Mesh Approx.
Wire Weight Wire Weight
Mesh Center to ing Mesh Center to Opening
Diameter lb/ft² Diameter lb/ft²
Designation Center in. (mm) Designation Center in. (mm)
in. (mm) (kg/m²) in. (mm) (kg/m²)
in. (mm) B in. (mm) B
A A
C5½-6-6 0.192 (4.88) 1.808 (45.92) 1.46 (7.13) C12-19-9 0.148 (3.76) 0.602 (15.29) 3.14 (15.33)

C5½-5½-8 0.162 (4.11) 1.838 (46.69) 1.04 (5.08) C12-19-10 0.135 (3.42) 0.615 (15.62) 2 .54 (12.4)

C5½-5½-9 2 0.148 (3.76) 1.852 (47.04) 0.87 (4.25) C12-19-11 3/4 0.120 (3.05) 0.630 (16.00) 1.90 (9.28)
(50.8) (19.05)
C5 ½-5½-10 0.135 (3.42) 1.865 (47.37) 0.71 (3.47) C12-19-12 0.105 (2.67) 0.645 (16.38) 1.43 (6.98)

C5½-5½-11 0.120 (3.05) 1.880 (47.75) 0.53 (2.59) C12-19-14 0.080 (2.03) 0.670 (17.02) 0.83 (4.05)

C6-10½-9 0.148 (3.76) 1.352 (34.34) 1.41 (6.88) C12-19-16 0.062 (1.57) 0.688 (17.48) 0.50 (2.44)

C6 -10½-10 0.135 (3.42) 1.365 (34.67) 1.16 (5.66) C16-24½ -10 0.135 (3.42) 0.490 (12.45) 3.38 (16.5)

C6-10½-11 1½ 0.120 (3.05) 1.380 (35.05) 0.83 (4.05) C16-24-11 0.120 (3.05) 0.505 (12.83) 2.45 (11.96)
(38.1)
C6-10½ -12 0.105 (2.67) 1.395 (35.43) 0.64 (3.12) C16-24-12 5/8 0.105 (2.67) 0.520 (13.21) 1.81 (8.84)
(15.88)
C7-13-8 0.162 (4.11) 1.088 (27.64) 2.23 (10.89) C16-23½ -14 0.080 (2.03) 0.545 (13.84) 0.99 (4.83)

C7-13-9 0.148 (3.76) 1.102 (27.99) 1.87 (9.13) C16-23½-16 0.062 (1.57) 0.563 (14.30) 0.60 (2.93)

C7-13-10 1¼ 0.135 (3.42) 1.115 (28.32) 1.52 (7.42) C16-22-18 0.048 (1.22) 0.577 (14.66) 0.34 (1.66)
(31.75)
C7-13-11 0.120 (3.05) 1.130 (28.7) 1.12 (5.47) C17-24-10 0.135 (3.42) 0.427 (10.85) 3.85 (18.8)

C7-13-12 0.105 (2.67) 1.145 (29.08) 0.84 (4.10) C17-24-11 0.120 (3.05) 0.442 (11.23) 2.80 (13.67)

9/16
C10-14-6 0.192 (4.88) 0.808 (20.52) 3.92 (19.14) C17-23-12 0.105 (2.67) 0.457 (11.61) 2.04 (9.96)
(14.29)
C10-14-8 0.162 (4.11) 0.838 (21.29) 2.89 (14.11) C17-23-14 0.080 (2.03) 0.482 (12.24) 1.08 (5.27)

C10-14-9 1 0.148 (3.76) 0.852 (21.64) 2.34 (11.42) C17-23-16 0.062 (1.57) 0.500 (12.70) 0.66 (3.22)
(25.4)
C10-14-10 0.135 (3.42) 0.865 (21.97) 1.89 (9.23) C17-22-18 0.048 (1.22) 0.514 (13.06) 0.38 (1.86)

C10-15-11 0.120 (3.05) 0.880 (22.35) 1.40 (6.84) C18-28-10 0.135 (3.42) 0.365 (9.27) 4.32 (21.09)

C10-15-12 0.105 (2.67) 0.895 (22.73) 1.04 (5.08) C18-28-11 0.120 (3.05) 0.380 (9.65) 3.14 (15.33)

C11-16-9 0.148 (3.76) 0.727 (18.47) 2.96 (14.45) C18-28-12 1/2 0.105 (2.67) 0.395 (10.03) 2.29 (11.18)
(12.7)
C11-16-10 0.135 (3.42) 0.740 (18.80) 2.38 (11.62) C18-28-14 2 Mesh* 0.080 (2.03) 0.420 (10.67) 1.17 (5.71)

C11-16-11 7/8 0.120 (3.05) 0.755 (19.18) 1.73 (8.45) C18-28-16 0.062 (1.57) 0.438 (11.13) 0.71 (3.47)
(22.22)
strAIght Products

C11-16-12 0.105 (2.67) 0.770 (19.56) 1.26 (6.15) C18-28-18 0.048 (1.22) 0.452 (11.48) 0.41 (2.00)

C11-16-14 0.08 (2.03) 0.795 (20.19) 0.73 (3.56) C24-36½-12 0.105 (3.81) 0.270 (6.86) 3.10 (15.14)

C24-36½-14 0.080 (2.03) 0.295 (7.49) 1.66 (8.10)

C24-36½-16 3/8 0.062 (1.57) 0.313 (7.95) 1.00 (4.88)

(9.53)
*X Mesh denotes that there are
X meshes per Inch C24-36½-18 0.048 (1.22) 0.327 (8.31) 0.57 (2.78)

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 145
 Positive Driven Chain Edge (PDCE)

Conventional Weave Meshes

Approx.
Mesh Approx.
Wire Weight
Mesh Center to Opening
Diameter lb/ft²
Designation Center in. (mm)
in. (mm) (kg/m²)
in. (mm) B
A

C28-43½-14 0.08 (2.03) 0.253 (6.43) 1.93 (9.42)

1/3
C28-43½-16 (8.4) 0.062 (1.57) 0.271 (6.88) 1.09 (5.32)
3 Mesh*
C28-43½-18 0.048 (1.22) 0.285 (7.24) 0.62 (3.03)

C36-59-15 0.072 (1.83) 0.178 (4.52) 1.94 (9.47)

C36-59-16 0.062 (1.57) 0.188 (4.78) 1.42 (6.93)

C36-59-17 1/4 0.054 1.37 0.196 (4.98) 1.05 (5.13) Approx. Approx. Mesh
(6.4)
Open Area Center to
C36-59-18 4 Mesh* 0.048 1.22 0.202 (5.13) 0.82 (4.00)
(A) Center
C36-59-19 0.041 1.04 0.209 (5.31) 0.61 (2.98) (B)
C36-59-20 0.035 0.89 0.215 (5.46) 0.42 (2.05)

C48-66-16 0.062 1.57 0.138 (3.51) 1.74 (8.50)

1/5
C48-70-17 0.054 1.37 0.146 (3.71) 1.28 (6.25)
(5.1)
C48-69-18 5 Mesh* 0.048 1.22 0.152 (3.86) 0.98 (4.78)

C48-69-19 0.041 1.04 0.159 (4.04) 0.73 (3.56)

C48-68-20 0.035 0.89 0.165 (4.19) 0.47 (2.29)

C60-80-18 0.048 1.22 0.119 (3.02) 1.16 (5.66)

1/6
C60-80-19 0.041 1.04 0.126 (3.20) 0.85 (4.15)
(4.2)
C60-80-20 6 Mesh* 0.035 0.89 0.132 (3.35) 0.66 (3.22)

C60-78-21 0.032 0.81 0.135 (3.43) 0.51 (2.49)

C70-96-20 0.035 0.89 0.108 (2.74) 0.79 (3.86)

1/7
C70-95-21 0.032 0.81 0.111 (2.82) 0.66 (3.22)
(3.6)
C70-94-22 7 Mesh* 0.028 0.71 0.115 (2.92) 0.54 (2.64)

C72-128-19 0.041 1.04 0.084 (2.13) 1.25 (6.10)

1/8
C75-116-20 0.035 0.89 0.090 (2.29) 0.91 (4.44)
(3.2)
strAIght Products

C75-116-22 8 Mesh* 0.028 0.71 0.097 (2.46) 0.61 (2.98)

*X Mesh denotes that there are

X meshes per Inch

146 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Eye Link Belts

uu Eye Link Belts

Technical Specifications Units

Available Materials 304 & 316 stainless steel, carbon, other materials available upon request
Longitudinal Pitch Lengths 1.00 (25.4), 1.18 (30.0), 1.97 (50.0), 2.00 (50.8), 2.95 (75.0)
Eye Link Wire Diameters 0.08 (2.0), 0.10 (2.5), 0.12 (3.0), 0.14 (3.5)
Cross Rod Diameters in. (mm) 0.16 (4.0), 0.20 (5.0), 0.28 (7.0), 0.32 (8.0)
Available Widths 2.0–244.0 (50.8–6197.6)
Conveying Surface Full belt width minus 0.32 (8.1)
Weight Dependent upon construction—contact Ashworth Engineering
Maximum Allowable Tension Dependent upon construction—contact Ashworth Engineering
Maximum Temperature
°F (°C) Up to 752 (400)
(Material Dependent)
Method of Drive Positively driven

Mesh Designations
Mesh configurations for Eye-Link belts are Belt Description Eye Link Dim. ( c ) Rod Dia. (d)
designated as in the following example Pitch (a)
(m = Mesh Gap) mm (in.) mm (in.)
(Figure 20):
25.4 (1.0) 25.4 x m / 2.0–5 2.0 (0.080) 5 (0.196)
a x m/c–d
30 (1.18) 30 x m / 2.0–4 2.0 (0.080) 4 (0.158)
50 x 10/2.5–5
50 x m / 2.0–5 2.0 (0.080) 5 (0.196)
Where:
50 = Belt’s longitudinal pitch in mm 50 x m / 2.5–5 2.5 (0.098) 5 (0.196)
10 = Distance between eye links in mm 50 x m / 2.0–7 2.0 (0.080) 7 (0.276)
2.5 = Eye link wire diameter in mm 50 (1.97) 50 x m / 2.5–7 2.5 (0.098) 7 (0.276)
5 = Cross rod diameter in mm
50 x m / 3.0–7 3.0 (0.120) 7 (0.276)
d
50 x m / 3.5–7 3.5 (0.135) 7 (0.276)
50 x m / 2.5–8 2.5 (0.098) 8 (0.307)
50.8 x m / 2.0–8 2.0 (0.080) 8 (0.307)
a 50.8 (2.0) 50.8 x m / 2.5–8 2.5 (0.098) 8 (0.307)
50.8 x m / 3.0–8 3.0 (0.120) 8 (0.307)
75 x m / 2.5–5 2.5 (0.098) 5 (0.196)
75 (2.95)
75 x m / 2.5–7 2.5 (0.098) 7 (0.276)

m c Mesh Gaps
[Figure 20]
strAIght Products

Max. Recommended
Wire Diameter Min. Mesh Gap
Mesh Gap
2.0 mm (0.08 in) 2.3 mm (0.10 in) 26 mm (1.02 in)
2.5 mm (0.10 in) 2.8 mm (0.11 in) 26 mm (1.02 in)
3.0 mm (0.12 in) 3.3 mm (0.13 in) 26 mm (1.02 in)
3.5 mm (0.14 in) 3.8 mm (0.15 in) 26 mm (1.02 in)

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 147
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Drive

Available Options
Designs
Eye-Link belts are available in either EU
(standard) or US designs, the construction
of which is based on the placement of
the eye links throughout the belt. In the
US design, the eye-link ends are equally
spaced apart; whereas in the EU design,
the eye links are placed so the ends are in
direct contact with one another. EU design
belts display a more closed grid pattern,
while the US design is more open, as in the
following photographs. Eye-Link EU design Eye-Link US design

Eye-Link Plus
Eye-Link Plus belts are constructed with
specially designed internal bar links that
have slotted holes and are cut to allow
the belt’s cross wires to pass unimpeded
across the width of the module. This
design adds strength to the belt while
enabling excellent cleanability. Eye-Link
Plus belts are only available in 50 mm
pitch, but can be manufactured in either
EU or US eye link patterns as shown in the
accompanying photographs. Eye-Link EU-Plus design Eye-Link US-Plus design

Loose Chain & Chain Edges Side Plates Bar Links

All Eye-Link belts can be fitted with either Side plates (Figure 22) prevent product from Bar links (Figure 23) provide tension carrying
loose chain made from bar links or with falling off the edges of the belt. Standard capacity. They also prevent excessive cross
chain edges to suit customer specifications. construction is a plate extending 41 mm rod and module deflection. Additional bar
(1.61"), 51 mm (2.01"), or 61 mm (2.4") links may be added to strengthen the belt.
Cross Flights above the belt’s surface. Non-standard side The belt should be supported under the bar
Cross flights (Figure 21) prevent product plates are possible from 10 mm (0.39") up to links only. For Eye-Link Plus, the inner bar
from sliding or rolling down the belt when 200 mm (7.87") and are manufactured per links are cut out in the middle to provide
operated on an incline/decline. Typical order. Side plates replace one bar link at the room for a continuous module. All bar links
construction includes a support plate along belt edge. are fitted with slotted holes for easy cleaning.
each belt edge, with a flat bar welded onto
the edge of the plate, almost extending
across the full width of the belt.
strAIght Products

[Figure 21] [Figure 22]

[Figure 23]

148 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Eye Link Belts

Sprockets
Eye-Link belts are positively driven with
sprockets situated across the width of the Pitch No. of Teeth Pitch Dia.
belt. Sprockets should be positioned at a 15
mm (0.59") offset next to the bar link rows 8 65.33 mm (2.57 inch)
25.4 mm
at both sides. For all Eye-Link belts, 8 or 12 12 97.09 mm (3.82 inch)
tooth sprockets are standard. Sprockets can
8 78.39 mm (3.09 inch)
be produced from carbon steel, stainless 30 mm
steel and UHMWPE. The number of teeth 12 115.91 mm (4.56 inch)
can vary from 8 to 30 teeth. 8 130.66 mm (5.14 inch)
50 mm
12 193.19 mm (7.61 inch)
For wide belts, the use of sprocketed drums
or pulleys is recommended based on the 8 132.75 mm (5.23 inch)
50.8 mm
maximum allowable deflection of the drum. 12 196.28 mm (7.73 inch)
For use of Eye-Link belts in environments
8 195.98 mm (7.72 inch)
where formation of ice is possible, a special 75 mm
ice-free sprocket is available to prevent ice 12 289.78 mm (11.41 inch)
build-up. For wide belts in an ice-containing
environment, a cage drum is typically used.

Laser Cut Disk Pulley Cage Drums Tube Drum

Wear Strip Material & Placement System Requirements

The recommended belt supports for • Eye-Link belts do not normally need • All drums and rollers must be parallel to
Eye-Link belts operated at temperatures a tension unit. Preferably, there is a each other.
from -40°F (-40°C) to 140°F (60°C) are catenary sag over the return rollers. • The support bed must be horizontal to
UHMWPE strips placed underneath the bar • Reverse bends should be avoided, as ensure correct tracking of the belt.
links. The strips should be at least 0.59" (15 this will damage the eye links. • The maximum recommended belt speed
mm) wider than the total width of one bar • Heavy products must not fall on the belt is 60 ft/min. (20 m/min) depending on
strAIght Products

link packet. as this could damage the eye links and belt width, load, and system layout.
cross wires.
For temperatures over 140°F (60°C), the • The drive and return drum should be
recommended material is Inoxyda (glide placed 0.08" (2 mm) higher then the
bronze) for non-food applications and support strips.
stainless steel for food applications.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 149
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Drive

Mesh Diagrams - Flat Wire

Flat Wire A1/A2 Flat Wire A3/A4

MESH DIAGRAMS

Flat Wire A5

150 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Drive

Mesh Diagrams - Flat Wire

Flat Wire B1/B2 Flat Wire B3/B4

mesh diagrams

Flat Wire B5

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 151
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

Mesh Diagrams - Flat Wire

Flat Wire C1 Flat Wire C2

MESH DIAGRAMS

Flat Wire H3

152 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

Mesh Diagrams–Cleatrac®

CTB18-16-16 CTB30-24-16

mesh diagrams

CTB42-36-17 CTB48-48-17

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 153
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

Mesh Diagrams - Cleatrac®

CTB60-48-18
MESH DIAGRAMS

CTB60-60-18

154 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

NOTES

strAIght Products

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 155
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

Positive Driven:
Straight-Running Belt Selection
& Engineering Calculations
Belt Tension Calculation for Straight-Running Belts
The belt tension calculation formula for straight-running belts is different from that for spiral or turn-curve belts,
as there is no system radius (R) factor to be considered. Although the tension calculation formula is basically
the same for all straight-running belts, there is considerable variation in the belt support options and, therefore,
in the coefficient of friction (fr). The general belt tension calculation formula for straight-running belts is:
Straight Engineering

T = (wLfr + WLfr + WH) x C

Where:
T = Belt tension in lb. (Newtons)
w = Weight of the belt in lb. per linear foot (kg per linear m)
W = Belt Weight + Product Weight in lb. per linear foot (kg per linear m)
L = Full length of conveyor, measured from center to center of the pulleys in feet (meters)
fr = Coefficient of Friction between the belt and belt supports
H = Rise of incline conveyor in feet (meters), (+ if incline,–if decline)
C = Force conversion factor
Imperial: 1.0
Metric: 9.8

Woven Wire Belts (Including Baking Bands)

In calculating the tension ratings for woven wire belts, including Ashworth Baking Bands, the general formula
for calculating tension for straight-running belts is used, except that the WH coefficient is typically not relevant
(equals 0) as these belts generally are not operated on inclines/declines.

Typical (fr) values used in woven wire belt applications are:

Types of Support Coefficient of Friction (fr) value

Free-turning rollers 0.10
Stainless steel 0.40
Carbon (mild) steel:
With temperature to 1000°F (538°C) 0.35
Between 1001 and 1200°F (538–649°C) 0.37
Between 1201 and 1400°F (649–760°C) 0.40
Between 1401 and 1600°F (760–871°C) 0.44

Once belt tension is calculated, the following formula is used to determine how much torque is required to
adequately drive the belt and its product load:

Torque Requirement (in units of Inch Pounds) = Belt Tension (T) x ½ Drum or Pulley Diameter in inches

156 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

Straight Running Belts: Positive Drive

Positive Drive Chain Edge (PDCE) Belts
The general formula is used, including the WH coefficient, as these belts are frequently used in incline/decline
applications. However, in calculating WH, the reduction of chain pull due to the weight of the conveyor going
downhill on the return side can be ignored and is omitted from the inclined conveyor formula.

The following coefficients of friction (fr) for chains and typical supports are:

Straight Engineering
Type of Chain/Supports Coefficient of Friction (fr) value
Drag chain, with non-rotating rollers or
sliding on side plates on metal supports 0.35

Drag Chain, with non-rotating rollers or

sliding on side plates on UHMWPE supports 0.20

Chains moving on rollers 0.10

Note: If the application is poorly lubricated, the above fr values should be increased by 50%.

Once the tension calculation is completed for the PDCE belt, the chain must be checked to see if it can handle
the tension. This is done by comparing calculated T values to the load rating on the chain using the following
conversions:

Calculated Single Strand Chain Pull:

• For 2 Strand Conveyor uniformly loaded: use 50% of total chain pull or T/2
• For 3 Strand Conveyor uniformly loaded: use 33.3% of total chain pull T/3
• For 4 Strand Conveyor uniformly loaded: use 25% of total chain pull T/4

Note: These values are for chains uniformly spaced across the width of the conveyor.

Ultimate Strength Required in Chain:

• For speeds less than 25' per minute: use 5 times maximum single strand chain pull
• For speeds less than 25' to 50' per minute: use 6 times maximum single strand chain pull
• For speeds less than 50' to 100' per minute: use 7 times maximum single strand chain pull
• For speeds greater than 100' per minute: use 8 times maximum single strand chain pull

Note: These values are for normal operating conditions. For unusual conditions, such as in ovens, corrosive solutions, or handling
abrasive materials consult with Ashworth Engineering.

Type of Chain/Supports Coefficient of Friction (fr) value

Clean and/or packaged product 0.20
Breaded or flour-based product 0.27
Greasy, fried product below 32°F (0°C) 0.30
Sticky, glazed or, sugar-based product 0.35

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 157
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

Straight-Running Belt Selection

& Engineering Calculations
Flat Wire Belts
Tension is calculated using the general formula previously provided with appropriate fr values, based on
the support materials used. Appropriate fr values for flat wire belts include those for mild steel listed in the
preceding section, as well as the following values for UHMWPE supports:

The quantity of required drive sprockets is then calculated based on the calculated tension on the belt and the
Straight Engineering

belt speed. In no case should sprocket spacing exceed 6" (152.4 mm) across the width of the belt.
The number of sprockets required is calculated by dividing the calculated tension (T) by either 50 or 35,
depending on whether the belt is standard weight or heavy duty. This result is then compared to the result of
dividing the belt width by 6. The higher of the two results is the correct number of sprockets to be used. This
calculation is illustrated in the following example:
A FWC2 (heavy duty) flat wire belt is 36" (914.4 mm) wide, and has a calculated tension (T) of 450 lb. (204.5 kg).
1. 450 (T) /50 (tension carried by a heavy duty sprocket) = 9 sprockets
2. 36 (belt width)/6 (maximum spacing of sprockets in inches) = 6 sprockets
3. 9 > 6, so 9 sprockets should be used.
This calculation is moderated by belt speed; the greater the speed of the belt, the greater the number of sprockets
required. The following table provides modified sprocket quantities based on the speed of the belt, where:
BS = Belt Speed in feet per minute (meters per minute)
BT = Belt Tension at the drive shaft in lb. (kg)

BS<20 fpm BS≥20 fpm

Belt Type
(BS<6.1 mpm) BS≥6.1 mpm
BT/50 BT/35
Standard Weight Flat Wire
(BT/22.7) (BT/15.9)
BT/100 BT/50
Heavy Duty Flat Wire
(BT/45.4) (BT/22.7)

Proper location and placement of the sprockets is important as it results in smoother belt operation, reduced wear
on the sprockets and on the belt. Sprocket teeth should always drive against the round connector rod. Space
sprockets evenly along drive and
idler shafts, ensuring that the outside
drive sprockets are located in the odd
numbered openings beginning with the
third opening in on each belt edge. Idler
sprockets are located in even numbered Drive
mesh openings beginning with the Sprockets
2nd opening in on each belt edge.

Idler Direction
Sprockets of Travel

[Figure 24]

158 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

To ensure that each drive sprocket tooth contacts the round connecting rod and shares in its part of the load,
the hubs of all sprockets located on the same shaft should face the same direction. For those sprockets without
hubs, the sprocket sides with the Ashworth logo, lettering, or directional arrows should face the same direction.
Figure 24 illustrates correct placement of drive and idler sprockets.
Note: Sprockets provide positive drive to flat wire belts. They will also help keep the belt properly aligned. However, sprockets cannot be expected to control
excessive alignment and control issues. The ability of a belt to run in a straight and controlled manner is a function of the quality of the belt, correct conveyor

Straight Engineering
or equipment design, and proper belt installation.

Driving Drum (Terminal Roll) Diameter Calculation for Friction-Driven Belts

Woven Wire Belts
Woven wire belts must be driven by terminal rolls or drums of adequate size in order to avoid damage to the
belt. If the driving drum is less than the calculated minimum, the belt will hinge on the spirals, causing them
to bend. The bending essentially flattens the spirals and elongates the pitch. This elongation typically is not
uniform across the belt's width. The resulting problems may include mesh distortion, metal fatigue, and belt
tracking issues.

To calculate the minimum drum diameter for balanced weave belts, divide 180 by the second count (SC)
number in the mesh count designation. For example, a B48-24-16 mesh has a SC of 24, so the calculation
would be 180/24 = 7.5. The minimum drum diameter would be 7.5 inches.

For baking bands or other woven wire belts utilizing compound balanced weave construction, the diameter of
the terminal rolls or drum is determined by making the following calculations: First, divide the second count
number by the CB number. Then, divide 180 by this result to arrive at the correct minimum drum diameter.

For example, consider the CB5 Baking Band® with a mesh designation of CB5-27-84-1416F. First divide 84
by 5, arriving at the result, 16.8. Then divide 180 by 16.8, which equates to 10.71" (272.14 mm). This is the
minimum driving drum diameter calculated in inches (or mm).

Flat Wire Belts

In the majority of cases, flat wire belts are sprocket driven. However, in the case of heavy loads and long belt
lengths, flat wire belts may also be friction driven. Under these [Figure 25]
conditions, a lagged drum (one covered in urethane to increase
the friction between the drum and the belt) is often used. The
drum should be flat-faced (not crowned) and be a minimum of
12" (304.8 mm) in diameter for 1" (25.4 mm) pitch belts and 7.5" +.02" (0.5 mm)
(190.5 mm) in diameter for 1/2" (12.7 mm) pitch belts. A -.00" (0.0 mm)
Wear Strip Placement Calculation
In most cases, wear strips for straight-running belts are PD = pitch
positioned according to the formula at right. diameter

A = ½ x (PD – BT)
This formula is a general guideline and does not take into consideration belts
traveling at speeds greater than 75 ft/min. (23 m/minute). For high speed Where:
applications, Ashworth recommends increasing the height of “A” (Figure 25) A = Calculated Height
and shortening the wear strips as much as one belt pitch in length. PD = Sprocket Pitch Diameter
BT = Belt Thickness

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 159
 Straight Running Belts: Positive Driven

Troubleshooting—Flat Wire Belts

Tracking Problems
If a flat wire belt is not tracking properly, it could be the result of one or more of the following problems:
• Misalignment of the snub rolls
• Physical damage to the belt
• Belt is contacting the structure of the equipment where it is installed
• Belt is subjected to uneven heating
• Belt is carrying an unbalanced product load
Straight Engineering

If the belt is friction driven, additional possible causes of poor tracking include:
• Misalignment of terminal rolls; usually the case if the belt edges exhibit unequal sag near the drive drum
• Undersized terminal rolls which can cause the belt to bend and stretch irregularly

Increase in Belt Length

In certain situations, there may be a noticeable lengthening of the belt, leading to tracking and drive issues. In ad-
dition to the case listed above where the terminal drum has been undersized, belts can increase in length due to:
• Excessive system tension being applied to the belt, causing the belt to prematurely wear and stretch
• Newness of the belt; after initial installation, it is normal to experience elongation of the belt of up to 0.2% in
total belt length
• The belt is old and has elongated due to wear

Surging
Surging of flat wire belts can be caused by a number of factors, including:
• Faulty power transmission components; gear boxes, couplings, and motors, including silicon controlled
rectifier units
• Inconsistent belt support material; whereby higher levels of friction are caused by different types of supports;
different types of supports should not be mixed in a single system
• Over-torqueing of the drive shaft and/or too much tension in the system
• Overcoming the initial inertia of the system may cause the belt to surge upon start-up; this is normal to a
certain degree and may not be an indication of a problem

Binding of the Belt & Sprockets

The most common cause of binding of the sprocket teeth with the belt is due to incorrect size selection of the
sprockets. Other possible causes include:
• Improper sprocket tooth alignment; this may be corrected by making sure the recommended key seat is used
over the entire belt width and/or by making sure that the sprocket hubs all face in the same direction
• Too little catenary sag has been built into the belt; this can be corrected by either adding more belt length or
a stripper bar to the system

Belt Jumps the Sprockets

This problem is likely due to one of the following:
• Incorrectly sized sprockets
• Misaligned take-up, causing unequal force to be applied along the width of the shaft
• The belt length is too long; this allows the belt to ride up and out of the grip of the sprocket teeth

160 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

Straight Running Belts:

Friction Driven

Baking Bands
Over 45 Years of Baking Success High Quality & Performance
 Invented by Ashworth and proudly  Still inspected with 22 quality check-
manufactured in the USA since 1963 points to guarantee true tracking and
 Preferred marking pattern a long operating life
 Stable product support  Dense mesh provides even heating
 Industry standard across the entire belt width
 Excellent relief of cooking gasses

Balanced Weave
The Most Versatile Belt
 Ideal for products that are small or  True tracking
need a lot of support  Uniform flat conveying surface
 Precision manufactured to minimize  Resistant to distortion
belt stretch and increase belt life  Ideal strength-to-weight ratio
 Variable mesh openings to meet ap-  Minimal maintenance
plication requirements

Control Rolls
Preserve True Tracking Ashworth True Tracking Guarantee
 Ensure belt alignment during chang-  Requires purchase of Ashworth
ing conditions or production mishaps Controls and Ashworth Super-
 Ensure product alignment vised Installation

Lehr Belts
For High Temp Oven Applications Stable and Smooth Transfers
 Locked-in spiral construction  Reduced belt vibration—improved
 Factory tested for true tracking crimp profile forms the smoothest
 Spirals and connector rods elimi- hinge, eliminating harmonic vibration
nate almost all hinge wear and belt  Flat surface provides stable support
elongation issues strAIght Products

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 161
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

Selection Guide:
Straight Running Belts

ire
nd ing

nW

lt
Ba Bak

Be
ve

hr
5

Wo
CB

Le
Specifications Units

Material(s) Stainless Steel, Carbon & Galvanized Steels, High Temperature Alloys

Width Limits Up to 144 (3658) Up to 216 (5486) 1 - 216 (25.4 - 5486)

in. (mm)
0.33 (8.5) Lateral
Pitch 0.44 (11.2) Mesh Dependent
0.60 (15.24) Longitudinal
Unilateral, Balanced, Conventional or
Compound
Mesh Type Compound Balanced Weave
Balanced Weave
Balanced Weave

Maximum lb/ft
Dependent on Material and Temperature Mesh Dependent Dependent on Material and Temperature
Tension kg/m

Open Area % Minimal Mesh Dependent 47

Edge Treatment Welded

Method of Drive Friction/Drums

Straight Run Applications

Can Ovens / Washers
Can Washing
Cookers
Fertilizer Spreading
Filling Lines
Food Processing Conveyance u
Freezer Belt
Straight belt selection

Fryer Belt u
General Conveyance u
Incline Conveyors
Industrial Dryers
Industrial Washers u
Lehr Oven Belt u
Oven/Baking Belt u u u
Package Accumulation
Package Conveyance
Pasteurizing Applications
Product Washing u
Quench Tanks u
Rubber Parts Handling
Small Product Transfer u
Veneer and Wood Drying
Washers and Degreasers

162 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

Performance Guarantee
For the Proper Tracking of Compound Balanced Weave and Balanced Weave Belting

Ashworth manufactures woven wire baking bands using the industry’s highest standards and tightest tolerances.
All baking bands are tracked in-house prior to shipment the exact same way that we recommend the bands be
installed in the field.

Straight Engineering
Our Model One Control Rolls are installed on the conveyor at a distance of two to three times the width of the
belt from the terminal roll.
The belt is mapped for true tracking and then split into manageable sections of either 25 or 50-foot lengths.
The belt sections are sequentially numbered and rolled with the bake side out.

On-Site Belt Installation

The belt must be installed in the sequential order that it was tested at the factory.
The belt can be installed at either the discharge or the in-feed of your conveyor/oven, but when installing the
belt into the discharge the belt must be fed off the BOTTOM of each roll into the return path of the conveyor/
oven at the discharge. Conversely, when installing the belt into the in-feed, the belt must be fed off the TOP of
each roll. Failure to install the belt sections in this manner will cause the belt to “bow” or “dog-leg” at the splice
joints and develop excessive waver.

Your Guarantee for Exceptional Performance and Minimum Production Interruption

Ashworth guarantees that our CB5 Baking Band® to track with a total waver not to exceed 1⁄4-inch at either
terminal end, and balanced weave belts with more open meshes to track with a total waver not to exceed
3⁄8-inch, under the following conditions:

1. Ashworth’s Model One control rolls are properly installed at a distance equal to two to three
times the belt width prior to each terminal roll. Ashworth guarantees the total waver not to exceed
1⁄2-inch at either terminal end when Model Two controls are properly installed.
2. The belt sections are installed in sequential order as marked, and verified by an Ashworth Factory
Service Technician before running the belt.
3. Tracking adjustments are completed and verified by an Ashworth Factory Service Technician.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 163
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

uu Baking Bands

Technical Specifications Units

Available Materials
Stainless steel, carbon steels
(Mesh and Connector Rods)
Minimum Width 3 lateral pitches + 4 spiral wire diameters
Maximum Width in. (mm) 144.00 (3657.6)
Conveying Surface Full belt width
Thickness (Mesh Dependent) See mesh designation table
Weight (Mesh Dependent) See mesh designation table
Lateral Pitch (Mesh Dependent) See mesh designation table
Opening Size (Mesh Dependent) See mesh designation table
Maximum Temperature °F (°C) Carbon steel—Up to 1000 (538)
Method of Drive Friction driven on flat-faced drums or terminal rolls

Mesh Designation Terminal Rolls / Drum Diameter Controls

Mesh choice depends on the baking re- For baking bands utilizing compound bal- Ashworth recommends use of Ashworth
quirements of the product. Your selection ance weave construction, the diameter of Model #1 or Model #2 Control Systems to
should consider product support, heat ex- the terminal rolls or drum is determined by prevent the belt from contacting oven frame-
posure, and the belt strength required for making the following calculations: divide the work and to keep the belt centered on the ter-
the oven design. second number by the CB number; 180 is minal drums.
then divided by this result to arrive at the cor-
rect minimum drum diameter.

For example, considering mesh type CB5-

27-84-1416F (CB5 Baking Band®), first
divide 84 by 5, arriving at 16.8. Then di- Wire Options
vide 180 by 16.8, which equates to 10.71"
(272.14 mm) This is the minimal driving Baking bands are typically manufactured
drum diameter calculated in inches (or mm). from annealed high carbon steel round wire
in standard gauge sizes. Stainless steel and
other steel alloys can be used if required.

Flattened Wire (F) can be specified for the

conveying surface if needed. Additionally,
Precision Ground Light Weight (PGLW) can
also be specified. This process results in
the flattest baking surface and is attained
by precision grinding of the surface after the
strAIght Products

baking band has been manufactured. This

option is limited to carbon steel bands 54"
(1370 mm) or less in width.

164 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Baking Bands

Compound Balance
Woven Baking Band Weave Baking Band
(Figure 26) (Figure 27)

Approx. Approx.
Opening Opening
Size Size

Woven Baking Bands (Crimped)

Wire Diameter Approximate Opening Size Weight
Mesh Designation
in. (mm) in. (mm) Figure 26 lb/ft² (kg/m²)
B48-38-15 0.072 (1.83) 0.18 x 0.24 (4.6 x 6.1) 2.80 (13.7)
B48-48-16 0.062 (1.57) 0.18 x 0.19 (4.7 x 4.8) 2.30 (11.2)
B60-36-14 PGLW 0.080 (2.03) 0.12 x 0.25 (3.0 x 6.4) 3.54 (17.3)
B60-36-16 PGLW 0.062 (1.57) 0.14 x 0.27 (3.6 x 6.9) 2.12 (10.3)
B72-72-18 0.047 (1.19) 0.12 x 0.12 (2.9 x 2.9) 2.05 (10.0)
B84-20-1416 0.080/0.066 (2.03-1.67)* 0.08 x 0.52 (2.0 x 13.2) 2.80 (13.7)
B102-24-1418 0.080/0.047 (2.03-1.19)* 0.07 x 0.42 (1.8 x 10.7) 2.20 (10.7)
U66-48-1718 PGLW 0.054/0.047 (1.37/1.19)* 0.13 x 0.20 (3.3 x 5.1) 1.69 (8.3)
B66-48-1718F 0.054/0.047 (1.37/1.19)* 0.13x0.20 (3.3 x 5.1) 1.69 (8.3)

Compound Balance Weave Baking Bands

Wire Diameter Approximate Opening Size Weight
Mesh Designation Type of Connector
in. (mm) in. (mm) Figure 27 lb/ft² (kg/m²)
CB3-22-58-12 Straight 0.105 (2.7) 0.08 (2.0) 7.95 (38.9)
CB3-30-72-14 Crimped 0.080 (2.0) 0.062 (1.6) 6.00 (29.6)
CB3-36-76-14 Crimped 0.080­ (2.0) 0.054 (1.4) 3.76 (18.4)
CB3-42-72-1416 Crimped 0.080/.062 (2.0-1.6)* 0.052 (1.3) 4.85 (23.7)
CB3-56-120-18 Straight 0.047 (1.2) 0.041 (1.0) 3.90 (19.1)
CB3-58-140-19 Straight 0.041 (1.0) 0.032 (0.8) 3.45 (16.9)

0.041/0.041x0.035*
CB3­-60-139-19F** Crimped 0.028 (0.7) 2.85 (13.9)
(1.0-1.0x0.9)

CB3-84-176-2022 Crimped 0.035/.028 (0.9/0.7)* 0.018 (0.5) 2.40 (11.7)

CB3-84-200-22 Crimped 0.028 (0.7) 0.018 (0.5) 2.40 (11.7)
strAIght Products

0.080/0.063x0.047*
CB5-27-84-1416F** Crimped 0.050 (1.3) 4.20 (20.6)
(2.0/1.6x1.2)

0.072/0.063x0.047*
MCB5-27-84-1516F** Crimped 0.058 (1.5) 3.35 (16.4)
(1.8-1.6x1.2)

CB5-36-120-18 Crimped 0.035 (0.9) 0.017 (0.4) 3.82 (18.7)

*Connecting wire diameter/Spiral wire diameter

** Flattened Wire

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 165
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

uu CB5 Baking Band®

Technical Specifications Units

14 and 16 gauge (0.080 or 0.062 [2.0 or 1.6])

Material
stainless or high carbon steel wire

Minimum Width 1.58 (40.1)

in. (mm)
Maximum Width 144.00 (3657.6)

Longitudinal Pitch 0.14 (3.6)

Belt Strength lb/ft (kg/m) 3100 (4600) of belt width, based on high carbon steel at 70°F (21°C)

Conveying Surface Overall Belt Width(0.5 one lateral pitch + 3 spiral wire diameters)

Mesh Type Compound balance weave with 5 connectors per spiral

Mesh Designation CB5-27-84-1416F (standard)

Open Area Minimal

Edge Treatment Welded

Method of Drive Friction driven on flat faced terminal rolls

Minimum Terminal Roll Diameter in. (mm) 10.75 (273.1)

Maximum Temperature °F (°C) Carbon steel: Up to 1000 (538) Stainless steel: Up to 2050 (1121)

Available Options
Wire Controls
Baking bands are typically manufactured Ashworth recommends use of Ashworth Model
from annealed high carbon steel round #1 or Model #2 Control System to prevent the
wire in standard gauge sizes. Stainless belt from contacting oven framework and to
steel and other steel alloys can be used keep the belt centered on the terminal drums.
if required.
MCB5 27-84-1516F
Flattened Wire (F) can be specified for the This is a lighter weight version of the
conveying surface if needed. Additionally, original CB5 Baking Band®. By using a
Precision Ground Light Weight (PGLW) can higher gauge crimp connector, the band’s
also be specified. This process results in weight is reduced by approximately 20%
the flattest baking surface and is attained compared to the standard CB5-27-84-
by precision grinding of the surface after the 1416F. This band is known as the CB5
baking band has been manufacturer. This Metric, where “Metric” is designated by the
option is limited to carbon steel bands 54" “M” in the mesh designation.
strAIght Products

(1370 mm) or less in width.

166 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

uu CB3 Tortilla Band®

Technical Specifications Units

14 gauge (0.080 [2.0])

Material
stainless or high carbon steel wire

Minimum Width 1.28 (32.5)

in. (mm)
Maximum Width 144 (3658)

Longitudinal Pitch 0.17 (4.2)

Belt Strength lb/ft (kg/m) 3500 (5200) of belt width, based on high carbon steel at 70 (21)

Conveying Surface Overall belt width (0.5 one lateral pitch + 3 spiral wire diameters)

Mesh Type Compound balance weave with 3 connectors per spiral

Open Area Minimal

Edge Treatment Welded

Method of Drive Friction driven on flat faced terminal rolls

Minimum Terminal Roll Diameter in. (mm) 6.0 (152.4)

Maximum Temperature °F (°C) Carbon steel—Up to 1000 (538) Stainless steel—Up to 2050 (1121)

Notes Available Options

The CB3 baking band is a flexible baking Wire Controls
band that can easily traverse 6" terminal Baking bands are typically manufactured Ashworth recommends use of Ashworth Model
rolls most commonly used in tortilla ovens. from annealed high carbon steel round #1 or Model #2 Control System to prevent the
wire in standard gauge sizes. Stainless belt from contacting oven framework and to
steel and other steel alloys can be used keep the belt centered on the terminal drums.
if required.

Flattened Wire (F) can be specified for the

conveying surface if needed. Additionally,
Precision Ground Light Weight (PGLW)
can also be specified. This process results
in the flattest baking surface and is attained
by precision grinding of the surface after
the baking band has been manufacturer.
This option is limited to carbon steel bands
strAIght Products

54" (1370 mm) or less in width.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 167
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

uu Control Systems

Technical Specifications

Model # 1 Controls (Recommended) Model # 2 Controls

Number Horizontal Rolls 3, plus base frame None
Number of Vertical Rolls 4 4
Vertical Rolls Contact Surface 18.00 (457.2) 10.50 (266.7)
Belt Width Limit 60.00 (1525) N/A
Guide rolls vertically adjust to Guide rolls vertically adjust to
Wear Point Adjustability
new wear point new wear point
Choice of carbon steel or Choice of carbon steel or
Bearings
carbide Zero Wear (ZW) carbide Zero Wear (ZW)
Units Required per System 2 4
Mesh Suitability All woven wire mesh belts All woven wire mesh belts

Model # 1 controls Model # 2 controls

Available Options Location of Controls

Ashworth Controls are available with Locate the controls three band widths pri- Avoid locating the controls closer than two
customer specified carbon steel or carbide or to the terminal drums. If the system utiliz- band widths from a terminal drum. At this
Zero Wear (ZW) bearings. The featured es a snub roll with a significant arc of band point, the force to move the band becomes
merits of each type are listed below. contact (>45°), locate the control system high, reducing the life of the controls. A
three band widths prior to that roll. higher force to move the band also results
Carbon Steel in high pressure on the band edge, which
• For temperatures of up to 350°F (177°C) On conveyors with a length to width ratio can lead to weld failure. Locating the con-
• Working environment should be non-corrosive less than 9, but greater than 6 band widths, trol system too far from the terminal rolls will
• Requires regular lubrication divide the conveyor length by 3 to deter- decrease the effectiveness of the controls.
mine the best control locations.
strAIght Products

Carbide ZW
3x Band Take up
• For temperatures of up to 1000°F (538°C) Width
• Belt sustains minimal wear at
elevated temperatures Oven
• Does not require lubrication
• Manufactured from very hard material and
can shatter if subjected to a sharp blow
3x Band
Control Width
Drive Point (2)

168 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Control Systems

Control Clearance

A well-tracked band will have only light

contact with the controls, alternating in a
slow cycle from one side to the other.

Set control clearance as follows:

A. Gently pull on one end of the frame
containing four vertical rolls so that
one roll is pulled away from the belt
edge and the belt is in contact with the
remaining seven rolls.
B. Adjust the controls so that the gap C B
C A
between the belt edge and the roll is
0.36" to 0.63" (10 mm to 16 mm).
C. Skew upstream support rolls to balance
contact between both controls.

Lubrication Application Notes

Bearings Ashworth Control Systems are not intended
Ball bearings used in Ashworth carbon as guides to force the belt into position. Al-
steel controls are of an open variety, allow- though they do limit band side movement at
ing direct lubrication by a spray lubricant the terminals, the controls function primarily
suitable for the environment. Vertical roll as sensing devices to indicate problems as
faces have a hole at their lower end to al- they occur. During normal operation, con-
low access to the top of the bottom bear- trols should exert minimal force to maintain
ing. ZW bearings do not require lubrication. a straight belt path.

Pivot Points The rolls on Ashworth Control Systems are

All pivot points should be lubricated pe- hollow. These should not be replaced with
riodically with suitable oil. The lubricant solid rolls. Solid rolls are heavier and require
should be selected with the product in mind. increased contact force to rotate them. This
Lack of lubrication can result in seized piv- increased force could damage the edges
ot points, which will not allow the controls of the belt and could allow severe tracking
to properly divide any lateral band thrust problems to go undetected until irreversible
among the four rolls. belt and/or frame damage occurs.

strAIght Products

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 169
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

uu Balanced Weave Conveyor Belts

Technical Specifications Units

Material Stainless, carbon, and galvanized steels, high temperature alloys

Minimum Width Dependent on lateral pitch of mesh—see table below

Maximum Width in. (mm) 216.00 (5486.4)
Weight Dependent on mesh count and wire gauge
Allowable Tension Dependent on mesh count and wire gauge
Conveying Surface Full belt width
Opening Size (Based on mesh count) Maximum recommended opening is 75% of minimum product size
Friction driven on flat-faced drums or terminal rolls; minimum drum diam-
Method of Drive
eter is 180 divided by the second count/CB number, if applicable
Carbon steel: 1000 (538) Stainless steel: 2050 (1121) Inconel® 601:
Maximum Temperature °F (°C)
2200 (1204)

Available Options Minimum Belt Widths

Balanced Weave belts are composed of Lateral Pitch of Minimum Belt Width
Mesh in. (mm)
right and left-hand spirals joined by a single
crimped connector per spiral row. Edges of 12 3.00 (76.2)
the belt are welded. Mesh choice is nearly 18 2.00 (50.8)
unlimited and is dependent upon require- 24 1.50 (38.1)
ments of the application, including prod- 30 1.20 (30.5)
uct weight and support requirements, as
36 1.00 (25.4)
well as process temperature. These belts
are less dense than Compound Balanced 42 0.88 (22.4)
weave belts. 48 0.75 (19.1)
60 0.60 (15.2)
66 0.55 (14.0)
72 0.50 (12.7)
84 0.43 (10.9)
96 0.38 (9.7)
102 0.35 (8.9)
144 0.25 (6.4)
strAIght Products

[Figure 26]
[Figure 27]

170 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Balanced Weave Conveyor Belts

Balanced Weave Mesh—Possible Combinations

The following table represents stan- First Count No. of Spirals Second Count No. of Con- Connector Wire Gauge
Spiral Wire Gauge Options
dard mesh combination possibilities per 12” of Belt nectors per 12" of Belt Options
that can be used to construct bal- 12 4 to 14 7 to 12 4 to 14
anced weave belts. Additional com-
binations of spirals and connectors 18 10 to 14 12 to 17 10 to 14
are also possible. Contact Ashworth 24 12 to 17 12 to 27 12 to 16
Engineering for design assistance 30 10 to 18 14 to 30 10 to 18
with Balanced Weave belts.
36 10 to 20 10 to 38 8 to 19
42 12 to 20 12 to 41 10 to 18
48 12 to 18 24 to 57 8 to 18
60 12 to 20 20 to 62 14 to 20
66 18 48 17
72 16 to 20 24 to 75 13 to 20
84 16 to 24 20 to 84 14 to 24
96 18 to 20 73 to 96 18 to 20
102 18 to 20 24 to 78 14 to 18
144 22 96 to 105 20

Guard Edges Controls

Guard edges can be fabricated for balanced Relieved & Reinforced Turned-Up Ashworth recommends use of either
weave belts via two primary methods: Guard edges produced via relieved and Ashworth Model #1 or Model #2 Control
relieved and turned-up mesh or relieved and reinforced turned-up mesh (Figure 29) Systems with most balanced weave belts to
reinforced turned-up fabric. are similar to relieved and turned-up prevent the belt from coming in contact with
edge, but with the addition of hairpin the conveyor or oven framework and to keep
Relieved & Turned-Up reinforcements that are inserted into the the belt centered on the terminal drums.
With relieved and turned-up mesh(Figure disconnected spirals.
28), the guard edge is formed by turning A
up the belt edges from the carrying surface
and omitting connectors at prescribed
spacing to provide flexibility.

Section A-A
A
Relieved and reinforced turned-up fabric
Section A-A
A [Figure 29]
strAIght Products

Relieved and turned-up fabric

[Figure 28]

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 171
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

Balance Weave Specifications

Mesh Weight Wire Diameter Approximate Opening Area
Designation lb/ft² (kg/m²) in. (mm) in. (mm)

B 12-8-¼ 7.25 (35.40) 0.250 (6.35) 0.75x1.25 (19.05x31.75)

B 12-7-4 5.87 (28.66) 0.225 (5.72) 0.78x1.49 (19.81x37.85)

B 12-8-4 6.25 (30.52) 0.225 (5.72) 0.78x1.28 (19.81x32.51)

B 12-8-6 4.34 (21.19) 0.192 (4.88) 0.81x1.31 (20.57x33.27)

B 12-11-6 5.05 (24.66) 0.192 (4.88) 0.81x0.90 (20.57x22.86)

B 12-12-6 5.34 (26.07) 0.192 (4.88) 0.81x0.81 (20.57x20.57)

B 12-6-8 2.65 (12.94) 0.162 (4.11) 0.84x1.84 (21.34x46.74)

B 12-8-68 3.25 (15.87) 0.192/0.162 (4.88/4.12) 0.84x1.31 (21.34x33.27)

B 12-10-8 3.29 (16.06) 0.162 (4.11) 0.84x1.04 (21.34x26.42)

B 12-11-68 3.87 (18.89) 0.192/162 (4.88/4.12) 0.84x0.90 (21.34x22.86)

B 12-10-9 2.57 (12.55) 0.148 (3.76) 0.85x1.05 (21.59x26.67)

B 12-11-9 2.72 (13.28) 0.148 (3.76) 0.85x0.94 (21.59x23.88)

B 12-11-69 3.29 (16.06) 0.192/0.148 (4.88/3.76) 0.85x0.90 (21.59x22.86)

B 12-12-9 2.95 (14.40) 0.148 (3.76) 0.85x0.85 (21.59x21.59)

B 12-13-9 3.01 (14.70) 0.148 (3.76) 0.85x0.77 (21.59x19.56)

B-12-8-610 2.50 (12.21) 0.192/0.135 (4.88/.343) 0.87x1.31 (22.10x33.27)

B 12-9 ½-10 2.13 (10.40) 0.135 (3.43) 0.87x1.13 (22.10x28.70)

B 12-10-810 2.45 (11.96) 0.162/0.135 (4.12/.343) 0.87x1.04 (22.10x26.42)

B 12-12-10 2.40 (11.72) 0.135 (3.43) 0.87x0.87 (22.10x22.10)

B 12-10-11 1.69 (8.25) 0.120 (3.05) 0.88x1.08 (22.35x27.43)

B 12-9½-12 1.19 (5.81) 0.105 (2.67) 0.89x1.16 (22.61x29.46)

B 12-10-12 1.24 (6.05) 0.105 (2.67) 0.89x1.09 (22.61x27.69)

B 12-15-12 1.55 (7.57) 0.105 (2.67) 0.89x0.69 (22.61x17.53)

B 12-10-1214 0.85 (4.15) 0.105/0.080 (2.67/2.03) 0.92x1.09 (23.37x27.69)

B 12-11-14 0.73 (3.56) 0.080 (2.03) 0.92x1.01 (23.37x25.65)

B 12-15-1214 1.07 (5.22) 0.105/0.080 (2.67/2.03) 0.92x0.69 (23.37x17.53)

B 12-12-16 0.45 (2.20) 0.062 (1.57) 0.94x0.94 (23.88x23.88)

strAIght Products

B 18-10-4 8.73 (42.62) 0.225 (5.72) 0.44x0.97 (11.18x24.64)

B 18-11-46 6.82 (33.30) 0.225/0.192 (5.72/4.88) 0.48x0.87 (12.19x22.10)

172 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Balanced Weave Conveyor Belts

Balance Weave Specifications (cont.)

Mesh Weight Wire Diameter Approximate Opening Area
Designation lb/ft² (kg/m²) in. (mm) in. (mm)

B 18-11-6 6.45 (31.49) 0.192 (4.88) 0.48x0.90 (12.19x22.86)

B 18-12-8 4.41 (21.53) 0.162 (4.11) 0.51x0.84 (12.95x21.34)

B 18-18-8 5.53 (27) 0.162 (4.11) 0.51x0.51 (12.95x12.95)

B 18-10-9 3.44 (16.8) 0.148 (3.76) 0.52x1.05 (13.21x26.67)

B 18-18-9 4.39 (21.43) 0.148 (3.76) 0.52x0.52 (13.21x13.21)

B 18-9-810 3.10 (15.14) 0.162/0.135 (4.12/.343) 0.53x1.17 (13.46x29.72)

B 18-10-10 2.85 (13.91) 0.135 (3.43) 0.53x1.07 (13.46x27.18)

B 18-12-610 3.60 (17.58) 0.192/0.135 (4.88/.343) 0.53x0.81 (13.46x20.57)

B 18-16-10 3.39 (16.55) 0.135 (3.43) 0.53x0.62 (13.46x15.75)

B 18-17-810 3.96 (19.33) 0.162/0.135 (4.12/.343) 0.53x0.54 (13.46x13.72)

B 18-17-10 3.50 (17.09) 0.135 (3.43) 0.53x0.57 (13.46x14.48)

B 18-10-11 2.30 (11.23) 0.120 (3.05) 0.55x1.08 (13.97x27.43)

B 18-18-11 3.01 (14.7) 0.120 (3.05) 0.55x0.55 (13.97x13.97)

B 18-10-12 1.70 (8.3) 0.105 (2.67) 0.56x1.09 (14.22x27.69)

B 18-12-1012 2.18 (10.64) 0.135/0.105 (3.43/2.67) 0.56x0.87 (14.22x22.10)

B 36-10-10 5.75 (28.07) 0.135 (3.43) 0.20x1.07 (5.08x27.18)

B 36-20¼-10 10.44 (50.97) 0.250/0.135 (6.35/.343) 0.20x0.35 (5.08x8.89)

B 36-20-810 6.42 (31.35) 0.162/0.135 (4.12/.343) 0.20x0.44 (5.08x11.18)

B 36-20-10 6.15 (30.03) 0.135 (3.43) 0.20x0.47 (5.08x11.94)

B 36-20-11 5.13 (25.05) 0.120 (3.05) 0.21x0.48 (5.33x12.19)

B 36-8-912 3.13 (15.28) 0.148/0.105 (3.76/2.67) 0.23x1.35 (5.84x34.29)

B 36-15-1012 3.73 (18.21) 0.135/0.105 (3.43/2.67) 0.23x0.67 (5.84x17.02)

B 36-18-1012 4.06 (19.82) 0.135/0.105 (3.43/2.67) 0.23x0.53 (5.84x13.46)

B 36-20-1012 4.25 (20.75) 0.135/0.105 (3.43/2.67) 0.23x0.47 (5.84x11.94)

B 36-20-1112 4.10 (20.02) 0.120/0.105 (3.05/2.67) 0.23x0.48 (5.84x12.19)

B 36-20-12 3.80 (18.55) 0.105 (2.67) 0.23x0.49 (5.84x12.45)

B 36-28-12 5.17 (25.24) 0.105 (2.67) 0.23x0.32 (5.84x8.13)

B 36-30-1113 3.98 (19.43) 0.120/0.092 (3.05/2.34) 0.24x0.28 (6.10x7.11)

strAIght Products

B 36-20-1214 2.15 (10.5) 0.105/0.080 (2.67/2.03) 0.25x0.49 (6.35x12.45)

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 173
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

Balance Weave Specifications

Mesh Weight Wire Diameter Approximate Opening Area
Designation lb/ft² (kg/m²) in. (mm) in. (mm)

B 36-24-14 2.25 (10.99) 0.080 (2.03) 0.25x0.42 (6.35x10.67)

B 36-30-1214 2.76 (13.48) 0.105/0.080 (2.67/2.03) 0.25x0.30 (6.35x7.62)

B 36-34-14 2.58 (12.60) 0.080 (2.03) 0.25x0.27 (6.35x6.86)

B 36-38-14 2.95 (14.40) 0.080 (2.03) 0.25x0.24 (6.35x6.10)

B 36-41-14 3.00 (14.65) 0.080 (2.03) 0.25x0.21 (6.35x5.33)

B 36-51-14 3.38 (16.50) 0.080 (2.03) 0.25x0.16 (6.35x4.06)

B 36-24-15 1.71 (8.35) 0.072 (1.83) 0.26x0.43 (6.60x10.92)

B 36-34-15 2.15 (10.50) 0.072 (1.83) 0.26x0.28 (6.60x7.11)

B 36-30-16 1.44 (7.03) 0.062 (1.57) 0.27x0.33 (6.86x8.38)

B 36-32-16 1.50 (7.32) 0.062 (1.57) 0.27x0.31 (6.86x7.87)

B 36-34-1416 1.80 (8.79) 0.080/0.062 (2.03/1.57) 0.27x0.27 (6.86x6.86)

B 36-35-16 1.44 (7.03) 0.062 (1.57) 0.27x0.28 (6.86x7.11)

B 36-38-16 1.60 (7.81) 0.062 (1.57) 0.27x0.25 (6.86x6.35)

B 36-31-17 1.09 (5.32) 0.054 (1.37) 0.28x0.33 (7.11x8.38)

B 36-30-18 0.82 (4.00) 0.048 (1.22) 0.29x0.35 (7.37x8.89)

B 36-32-1618 1.00 (4.88) 0.062/0.048 (1.57/1.22) 0.29x0.31 (7.37x7.87)

B 36-36-18 0.89 (4.35) 0.048 (1.22) 0.29x0.29 (7.37x7.37)

B 36-32-19 0.64 (3.12) 0.041 (1.04) 0.29x0.33 (7.37x8.38)

B 36-32-20 0.46 (2.25) 0.035 (0.89) 0.31x0.34 (7.87x8.64)

B 42-18-1011 5.68 (27.73) 0.135/0.120 (3.43/3.05) 0.17x0.53 (4.32x13.46)

B 42-16-1012 4.45 (21.73) 0.135/0.105 (3.43/2.67) 0.18x0.62 (4.57x15.75)

B 42-18-1012 4.63 (22.61) 0.135/0.105 (3.43/2.67) 0.18x0.53 (4.57x13.46)

B 42-18-12 4.35 (21.24) 0.105 (2.67) 0.18x0.56 (4.57x14.22)

B 42-20-1012 5.10 (24.90) 0.135/0.105 (3.43/2.67) 0.18x0.47 (4.57x11.94)

B 42-24-12 4.74 (23.14) 0.105 (2.67) 0.18x0.40 (4.57x10.16)

B 42-30-1012 5.92 (28.90) 0.135/0.105 (3.43/2.67) 0.18x0.27 (4.57x6.86)

B 42-30-12 4.97 (24.27) 0.105 (2.67) 0.18x0.30 (4.57x7.62)

strAIght Products

B 42-18-14 2.25 (10.99) 0.080 (2.03) 0.21x0.59 (5.33x14.99)

B 42-24-14 2.63 (12.84) 0.080 (2.03) 0.21x0.42 (5.33x10.67)

174 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Balanced Weave Conveyor Belts

Balance Weave Specifications (cont.)

Mesh Weight Wire Diameter Approximate Opening Area
Designation lb/ft² (kg/m²) in. (mm) in. (mm)

B 42-27-1214 3.29 (16.06) 0.105/0.080 (2.67/2.03) 0.21x0.34 (5.33x8.64)

B 42-27-14 2.65 (12.94) 0.080 (2.03) 0.21x0.36 (5.33x9.14)

B 42-35-14 3.13 (15.28) 0.080 (2.03) 0.21x0.26 (5.33x6.60)

B 42-41-14 3.23 (15.77) 0.080 (2.03) 0.21x0.22 (5.33x5.59)

B 42-27-15 2.00 (9.76) 0.072 (1.83) 0.22x0.37 (5.59x9.40)

B 42-36-1415 2.59 (12.65) 0.080/0.072 (2.03/1.83) 0.22x0.25 (5.59x6.35)

B 42-41-15 2.68 (13.08) 0.072 (1.83) 0.22x0.22 (5.59x5.59)

B 42-24-16 1.55 (7.57) 0.062 (1.57) 0.22x0.44 (5.59x11.18)

B 42-27-1416 1.94 (9.47) 0.080/0.062 (2.03/1.57) 0.22x0.36 (5.59x9.14)

B 42-27-16 1.68 (8.20) 0.062 (1.57) 0.22x0.38 (5.59x9.65)

B 42-36-16 1.81 (8.84) 0.062 (1.57) 0.22x0.27 (5.59x6.86)

B 42-38-16 1.90 (9.28) 0.062 (1.57) 0.22x0.25 (5.59x6.35)

B 42-40-1416 2.25 (10.99) 0.080/0.062 (2.03/1.57) 0.22x0.22 (5.59x5.59)

B 42-43-16 1.94 (9.47) 0.062 (1.57) 0.22x0.22 (5.59x5.59)

B 42-38-17 1.37 (6.69) 0.054 (1.37) 0.23x0.26 (5.84x6.60)

B 42-37-18 1.03 (5.03) 0.048 (1.22) 0.24x0.27 (6.10x6.86)

B 48-26-14 3.18 (15.53) 0.080 (2.03) 0.17x0.38 (4.32x9.65)

B 48-38-14 3.46 (16.89) 0.080 (2.03) 0.17x0.24 (4.32x6.10)

B 48-41-14 3.52 (17.19) 0.080 (2.03) 0.17x0.22 (4.32x5.59)

B 48-47-14 4.25 (20.75) 0.080 (2.03) 0.17x0.18 (4.32x4.57)

B 48-26-15 2.25 (10.99) 0.072 (1.83) 0.18x0.39 (4.57x9.91)

B 48-38-15 2.84 (13.87) 0.072 (1.83) 0.18x0.24 (4.57x6.10)

B 48-32-16 1.75 (8.54) 0.062 (1.57) 0.19x0.31 (4.83x7.87)

B 48-36-16 1.83 (8.93) 0.062 (1.57) 0.19x0.27 (4.83x6.86)

B 48-48-16 2.45 (11.96) 0.062 (1.57) 0.19x0.19 (4.83x4.83)

B 48-51-16 2.50 (12.21) 0.062 (1.57) 0.19x0.17 (4.83x4.32)

B 48-55-16 2.56 (12.5) 0.062 (1.57) 0.19x0.16 (4.83x4.06)

B 48-48-17 1.65 (8.06) 0.054 (1.37) 0.20x0.20 (5.08x5.08)

strAIght Products

B 48-53-17 1.83 (8.93) 0.054 (1.37) 0.20x0.17 (5.08x4.32)

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 175
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

Balance Weave Specifications (cont.)

Mesh Weight Wire Diameter Approximate Opening Area
Designation lb/ft² (kg/m²) in. (mm) in. (mm)

B 48-24-18 0.91 (4.44) 0.048 (1.22) 0.20x0.45 (5.08x11.43)

B 48-36-18 1.03 (5.03) 0.048 (1.22) 0.20x0.29 (5.08x7.37)

B 48-49-18 1.21 (5.91) 0.048 (1.22) 0.20x0.20 (5.08x5.08)

B 48-52-18 1.26 (6.15) 0.048 (1.22) 0.20x0.18 (5.08x4.57)

B 48-50-19 0.94 (4.59) 0.041 (1.04) 0.21x0.20 (5.33x5.08)

B 48-44-20 0.56 (2.73) 0.035 (0.89) 0.22x0.24 (5.59x6.10)

B 48-48-20 0.61 (2.98) 0.035 (0.89) 0.22x0.22 (5.59x5.59)

B 48-51-1820 0.92 (4.49) 0.048/0.035 (1.22/0.89) 0.22x0.20 (5.59x5.08)

B 48-55-20 0.66 (3.22) 0.035 (0.89) 0.22x0.19 (5.59x4.83)

B 48-44-21 0.48 (2.34) 0.032 (0.81) 0.22x0.24 (5.59x6.10)

B 48-44-22 0.38 (1.86) 0.029 (0.74) 0.22x0.24 (5.59x6.10)

B 58-21-1214 3.64 (17.77) 0.105/0.080 (2.67/2.03) 0.13x0.47 (3.3x11.94)

B 60-22-14 3.25 (15.87) 0.080 (2.03) 0.12x0.47 (3.05x11.94)

B 60-24-1214 3.72 (18.16) 0.105/0.080 (2.67/2.03) 0.12x0.40 (3.05x10.16)

B 60-38-1214 5.21 (25.44) 0.105/0.080 (2.67/2.03) 0.12x0.21 (3.05x5.33)

B 60-38-14 4.10 (20.02) 0.080 (2.03) 0.12x0.24 (3.05x6.10)

B 60-40-1214 4.57 (22.31) 0.105/0.080 (2.67/2.03) 0.12x0.19 (3.05x4.83)

B 60-48-14 4.31 (21.04) 0.080 (2.03) 0.12x0.17 (3.05x4.32)

B 60-60-14 5.12 (25.00) 0.080 (2.03) 0.12x0.12 (3.05x3.05)

B 60-38-15 3.18 (15.53) 0.072 (1.83) 0.13x0.24 (3.3x6.10)

B 60-42-15 3.29 (16.06) 0.072 (1.83) 0.13x0.22 (3.3x5.59)

B 60-46-15 3.55 (17.33) 0.072 (1.83) 0.13x0.19 (3.3x4.83)

B 60-26-1416 2.13 (10.40) 0.080/0.062 (2.03/1.57) 0.14x0.63 (3.56x16)

B 60-36-16 2.12 (10.35) 0.062 (1.57) 0.14x0.27 (3.56x6.86)

B 60-38-16 2.28 (11.13) 0.062 (1.57) 0.14x0.24 (3.56x6.10)

B 60-42-16 2.49 (12.16) 0.062 (1.57) 0.14x0.22 (3.56x5.59)

B 60-46-1416 3.04 (14.84) 0.080/0.062 (2.03/1.57) 0.14x0.18 (3.56x4.57)

strAIght Products

B 60-48-1316 3.43 (16.75) 0.092/0.062 (2.34/1.57) 0.14x0.16 (3.56x4.06)

B 60-48-16 2.68 (13.08) 0.062 (1.57) 0.14x0.19 (3.56x4.83)

176 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Balanced Weave Conveyor Belts

Balance Weave Specifications (cont.)

Mesh Weight Wire Diameter Approximate Opening Area
Designation lb/ft² (kg/m²) in. (mm) in. (mm)

B 60-52-16 2.75 (13.43) 0.062 (1.57) 0.14x0.17 (3.56x4.32)

B 60-55-1416 3.22 (15.72) 0.080/0.062 (2.03/1.57) 0.14x0.14 (3.56x3.56)

B 60-55-16 2.82 (13.77) 0.062 (1.57) 0.14x0.16 (3.56x4.06)

B 60-37-18 1.30 (6.35) 0.048 (1.22) 0.15x0.27 (3.81x6.86)

B 60-52-18 1.50 (7.32) 0.048 (1.22) 0.15x0.18 (3.81x4.57)

B 60-60-18 1.60 (7.81) 0.048 (1.22) 0.15x0.15 (3.81x3.81)

B 60-62-18 1.65 (8.06) 0.048 (1.22) 0.15x0.15 (3.81x3.81)

B 60-60-19 1.13 (5.52) 0.041 (1.04) 0.16x0.16 (4.06x4.06)

B 60-55-22 0.47 (2.29) 0.029 (0.74) 0.17x0.19 (4.32x4.83)

B 60-54-23 0.37 (1.81) 0.026 (0.66) 0.18x0.2 (4.57x5.08)

B 72-60-15 4.68 (22.85) 0.072 (1.83) 0.09x0.13 (2.29x3.3)

B 72-24-16 2.35 (11.47) 0.062 (1.57) 0.1x0.44 (2.54x11.18)

B 72-48-16 2.83 (13.82) 0.062 (1.57) 0.1x0.19 (2.54x4.83)

B 72-55-16 3.32 (16.21) 0.062 (1.57) 0.1x0.16 (2.54x4.06)

B 72-56-16 3.40 (16.6) 0.062 (1.57) 0.1x0.15 (2.54x3.81)

B 72-57-1516 3.58 (17.48) 0.072/0.062 (1.83/1.57) 0.1x0.15 (2.54x3.81)

B 72-60-16 3.52 (17.19) 0.062 (1.57) 0.1x0.14 (2.54x3.56)

B 72-62-1416 4.38 (21.39) 0.080/0.062 (2.03/1.57) 0.1x0.11 (2.54x2.79)

B 72-64-1416 4.43 (21.63) 0.080/0.062 (2.03/1.57) 0.1x0.11 (2.54x2.79)

B 72-68-16 3.76 (18.36) 0.620 (15.75) 0.1x0.11 (2.54x2.79)

B 72-70-1316 4.77 (23.29) 0.092/0.062 (2.34/1.57) 0.1x0.08 (2.54x2.03)

B 72-72-16 3.80 (18.55) 0.062 (1.57) 0.1x0.1 (2.54x2.54)

B 72-52-17 2.37 (11.57) 0.054 (1.37) 0.11x0.18 (2.79x4.57)

B 72-60-17 2.50 (12.21) 0.054 (1.37) 0.11x0.15 (2.79x3.81)

B 72-80-17 2.84 (13.87) 0.054 (1.37) 0.11x0.1 (2.79x2.54)

B 72-57-18 1.78 (8.69) 0.048 (1.22) 0.12x0.16 (3.05x4.06)

B 72-68-18 1.83 (8.93) 0.048 (1.22) 0.12x0.13 (3.05x3.3)

B 72-72-18 2.01 (9.81) 0.048 (1.22) 0.12x0.12 (3.05x3.05)

strAIght Products

B 72-75-18 2.03 (9.91) 0.048 (1.22) 0.12x0.11 (3.05x2.79)

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 177
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

Balance Weave Specifications (cont.)

Mesh Weight Wire Diameter Approximate Opening Area
Designation lb/ft² (kg/m²) in. (mm) in. (mm)

B 72-72-19 1.51 (7.37) 0.041 (1.04) 0.13x0.13 (3.30x3.30)

B 72-62-20 0.84 (4.10) 0.035 (0.89) 0.13x0.16 (3.30x4.06)

B 72-68-20 0.93 (4.54) 0.035 (0.89) 0.13x0.14 (3.30x3.56)

B 72-72-20 1.00 (4.88) 0.035 (0.89) 0.13x0.13 (3.30x3.30)

B 72-68-21 0.86 (4.20) 0.032 (0.81) 0.13x0.15 (3.30x3.81)

B 72-48-22 0.49 (2.39) 0.029 (0.74) 0.14x0.22 (3.56x5.59)

B 72-62-2022 0.69 (3.37) 0.029 (0.74) 0.14x0.16 (3.56x4.06)

B 72-70-22 0.57 (2.78) 0.029 (0.74) 0.14x0.14 (3.56x3.56)

B 84-84-17 3.42 (16.70) 0.054 (1.37) 0.09x0.09 (2.29x2.29)

B 84-60-18 1.95 (9.52) 0.048 (1.22) 0.10x0.15 (2.54x3.81)

B 84-84-18 2.47 (12.06) 0.048 (1.22) 0.10x0.10 (2.54x2.54)

B 84-84-19 1.67 (8.15) 0.041 (1.04) 0.10x0.10 (2.54x2.54)

B 84-60-20 0.94 (4.59) 0.035 (0.89) 0.11x0.17 (2.79x4.32)

B 84-84-20 1.20 (5.86) 0.035 (0.89) 0.11x0.11 (2.79x2.79)

B 84-78-2021 1.06 (5.18) 0.032 (0.81) 0.11x0.12 (2.79x3.05)

B 84-84-21 0.93 (4.54) 0.032 (0.81) 0.11x0.11 (2.79x2.79)

B 84-81-22 0.74 (3.61) 0.029 (0.74) 0.11x0.12 (2.79x3.05)

B 84-84-22 0.76 (3.71) 0.029 (0.74) 0.11x0.11 (2.79x2.79)

B 96-84-20 1.24 (6.05) 0.035 (0.89) 0.09x0.11 (2.29x2.79)

B 96-84-21 1.09 (5.32) 0.032 (0.81) 0.09x0.11 (2.29x2.79)

B 96-48-22 0.76 (3.71) 0.029 (0.74) 0.10x0.22 (2.54x5.59)

B 96-84-22 0.91 (4.44) 0.029 (0.74) 0.10x0.11 (2.54x2.79)

B 100-156-22 1.23 (6.01) 0.029 (0.74) 0.09x0.05 (2.29x1.27)

B 144-89-2022 1.15 (5.61) 0.035/0.029 (0.89/0.74) 0.05x0.10 (1.27x2.54)

B 144-96-2022 1.27 (6.20) 0.035/0.029 (0.89/0.75) 0.05x0.09 (1.27x2.29)

B 144-105-2022 1.55 (7.57) 0.035/0.029 (0.89/0.76) 0.05x0.08 (1.27x2.03)

strAIght Products

178 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Balanced Weave Conveyor Belts

NOTES

strAIght Products

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 179
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

uu WG Woven Wire

WG Balanced Weave Units

Material Stainless steel, carbon, and galvanized steels, high temperature steel alloys
Minimum Width 40.6 (1.60)
mm (in)
Maximum Width 5486.4 (216.00)
Edge Treatment Welded edges
Weight Dependent on mesh count and wire gauge—see table
Maximum Allowable Tension Dependent on mesh count and wire gauge—see table
Conveying Surface Full belt width (1/2 of one lateral pitch + 3 spiral diameters)
Opening Size 40–70% depending on mesh count and wire size
Method of Drive Friction driven on flat-faced drums or terminal rolls
Maximum Temperature °C (°F) Up to 1100 (2012) dependent upon material

Available Options
WG Balanced Weave belts are composed Belt width
of right and left-hand spirals joined by a
connector rod. Edges are welded. The
mesh choice for WG belts is nearly un-
Longitudinal

limited and is dependent upon require-

pitch

ments of the application, including prod-

uct weight and support requirements, as
well as process temperature.

Thickness
Lateral pitch

Mesh Designation Driving/Return Drum Diameters

Due to their European heritage, WG belts 1.4 x 0.7 = Size of the spiral wire diameter in Driving drums should be of sufficient
are designated differently than woven wire mm; in this case the wire is flattened, so two diameter so as not to bend the belt’s mesh,
belts manufactured by Ashworth in the US. dimensions are used a situation that could result in irregular
Meshes for WG belts are designated as in elongation of the belt’s pitch. This can
the following example: 1.2 = Cross wire diameter in mm cause belt driving and control problems and
irreparably damage the belt.
WG 4.4/5 – 1.4 x 0.7 – 1.2
Drums should be sized according to the
strAIght Products

following guidelines:
Where:
Driving Drum:
W = Woven wire
G = Welded edges Diameter = Minimum of 20 times the
4.4 = Nominal longitudinal pitch of the belt belt’s longitudinal pitch
in mm Return Drum:
5 = Lateral pitch of the belt in mm
Diameter = Minimum of 10 times the
belt’s longitudinal pitch

180 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 WG Woven Wire

Standard Balance Weave Meshes

Nom. Belt (Spiral) Allowable Tension per Belt
Nom. Long. Pitch Nom. Lat. Pitch Belt Weight
Mesh Type Thickness Width
mm (in.) mm (in.) kg/m² (lb/ft²)
mm (in.) kN/m (lb/ft)
WG 4.4/4.4–1.4 x 0.7–1.2 5.4 (0.21) 4.4 (0.17) 4.1 (0.16) 10.2 (2.09) 22.0 (1507.48)
WG 4.4/4.4–1.4–1.4 5.2 (0.20) 4.4 (0.17) 5.9 (0.23) 17.0 (3.48) 35.0 (2398.26)
WG 4.5/3.1–1–1.2 4.1 (0.16) 3.0 (0.12) 4.6 (0.18) 10.9 (2.23) 25.0 (1713.04)
WG 5.1/4.2–1.6–1.6 4.9 (0.19) 4.2 (0.17) 6.4 (0.25) 22.5 (4.61) 48.0 (3289.04)
WG 6.0/6.2–1.2–1.6 6.4 (0.25) 6.2 (0.24) 5.7 (0.22) 8.9 (1.82) 18.0 (1233.39)
WG 8.5/6.4–1.6–1.6 9.1 (0.36) 6.4 (0.25) 7.3 (0.29) 11.5 (2.36) 31.0 (2124.17)
WG 10.0/6.5–1.2–2.0 9.9 (0.39) 6.5 (0.26) 6.2 (0.24) 7.4 (1.52) 17.0 (1164.87)
WG 10.0/6.5–1.4 x 1–2.0 9.9 (0.39) 6.5 (0.26) 5.7 (0.22) 8.7 (1.78) 22.0 (1507.48)
WG 10.0/10–2–2.5 12.2 (0.48) 10.0 (0.39) 8.9 (0.35) 14.4 (2.95) 31.0 (2124.17)
WG 12.0/12–3 x 2–3.0 14.8 (0.58) 12.0 (0.47) 10.3 (0.41) 22.0 (4.51) 50.0 (3426.09)
WG 13.5/8.4–2–2.5 14.0 (0.55) 8.4 (0.33) 10.8 (0.43) 13.7 (2.81) 37.0 (2535.31)
WG 13.5/8.4–3 x 1.5–3.1 12.9 (0.51) 8.4 (0.33) 8.6 (0.34) 21.5 (4.40) 54.0 (3700.18)
WG 15.0/15–2.5–2.8 16.7 (0.66) 15.0 (0.59) 10.8 (0.43) 12.9 (2.64) 33.0 (2261.22)
WG 16.0/6.35–1.2–1.6 15.3 (0.60) 6.4 (0.25) 6.3 (0.25) 5.0 (1.02) 18.0 (1233.39)
WG 16.8/8.4–2.6–3.1 15.9 (0.63) 8.4 (0.33) 11.8 (0.46) 22.0 (4.51) 63.0 (4316.87)
WG 19.1/9.5–1.1–1.4 19.2 (0.76) 9.5 (0.37) 6.8 (0.27) 2.7 (0.55) 10.0 (685.22)
WG 20.0/15–2.5–3.5 18.3 (0.72) 15.0 (0.59) 12.2 (0.48) 12.8 (2.62) 33.0 (2261.22)

Available Options
WG belts can be manufactured with flights (Figure 30) (dimensions available upon request) or as positive drive chain edge belts (Figure 31).
Standard chains are hollow pin, in 0.5″ (12.7 mm), 0.63″ (15.9 mm) or 1″ (25.4 mm) pitch.

H H

A B

CH
pitch
H H
strAIght Products

C D

[Figure 30] [Figure 31]

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 181
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

uu Lehr Belts

Technical Specifications Units

3% and 5% chrome steel, stainless steel, carbon steels, high temperature

Material
steel alloys
Minimum Width 1.00 (25.4)
Maximum Width 216.00 (5486.4)
in. (mm)
Lateral Pitch 0.33 (8.5)
Thickness 0.31 (7.9)
Working Strength per unit of width
lb/ft (kg/m) 2100 lb/ft (3132) based on 3% chromium steel at 70°F (21°C)
(Material Dependent)
Weight lb/ft² (kg/m²) 3.49 (17.1)
Conveying Surface Full belt width
Mesh Designation B36-20-12 or B36-20-1012F (optional)
Opening Size in. (mm) 0.21 x 0.47 (5.3 x 11.9)
Friction driven on flat-faced drums or terminal rolls; minimum drum
Method of Drive diameter equates to 180 divided by the second count number
Example: 180 / 20 = 9 (229)
Carbon steel: 1000 (538), 3% Chrome steel: 1300 (704),
Maximum Temperature °F (°C)
Stainless steel: 2050 (1121), Inconel® 601: 2200 (1204)

Belt Construction Controls

Lehr Belts are of balanced weave wire Ashworth recommends use of Ashworth
construction, consisting of alternating right Model #1 or Model #2 Control Systems to
and left-hand flattened spirals seated in prevent the belt from contacting oven frame-
crimped connector rods. The belt’s edges work and to keep the belt centered on the
are welded. terminal drums.

Mesh Options
Thickness Lateral Pitch Weight Opening Size (approx.) Working Strength*
Mesh Designation
in. (mm) in. (mm) lb/ft² (kg/m²) in. (mm) lb/ft (kg/m)

B36-20-1012F 0.34 (8.64) 0.33 (8.5) 4.59 (22.41) 0.23 x 0.47 (5.8 x 11.9) 2500 (3720)

B36-20-12 0.13 (7.14) 0.33 (8.5) 3.49 (17.08) 0.21 x 0.47 (5.3 x 11.9) 2100 (3132)
* Based on 3% chrome steel at 70°F (21°C). All belt ratings are factored for working temperature and material type.
strAIght Products

182 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

NOTES

strAIght Products

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 183
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

Mesh Diagrams - Baking Bands

CB5 Baking Band ®

MESH DIAGRAMS

CB3 Baking Band

184 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

Mesh Diagrams - Balanced Weave

B36-32-16

mesh diagrams

B42-36-18

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 185
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

Mesh Diagrams - Balanced Weave

B48-48-18 B60-38-14
MESH DIAGRAMS

B60-60-18 B72-32-16

186 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

Mesh Diagram - Balanced Weave

B72-60-16 B72-68-18

mesh diagrams

B96-84-20 B144-105-2022

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 187
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

Mesh Diagram - Lehr

True Seat Lehr (B36-20-12F)

MESH DIAGRAMS

B36-20-12

188 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

Friction Driven:
Straight-Running Belt Selection
& Engineering Calculations
Belt Tension Calculation for Straight-Running Belts
The belt tension calculation formula for straight-running belts is different from that for spiral or turn-curve belts,
as there is no system radius (R) factor to be considered. Although the tension calculation formula is basically
the same for all straight-running belts, there is considerable variation in the belt support options and, therefore,
in the coefficient of friction (fr). The general belt tension calculation formula for straight-running belts is:

T = (wLfr + WLfr + WH) x C

Straight Engineering
Where:
T = Belt tension in lb. (Newtons)
w = Weight of the belt in lb. per linear foot (kg per linear m)
W = Belt Weight + Product Weight in lb. per linear foot (kg per linear m)
L = Full length of conveyor, measured from center to center of the pulleys in feet (meters)
fr = Coefficient of Friction between the belt and belt supports
H = Rise of incline conveyor in feet (meters), (+ if incline,–if decline)
C = Force conversion factor
Imperial: 1.0
Metric: 9.8

Woven Wire Belts (Including Baking Bands)

In calculating the tension ratings for woven wire belts, including Ashworth Baking Bands, the general formula
for calculating tension for straight-running belts is used, except that the WH coefficient is typically not relevant
(equals 0) as these belts generally are not operated on inclines/declines.

Typical (fr) values used in woven wire belt applications are:

Types of Support Coefficient of Friction (fr) value

Free-turning rollers 0.10
Stainless steel 0.40
Carbon (mild) steel:
With temperature to 1000°F (538°C) 0.35
Between 1001 and 1200°F (538–649°C) 0.37
Between 1201 and 1400°F (649–760°C) 0.40
Between 1401 and 1600°F (760–871°C) 0.44

Once belt tension is calculated, the following formula is used to determine how much torque is required to
adequately drive the belt and its product load:

Torque Requirement (in units of Inch Pounds) = Belt Tension (T) x ½ Drum or Pulley Diameter in inches

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 189
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

Mesh Designation for

Woven Wire Belts
All woven wire belts manufactured by Ashworth are designated by mesh nomenclature as indicated below.
Exceptions to this designation are WG belts that are European specifications.

The woven wire mesh designation is a series of up to 12 letters and numbers as indicated in the example:

A A A-X X-YY-Z ZFF b

Straight Engineering

If present, indicates the type of surface treatment (e.g., Flat Wire or Precision Ground)
Wire gauge

The number of connectors (connecting rods) per 12" (305 mm) of belt length

The number of loops (spirals) per 12" (305 mm) of belt width

Type of weave: Unilateral, Balanced, Conventional, Compound

Balanced (CB) or Cleatrac® (CTB)

Type of Weave
Connector

U: Unilateral weave
belts contain either Loop or Spiral
right or left-hand spirals
(but not both) joined
by a single crimped
connector. (Figure 32) Left Hand Right Hand

[Figure 32]

B: Balanced weave belts

utilize alternating right
and left-hand spirals
joined with a single
crimped connector per
spiral row. (Figure 33)

[Figure 33] [Figure 34]

C: Conventional weave belts are made up of spirals of all one hand weave with each spiral turned into the
preceding one, forming a continuous fabric. (Figure 34)

CTB: Designates Ashworth Cleatrac® Belt and Sprocket System. “CT” indicates Cleatrac® belt and “B” indicates
that it is of balanced weave construction. Cleatrac® woven meshes are balanced weave meshes manufactured to
tighter specifications to ensure prompter engagement with the sprockets.

190 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

CB: Compound Balanced Weave belts consist of a tight nesting of right and left hand spirals which provide
a smooth, dense surface and the smallest mesh opening obtainable with any woven belt construction. The
mesh designation for Compound Balanced Weave indicates one of four different series designated CB2, CB3,
CB4, or CB5. The number following the letters CB specifies
the number of connectors that must be inserted to make
the belt endless or, conversely, removed to disassemble
the belt. Figure 35 depicts a CB5 mesh with the numbered

Straight Engineering
connectors being needed for to complete assembly or
disassembly of the belt.

Numerical Mesh Counts

[Figure 35]
Connectors:
The diagram indicates there are 3 connectors per inch (25.4 mm), so the connector count (YY) would be 36 (3 connectors x 12). As
indicated in the diagram, the initial connector where the end of the ruler is placed is not counted.

Loops:
Woven wire mesh counts There are 7 loops per 2" (50.8 mm),
so the loop count (XX) would be 42
are designated by three sets (7 loops x 6). Care should be taken
of numbers that follow the to count complete loops. A complete
weave type prefix. loop starts at one connector,
encircles the next connector, and
returns to the original connector.
First Count: the first set of
numbers after the weave [Figure 36]
type prefix is the mesh lateral pitch or loop count, and this number indicates the number of loops in a spiral
measured in 12 inches of belt length. Figure 36 illustrates a balanced weave mesh with a 42 first count.

Second Count: the second set of numbers is the mesh longitudinal pitch, and this number indicates the number
of connector or spirals measured in 12 inches of belt length. Figure 33 illustrates a balanced weave mesh with a
36 second or middle count.

Third count: the third set of numbers represents the wire gauge of the connector and spiral components per the
American Steel and Wire Co. gauge sizes. Both components are made of the same gauge when one size is
given. Many constructions are fabricated with a heavier gauge connector to increase belt strength. With these
meshes, the first number or pair of numbers designates the gauge of the connector; the last number or pair of
numbers designates the gauge of the spiral.

Surface Treatment
b: In certain cases a suffix will be added to the basic mesh designation. There are two possible suffixes:

F: Indicates that Flattened wire is used in construction of the spirals.

PGLW: Precision Ground Light Weight indicates that the surface of an open mesh band is flattened by
precision grinding the surface after manufacture. This feature is limited to carbon steel belts 54" or less in
width.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 191
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

Baking Band
Installation & Tracking
Proper Installation of Baking Bands

Proper installation of baking bands is essential to long life and low maintenance. To install the belt it can be either pulled
into the oven attached to the old belt or using a rope and bridle system. When manufactured, the belt is tested for waver
in lengths up to 200 feet. The belt is then broken into either 25 or 50 foot rolls and tagged in sequence. Each roll of belt
must be installed in sequence in acordance with the numbered tags attached to each belt. If the rolls are installed in
the oven out of sequence, the belt will not track properly and will be permanently damaged.
Straight Engineering

The installation begins with aligning the terminal rolls to be level, parallel to each other and perpendicular to the oven
centerline. Failure to complete this crucial step will shorten the belt life and require constant monitoring of the system.
With both terminal rolls aligned, position all snub rolls to be parallel to the terminal rolls and insure they are level using
the terminal rolls as reference. These rolls are very important and can permanently damage the band in a short time if
improperly adjusted. Sometimes a “steering roll” is used for the rolls nearest the terminal rolls. While they can have a
significant influence on the side travel of the band, they must not be used for this purpose. When trying to control side
travel with a snub roll, non-uniform tension is applied and uneven sag across the belt width results. It is recommended
once the terminal and snub rolls are aligned, they are not moved out of parallel.

Roller supports are recommended on both the loaded and return path and they should be mounted with external bearings.
External bearings allow for adjustment of the rollers to tune the bet path through the oven. Of course, the support rollers
should be level and free turning. Tracking of the band is very simple if sufficient adjustment is available. Actual tracking
of the band should be performed under production conditions.

Tracking

Determining the Band’s Path

Start the band at low speed. The band path will stabilize after three or four cycles. Position observers at essential
locations to insure the band is not damaged during these first cycles.
(Chamber Width–Band Width) / 2
To adjust the band’s path, adjust only the support rolls by skewing them in the
horizontal plane. Do not skew or cock the terminals or other major rolls to track the
band. Alignment of the terminal drums and other major rolls ensures equal tension Band
across the bandwidth, and moving the supports does not affect this balance. Ideally,
the band center line will also be the oven centerline.

To determine the correct band placement (Figure 37) on the load path, first measure
the oven chamber width, subtract the band width, and divide by two. This value is the
desired distance between the band edge and the oven wall through the load path.

For the band’s return path, measure the oven frame width and subtract the band’s
width. Half of this value is the desired distance between the band edge and the oven
(Frame Width–Band Width) / 2
wall through the return path. In aligning the band through the oven, measure band
position every 10' to 15' (3 m to 4 m).
[Figure 37]
Band tracking will change as the oven is brought up to temperature. Start tracking while the band is cold and make
adjustments to the rollers until it is running straight. Then, heat the band. Make the final adjustments to the rollers when
the band is at baking temperature. Additional tracking adjustments may be needed when product is introduced.

Adjusting the Roller Supports

A roller that is exactly perpendicular to the band’s path exerts no lateral influence on the band, because a band

192 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

approaching a free turning roll will attempt to leave that roll at 90° to its axis. Therefore, to change the direction of
the band, the sides of the rollers must be adjusted forward or back so that they are no longer perpendicular to the
band (move the rollers as if steering a bicycle).

Keep in mind that the surface of the belt that will carry product will move in the opposite direction of the belt as
it goes through its return path. After each adjustment, the band will take about three cycles to re-stabilize. It is
advisable to make tracking corrections several band widths before the trouble spot (Figure 38). Moving several

Straight Engineering
rollers a small amount is recommended over moving one roller a greater amount.

While making adjustments, keep in mind that expansion of the oven frame may bind a roller at baking temperature.
Rollers with frozen bearings have the opposite effect as the free turning roll. Consider the direction of oven
expansion when setting roller positions.

Ovens with Lateral Skid Bars in Place of Rollers

Skid bars have the opposite effect on band direction
as compared to free turning rollers. Since lateral skid
bars have no adjustment, the use of controls systems
is necessary because they provide the only available
method to keep the band in position.

Conditioning After Installation & Alignment Upstream Roll

Correction (First Try) Problem Location
Most mesh belts are woven with carbon steel wire. [Figure 38]
The wire is received from the manufacturer with a
protective coating of oil. An emulsifiable lubricant is used during the forming of the spirals. Welding of the band
edges burns off the oil and lubricants in this area. Band oven oil or vegetable oil is applied to the belt after welding
as a rust preventative prior to shipping and/or storage. After the band is installed and aligned, the oils that were
applied during manufacture of the band should be burned off prior to placing the band into production. These oils
are normally burned off when the oven is operated at several hundred degrees Fahrenheit (or Celsius). “Burn
off” may last up to an hour depending on the amount of oil on the band and the oven temperature. During this
procedure, ensure that all exhaust fans are turned on and all employees are notified of the burn off taking place,
as considerable amounts of smoke may be generated.

A heavy board wrapped in multiple layers of clean cloth and laid across the band can be used at the discharge end
of the oven to wipe off the band surface. This board can be applied anytime during burn off depending on whether
the customer prefers to burn or wipe off the majority of the oil. Maximum effectiveness of the wiping action occurs
when the board is rotated periodically to expose a clean surface. When the cloth remains clean during continued
running, the band is sufficiently clean to begin production. It is not necessary to re-oil the band before baking.

CAUTION: If the oven is equipped with a band brush, it is suggested that it not be used during burn off to avoid
gumming the bristles with oil.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 193
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

Baking Band Tracking,

Conditioning, & Inspection
Inspection
The baking band, oven, and other associated components should be inspected at regular intervals for correct
operation and possible equipment or processing defects according to the following checklist:

Band Control Systems

 Contains no product debris  Free turning
Straight Engineering

 Equal tension across its full width  Bearings are in good condition
 Equal edge sag on both sides of the band  Bearings have been lubricated (if applicable)
 No broken welds  Roll faces are in good condition
 No curl along belt edges  Rolls are free-pivoting
 No broken wires  Proper clearance exists between controls and belt
 Not out of crimp  Controls are located in the proper location
 Not discolored
 Product load is evenly distributed Roller Supports
 Free turning
Oven  Exhibit concentric rotation
 Produces equal heat distribution across full belt width  No flat spots
 All vents are operating properly to prevent “zonal”  Shaft is not broken
heat build-up  Properly adjusted
 All oven doors are shut; if doors must be opened,  Level
open an equal number of doors on both sides of oven
Take-Up
Band Path  Air pressure setting is correct
 No obstructions  Equal air pressure in both cylinders
 Not contacting framework  Adequate free travel
 Not overhanging any rollers  Equal travel on both sides
 Not passing under any rollers  Tracks are clean
 Does not waver through oven
 Does not waver at terminal drums Slider Supports
 Light contact with the controls  Level
 All limit switches are properly located  Securely fastened to the frame
 Cleaning brush is not binding  Smooth transition between joints
 Not warped or damaged
Terminals & Major Rolls  No product debris
 “Flat-faced” (not crowned)
 Parallel to each other and perpendicular to the belt
 No build-up of product debris
 Shaft is not broken
 No objects between belt and drum

194 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

Baking Band Cleaning

Regular Inspection, Maintenance, & Cleaning
The key to maintaining a clean band is to prevent the build-up of deposits so that they can be easily removed.
This is only accomplished by establishing the cleaning techniques and intervals at an early stage. It should
then become part of the routine maintenance program.

Bands that are used to bake sweet goods require close monitoring and periodic cleaning. Brushing is seldom
adequate to remove debris. Left unchecked, shortening, sugar, and other product debris fill the voids in the mesh,

Straight Engineering
form solid deposits, and begin to exert pressure on the spiral wires from the inside out. This bending force on
the spiral wires as the mesh flexes around the terminal drums is unnatural and results in fatigue breaks. Broken
wires then encounter the take-off blade, often resulting in blade damage or, worse, product contamination.

If the products leave debris in the band, it is important to ascertain the rate of build up so that an appropriate
cleaning interval can be established. Hard products such as crackers or dog biscuits seldom pose problems.
The rotating brush usually supplied by the oven builder will keep the mesh clear of any product debris.
Inspection and cleaning at regular intervals is the key to long band life.

Removing Solid Deposits

The most efficient cleaning procedure to remove deposits in the band is to raise the temperature of the baking
band to about 800°–900°F (400°–480°C) and carbonize the debris, allowing it to break up and fall out. Since
most ovens do not operate at these temperatures, auxiliary burners can be added at a convenient location to
provide even heat distribution over the entire moving bandwidth.

It is important to monitor the band temperature. A temperature of 900°F (480°C) produces a very dark color
in carbon steel, which is barely visible in poor light. If the band becomes a dark or dull cherry red, the band
temperature is far too high. Use the lowest temperature that works for your product. Higher temperatures will
damage the band and increase the danger of fire.

Removing Soft Accumulation

Soft accumulation can be removed by cleaning the band with an industrial cleaning agent. Provisions for
drains must be made for this method of cleaning. After cleaning, use sufficient heat to completely dry the
band. After cleaning, the band must be oiled to prevent corrosion.

CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY WATER TO A BAND AT HIGH TEMPERATURES,

AS IRREPARABLE DISTORTION COULD OCCUR.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 195
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

Troubleshooting—Baking Bands
Unequal Edge Sag—Ashworth recommends that the difference in sag between a baking band’s two edges be
no greater than 0.03" (0.79 mm).

Causes of unequal edge sag include:

• Unequal tension across the band width
• Conveyor misalignment
• Temperature variation across the band width
Straight Engineering

Correcting a Stretched Edge

Once a band becomes elongated on one edge, little
can be done unless it is caught early. A quick fix while
awaiting a new band is to flip alternating sections of the x2
belt to equalize the elongation.

If successful, it is only temporary as it results in a belt with

loose edges and a tight middle. Finding and correcting A
x1
2
the cause of the problem and then replacing the band is A
the most economical long-term solution.

Excessive Side Pressure

During normal operation, controls should exert zero or minimal force to maintain a straight belt path. If the belt
tends to run against one set of controls, grip the top of the rotating vertical roll with your thumb and forefinger
and try to stop it. If the roll cannot be stopped from rotating with finger pressure, then the belt is not tracking
correctly and should be inspected to find the source of the problem.

Possible causes include, but are not limited to:

• Binding or frozen rollers and/or supports
• Broken shaft on a roller support, snub roll, or bend roll
• Damaged slider rails
• Cocked terminal roll, snub roll, or bend roll

Band Vibration
Excessive vibration of oven bands is a rare problem but, when it occurs, the cause and cure are seldom
obvious. The most frequent symptom of excessive vibration is the disorientation of product to the point of it
spilling off the band edge, creating the opportunity for oven fires.

Band Related Vibration Factors:

Band Weight
Greater band weight generally equates to a lower fundamental frequency of vibration, which means that, all
else being equal, a heavier band is less likely to cause excessive vibration than a lighter band.

Spiral Pitch & Shape

The longer the spiral pitch, the greater the possibility of excessive vibration. The smooth, compact surfaces
of the Compound Balanced Weave meshes are very conducive to reducing vibration. For even less vibration,
operate a Precision Ground Light Weight (PGLW) belt with the smooth side down. Balanced Weave mesh
with an ordinary oval spirals could be a vibration producer; the flatter and more compact the surface, the less
probability of excessive vibration.

196 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

Non-Uniform Band Tension & Wear

When one band edge is loose in comparison to the other, there is usually one zone across the band width that
will result in excessive vibration. In addition, this condition will cause a sag in one side of the belt, allowing the
product to slide downhill, causing spillage from the belt.

Oven Related Vibration Factors:

Straight Engineering
Vibrating Framework & Unbalanced Equipment
These vibrations are readily apparent by their low frequency. Only severe cases would affect the band itself.

Belt Drive
Avoid long pitch chains on small diameter sprockets. Speed change from the chain chordal action would produce
a band surging motion.

Support Roll Spacing

Evenly spaced support rolls, where the center-to-center distance between rolls and the spiral pitch are multiples
of each other, will produce vibrations.

This phenomenon can best be described by analogy. Assume a car with a wheelbase of 4' (1.22 m) is traveling
a section of road, which has speed bumps on 1' (0.3 m) centers.

As the car travels, the wheels will always be either on top of Natural Vibration
the speed bumps or between them; therefore the driver will
experience a rise and fall relative to the ground (or achieve
a natural vibration—Figure 39). If the driver is not wearing
a seat belt and the forward speed is great enough, he may
be thrown from the vehicle. The same is true of conveyor [Figure 39]
belts. To prevent product from being thrown from a belt
(dampened vibration—Figure 40), the support rolls (the
speed bumps) need to spread out to dampen the natural Dampened Vibration
frequency of the belt.

As with the car, the distance between the support rolls

should not be divisible by the belt pitch. This prevents the
spirals from being either up or down at the same relative [Figure 40]
time, thus dampening the vibration.

Friction Drag
Support bars, non-rotating rollers, or badly tracking bands contacting the oven’s frame can produce vibration.
A significant difference between static and dynamic coefficients of friction can produce “stick/slip,” resulting in
surging and vibration.

Eccentric Rolls
Long-term wear or build-up of product forms eccentric rolls which are recognized as a primary source of band vibration.

Small Support Roll Diameters

Small support roll diameters coupled with the specific pitch and shape of the spiral can be another source of vibration.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 197
 Straight Running Belts: Friction Driven

Troubleshooting—Baking Bands
Operating Related Vibration Factors:
The opportunity to vary operating factors to solve vibration issues is often limited by the oven settings required
for the product.

Band Speed
Band speed determines the frequency of both band and roll induced disturbing forces. Sometimes a change in
Straight Engineering

speed will sufficiently reduce vibration to acceptable levels. However, there is also the possibility the vibration
may merely move to another location.

Take-Up Tension
Take-up tension will affect the vibration frequency. Varying the tension may help but, as with speed, the
vibration may move elsewhere in the band.

Oven Temperature
Temperature should not affect the band other than by altering band tension or friction characteristics.

Band Tracking
Band tracking is a reflection of the condition and alignment of the terminal drums, all major and minor rolls, belt
supports, and the take-up.

“Hot Spots” on the Band

Possible causes of hot spots on a baking band include:
• Oven burners that fail to supply even heat across the entire band width.
• Air circulation within the oven is not adequate.
• Product configuration on the band is uneven (products serve as insulation).
• Burners under the band (example: pre-heat burners in the return path) may cause heat to build up under
the band. This heat can only escape where product is not on the band, which is often only along the band’s
edges. This will heat the band’s edges more because the product is effectively insulating the rest of the band.

Efforts to cool the edges of a baking band with water can result in irreparable band damage. Ashworth does not
recommend this practice. The normal quenching procedure involves the use of oil, as oil allows some control
over the cooling rate. Quenching with water is most severe and will produce stress fractures within the grain
boundaries of the material. Once these fractures are created, any side pressure on the band may cause the
band to fracture (crack) along the quenched zone. Build-up of the product on any support roll that causes the
band to flex may also lead to broken wires in the area of the quench. Instead of quenching the band, determine
the cause of the hot spots and work to remedy the situation.

198 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Straight Running Belts

DESIGN DATA SHEETS

Straight Run
Design/Data Sheets
Design Assistance
Ashworth’s experts are available to assist you in evaluating a new spiral or conveyor application as well as to
recommend a new belt for your specific criteria. As an Ashworth customer, you will always be up-to-date on the
latest belt technologies available improve production and lower operational costs.

For further information or to consult with an Ashworth Application Specialist, contact us at:
Toll-Free Phone: 800-682-4594
Phone: 540-662-3494
E-mail: [email protected]

Submitting Data Sheets

To submit a data sheet online, go to www.ashworth.com, click on “Submit a Design/Data Sheet,” and complete
the online form.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 199
 Straight Running Belts
DESIGN DATA SHEETS
Straight Run

200 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Straight Running Belts

DESIGN DATA SHEETS

Straight Run
Remarks:

Sketch: Please provide dimensions on appropriate layout (include units):

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 201
 Conveyor Design

Guidelines for Proper Operation

of Ashworth Belting
design guidelines

Analysis of service requirements of the particular application is required

to determine the best belt design and material selection for optimum
performance. Correct belt selection means longer life and lower maintenance.
Belt performance is directly related to the condition, setup, and maintenance
of the conveyor. For this reason, we send our Service Technicians all over the
world to supervise installations. The value of this service is well recognized.
This document is to be used as a guide only and is not intended to replace our
trained and skilled personnel.
NOTE: Use proper safety equipment, including face and eye protection, as mandated by your company’s safety policy.
CAUTION: Due to the large openings in some of the belts there is a risk that operators’ fingers or clothing may become
caught in belt. Appropriate guards and safeties need to be considered.

STRAIGHT-RUN CONVEYORS
TENSION CALCULATIONS
In making belt selections or determining whether the selected belt is suitable for the application, we must
determine the tension. For positive-drive conveyors operating at less than 1000°F, the tension in the belt is
typically highest at the drive. Consequently, the tension is zero just after the belt leaves the drive sprockets.
After the belt leaves the drive, the tension increases along the return path and on the load path. The amount
of tension that is built-up through the conveyor paths can be estimated from the formulas below. Ashworth
recommends that only minimal additional tension be added to the belt in the take-up. Typically, a catenary sag
is sufficient to provide enough initial tension in order for the belt to operate. The formulas below are based on
the assumption that minimal force has been added in the take-up.

Tension of Simple Flat Conveyors:

For simple conveyors with a discharge end drive operating at room temperature, belt tension can be calcu-
lated from the following formula:

T = wLfr + WLfl

Where: T = Belt Tension, lb/ft of belt width. (Newtons/m of belt width)

w = Belt Weight, lb/ft² (kg/m²)
W = Weight of Product AND Belt, lb/ft² (kg/m²)
L = Conveyor Length (center to center of pulleys), feet (meters)
fl = Coefficient of Friction between the belt and belt supports on the load path (dimensionless)
fr = Coefficient of Friction between the belt and belt supports on the return path (dimensionless)

If using Metric units, multiply resultant by 9.8 to convert to Newtons.

202 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Conveyor Design

Example—Straight-Run Conveyor:
Assume a 100 foot long, level conveyor with drive on the
discharge end. Process is cooling pastries at room tempera-
ture. Load is 5.0 lb/ft² on UHMWPE-capped belt support rails.
Selected belt type is a 48 inch wide true ½ x ½ Flat Wire.

T = wLfr + WLfl

Design Guidelines
T = Belt Tension, lb/ft of belt width. (Newtons/m of belt width)
w = belt weight of an Ashworth A5 = 3.03 lb/ft²
L = conveyor length = 100 feet
fr = friction between belt and supports on return path = 0.35
W = total weight of belt and product = 3.03 + 5.0 = 8.03 lb/ft²
fl = friction between belt and supports on load path = 0.35

T = 3.03 (100) 0.35 + 8.03 (100) 0.35

= 387.1 lb/foot of width

From the Flat Wire Technical Bulletin, the allowable Tension for an A5 is 500 lb. foot of width; therefore,
Selected belt is strong enough.

Total Belt Tension:

To determine the total tension at the drive in order to size drive components, multiply the resultant tension by
the belt width in feet:

Tt = T x BW
Where: BW = Belt Width, ft. (meters)

In the preceding example, for a 48” wide belt,

Tt = 387.1 x 4.0 = 1548.4 lb/linear foot

Tension of Simple Incline Conveyors:

For simple incline conveyors with a discharge end drive operating at room temperature, belt tension can be
calculated as before but an allowance for pulling the belt up the incline must be added. Note: The reduction of
tension due to the weight of the conveyor belt going downhill on the return side usually can be neglected and
is omitted from the inclined conveyor formula. The formula changes to:

T = wLfr + WLfl + WH
Where: H = Rise of incline conveyor, feet (meters)

Example—Incline Conveyor:
From the previous example, assume the conveyor had a
four foot rise.
T = wLfr + WLfl + WH
H = Incline = 4.0 ft.
T = 3.03 (100) 0.35 + 8.03 (100) 0.35 + (8.03)(4)
= 419.2 lb/foot of width

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 203
 Conveyor Design

Tension of Conveyors with Multiple Segments

To obtain the tension for more complex conveyor layouts, such as shown below, the tension in each segment
on both the load and return paths must be summed together:
design guidelines

T = (wLr1fr1 + wLr2fr2+ wLr3fr3) + (WL1f1 +WL2f2 + WL3f3) + WH

Where: Lr1 = length of segment 1 on return path… etc.

fr1 = friction of segment 1 on return path… etc.
L1 = length of segment 1 on load path… etc.
f1 = friction of segment 1 on load path… etc.

If the belt support material is the same for all segments, the
formula reduces to:

T = wf(Lr1 + Lr2 + Lr2) + Wf(L1 + L2 + L2) + WH

Tension of Accumulating Conveyors

Belt tension in an accumulating conveyor is equal to the tension in the system plus the additional tension cre-
ated when the belt slips under the product.

Ta = T + WlLafp

Where: Ta = Belt tension of an accumulating conveyor,

lb/ft of belt width. (Newtons/m of belt width)
Wl = Weight of product, lb/ft² (kg/m²)
La = Length of accumulation, ft. (m)
fp = Coefficient of friction between belt and
product (dimensionless)

If using Metric units, multiply resultant tension by 9.8 to convert to Newtons.

204 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Conveyor Design

Turn Curve Calculations 2

3, 3R
4
Turn curve belts allow for complex conveyor layouts with a single
belt, thereby eliminating the need for transfers while maintaining
product orientation. Ashworth turn curve belts include the Omni-
Pro®, Advantage™, Omni-Grid®, and Omni-Flex® families of belts. 2R & 3R refer to the
tension at the beginning
Typically, the inside edge of a belt collapses when entering a turn and end points of the 2, 2R
while the outside edge remains at a constant pitch. As a result, all turn in the return path

Design Guidelines
(under the conveyor)
of the belt tension is concentrated on the outside belt edge. Since
the load is not shared across the belt width, the allowable tension is 1

generally quite lower than in a straight-run condition.

However, in a turn curve application, the tension in the belt is con-
centrated at a single point through the turn. 1
[Figure 41]
Radial pressure of the belt against a fixed turn rail (see Figure 41) creates considerable belt tension due to
sliding friction.
The key to maintaining low tension is making the inside radius as small as allowable for the given belt type,
and providing a low friction material on the inside rail.
Inside turn rails provide an acceptable and common means of retaining turn curve belts in a curved path. To
reduce wear and friction to acceptable levels, a replaceable wear strip should be used. The material must
have resiliency and good abrasion resistance. The lowest possible friction between belt edge and wear strip is
desirable and provision should be made for lubrication wherever feasible. A minimal amount of lubricant, com-
patible with the product and process, is all that is required. A commonly used material is Ultra High Molecular
Weight Polyethylene (UHMWPE).
The drag created by sliding friction in a turn can be greatly reduced by the use of a rotating wheel or Ash-
worth powered turn Edge Drive unit (refer to Technical Product Bulletin “052 Edge Drives” for further informa-
tion). Increased load carrying capacity and longer belt life are two important benefits.

Turn Ratio
In designing turn curve applications, the Turn Ratio (TR) is critical. The minimum turn ratio of each belt is used
to determine the minimum inside turn radius. Consult Product Technical Bulletins to obtain the minimum turn
ratio of specific belts.

IR = TR x BW

Where: IR = Inside Radius of turn

TR = Turn Ratio
BW = Belt Width

Turn Curve Tension Limitations

All of the basic Ashworth turn curve belts (Omni-Pro®, Omni-Grid®, Omni-Flex®, Small Radius Omni-Grid®,
Small Radius Omni-Flex®, Reduced Radius Omni-Grid®, and Advantage™ Series) collapse on the inside edge
to negotiate a turn. This places the full belt tension on the outside edge, or on the middle links in the case of
the Small Radius belts. The Space Saver Omni-Grid® belts do not collapse on the inside belt edge but expand
on the outside belt edge to negotiate a turn. In this case, the tension is concentrated on the second row of
links. For all belts, this concentrated stress, if excessive, can cause fatigue failure of the belt components. This
is the principal limitation of these belts, as the critical stress is considerably below the actual belt strength in
the straight condition.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 205
 Conveyor Design

Tension Calculations—Turns
For a fixed inside rail, tension increases through a turn. This increase is calculated from by the following formula:

T2 = T1(a) + b(fs)(R)(Wb + W1)

design guidelines

Where: T2 = Tension at the turn exit, lb. (N)

T1 = Tension at the turn entrance in lb. (N)
a = Turn factor (see below)
b = Turn factor (see below)
fs = Coefficient of friction between belt and belt supports
R = Radius of turn to the tension link*, feet (M)
Wb = weight of belt, lb/linear ft. (kg/M)
W1 = weight of product load, lb/linear ft. (kg/M)

If using Metric units (kg, M, etc.) multiply resultant tension x 9.8 to convert to Newtons.
*Refer to Product Technical Bulletin on specific belt; R is usually the radius to the outside edge of the belt.

Turn Factors
Turn factors a and b can be calculated from the following formulas.

a = eθfr

b = (a – 1)/fr

Where: e = 2.718 (Napierian log base)

θ = Angle of turn in radians (degrees/57.3)
fr = Coefficient of friction for the inside turn rail surface

206 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Conveyor Design

Turn Factors
Degree of Inside Turn Rail Coefficient of Friction, fr
Turn 0.15 0.20 0.25
a b a b a b
10 1.03 0.20 1.04 0.20 1.04 0.16
15 1.04 0.27 1.05 0.27 1.07 0.27

Design Guidelines
20 1.05 0.33 1.07 0.35 1.09 0.36
30 1.08 0.53 1.11 0.55 1.14 0.56
40 1.11 0.73 1.15 0.75 1.19 0.77
50 1.13 0.87 1.17 0.85 1.22 0.88
60 1.14 0.93 1.19 0.95 1.24 0.96
70 1.20 1.33 1.28 1.38 1.36 1.43
80 1.23 1.53 1.32 1.61 1.42 1.67
90 1.27 1.80 1.37 1.85 1.48 1.92
100 1.30 2.00 1.42 2.09 1.55 2.19
110 1.33 2.20 1.47 2.34 1.62 2.46
120 1.37 2.46 1.52 2.60 1.69 2.76
130 1.41 2.73 1.57 2.87 1.76 3.05
140 1.44 2.93 1.63 3.15 1.84 3.36
150 1.48 3.21 1.69 3.44 1.92 3.70
160 1.52 3.47 1.75 3.75 2.02 4.08
170 1.56 3.73 1.81 4.06 2.10 4.40
180 1.60 4.00 1.88 4.38 2.19 4.76
190 1.64 4.27 1.94 4.70 2.28 5.12
200 1.69 4.60 2.01 5.05 2.39 5.66

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 207
 Conveyor Design

Example: 90-degree Turn Conveyor

2
Assume belt is driven on the discharge end and employs a cat- 3, 3R
4
enary sag take-up. The recommended length of the catenary sag
is 18 inches (450 mm); therefore the initial tension is equal to:

2R & 3R refer to the

tension at the beginning
and end points of the 2, 2R
Ti = 1.5 x Wb
design guidelines

turn in the return path

(under the conveyor)

The tension at each point along the conveyor is calculated as follows:

1
T3R = Ti + L2 (fr)(Wb)

T2R = a(T3R) + b(fr)(R)(Wb)

T1 = T2R + L1(fr)(Wb)

T2 = T1 + L1(fs)(Wb + W1)

T3 = a(T2) + b(fs)(R)(Wb + W1)

T4 = T3 + L2(fs)(Wb + W1)

T4 is the belt tension in lb. (N) at the drive sprockets.

Turns—Other Options
In the first layout calculations, it is clear that fixed rail turns dramatically increase belt tension. Note that in the
formula for turn factor formula, “a” is a multiplier of the tension entering the turn (T1) and that “a” increases
with the angle of turn and the coefficient of friction of the inside rail. In planning the layout, try to minimize the
number and angle of the turns in order to keep the belt tension down. Keep the layout as simple as possible.

There are other options to fixed rail turns. For instance, if a full diameter, free-rotating turn wheel replaces the
fixed inside rail, the tension gain will be considerably reduced. Powering this wheel will offer an even greater
improvement. The inside belt support can be incorporated into the wheel to increase its efficiency still fur-
ther. The following cases illustrate the most practical possibilities. The tension formula is revised accordingly,
showing the effect of exit belt tension.

208 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Conveyor Design

1) Idler Inside Rail/Stationary Supports (see Figure 42)

T2 = T1 + fs(R)(Wb +W1)(θ)
Where: θ = A°/ 57.3 T2 Section

Design Guidelines

(2) Drive Inside Rail/Stationary Supports (see Figure 42) Rotating Rail
(wheel)

T2 = T1 + b(fs)(R)(Wb +W1)/a A°

If the wheel is driven, a higher fr is of some benefit. Factors

a and b will be increased, producing a lower T2.
T1

[Figure 42]
(3) Idler Inside Rail and Inside Support/Stationary Outside
Support (see Figure 43)

T2 = [T1 + fs(R) (Wb + W1)/2] (θ)

Where: θ = A°/ 57.3

(4) Drive Inside Rail and Inside Support/Stationary Outside
Support (see Figure 44)

T2 = [T1 + fs(R)(Wb + W1)(fr – fs)/2]/a

(5) Idler Inside Rail and Supports (see Figure 45)

[Figure 43]
T2 = T1
Add bearing friction and initial force to overcome inertia.

(6) Drive Inside Rail and Supports (see Figure 45)
[Figure 44]
T2 = T1 – b(fs)(R)(Wb + W1)/a

(7) Edge Drives

(see Product Technical Bulletin “052 Edge Drives”)
[Figure 45]
T2 = [T1 + fs(R)(Wb + W1)(fr – fs)/2]/a

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 209
 Conveyor Design

Comments:
The benefits afforded by formula #4 can also be provided by Ashworth Edge Drive Units without the space con-
sumption of a full diameter turn wheel on the inside of a turn. A high friction urethane lugged chain, operating in
a horizontal plane, powers the inside edge of the belt through the turn. Consult Ashworth for more details.
Turn wheels, which include the belt support bed such as in options 5 and 6 above, can be impractical for wide
belts. The transition between straight runs and the turns can be a problem. Option 2 is a more practical choice.
design guidelines

Illustration of Turn Option Benefits:

If we consider a typical case with the following given factors;
Applying the same values to the given options, you can
see the effect on T2.
T1 = 100
Option (1). T2 = 138
fs = 0.2
Option (2) T2 = 128
fr = 0.2
Option (3) T2 = 333
R=6
Option (4) T2 = 50
Wb + W1 = 10
Option (5) T2 = 100
Option (6) T2 = 72
Angle A = 180°(θ = 3.14)
Option (7) T2 = 54
a = 1.88
All of the turn wheel options offer some improvement
b = 4.38 over the fixed rail design. If, in analyzing your layout,
the tensions calculated begin to approach or exceed the
limitations for the belt to be used, consider the most ap-
For a fixed rail turn, T2 = 241
propriate option. The alternative is to divide the layout
into several independent conveyor sections.

210 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Conveyor Design

Drive Calculations
Torque at Drive Shaft
The running torque at the drive can be determined for the following formula. This makes no allowance for
start-up under load.

TQ = T x PD/2

Design Guidelines
Where:
TQ = Torque, in inch-pounds (N/m)
T = Total Belt Tension, lb. (N)
PD = Pitch Diameter of drive sprockets, in. (m)

Example:
The running torque required at the conveyor drive in the previous example, where the belt tension (T) equals
387.1 lb/foot of width, belt width equals 48 inches and selected sprocket has a pitch diameter of 6.563 inches

TQ = (387.1)(48/12) x 6.563/2 = 5081 inch-pounds of torque

Horsepower Requirements
The suggested horsepower is based on the formula below. A safety factor should be used to allow for trans-
mission losses, start up, loads, etc.

HP = T x S/33,000

Where: HP = Horsepower
T = Total Belt Tension, lb.
S = Belt speed, ft./min.

Example:
To calculate the horsepower required to drive the conveyor in the previous example, where the belt tension (T)
equals 387.1 lb/foot of width, belt width equals 48 inches and belt speed (S) is 50 fpm, would be:

HP = (387.1)(48/12) x 50 / 33,000 = 2.35 horsepower

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 211
 Conveyor Design

Drive Shaft Calculations

Shaft Diameter for Combined Torsional & Bending Load

To determine the recommended minimum diameter of the drive shaft, use the following formula. More accu-
rate results are obtained by using the trial and error method.
design guidelines

D = B x {5.1/P x [(Cb x M)2 + (Ct x Tq)2]½}⅓

Where:
D = Recommended minimum shaft diameter (inches)
B = Constant; use 1 for solid shafts; or (1 / [1 – K4])1/3
for hollow shafts, where K = (shaft ID/shaft OD)
P = Constant; use 6000 for a shaft with keyway or
8000 for shafts without keyways
Cb = Service Factor in Bending—See table
Ct = Service Factor in Torsion—See table
Tq = Torque (inch-pounds)
M = (Wr x L)/ 8
Wr = (R2 + T2)½
R = Weight of [Shaft + Sprockets + One Linear Foot of
Belt + Load/Linear Foot) (lb.)
L = Length of Shaft (in.)

Service Factors
Cb Ct Type Load
1.5 1.0 gradually applied on steady load
1.5–2.0 1.0–1.5 suddenly applied minor shock load *
2.0–3.0 1.5–3.0 suddenly applied heavy shock load
* most commonly used

212 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Conveyor Design

Deflection of Drive Shaft

The maximum recommended deflection of the drive shaft is 0.1 inch (2.5 mm).

Design Guidelines
When only two outer bearings are used: When a center bearing is used:

D = 5 x F1 x ls3 D = F1 x ls3
384 x E x I 2960 x E x I

Shaft
Where: Dimension Moment of Inertia
in. (mm)
D = Deflection, inch (mm)
F1 = Shearing force on the shaft, lbf (N)
φ
F1 = √ T2 + (ws x l1 x c)2
T = Total Belt Tension at the shaft, lbf (N)
I = πxΦ4/64
ws = Weight of shaft, lb/ft (kg/m)
l1 = Shaft length, ft (m)
ls = distance between shaft bearings, inch (mm)
E = Modulus of elasticity of shaft material I = b4/12
Steel: E = 2.95x107 lbf/inch2
= 2.1x105 N/mm2
I = Moment of Inertia of drive shaft, inch4 (mm4)
C = Force conversion factor
Imperial: 1.0 I = [b4-(b-2t)4 ]/ 12
Metric: 9.8

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 213
 Conveyor Design

Torsion of Drive Shaft

The maximum recommended torsion of the drive shaft is based on the following formulas:
(0.5 x ls (inch)/39.37 – Imperial) or ( 0.5 x ls (mm)/1000 – Metric).
design guidelines

Φ° = 180 x T x do x ls
2π x G x It

Shaft
Dimension Inertial Force
in. (mm)

Where:
Φ° = Torsion angle It = 0.1 x (dia)4
T = Total Belt Tension at the shaft, lbf (N)
do = Pitch diameter of drive sprockets, inch (mm)
ls = distance between shaft bearings, inch (mm)
G = Modulus of shear of shaft material It = t x b3
Steel: G = 11.6x106 lbf/inch2
= 81.6x103 N/mm2
It = Inertia force for drive shaft, inch4 (mm4)

It ≈ 0.141 x b4

214 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Conveyor Design

Turn-Curve Belt Turn-Curve Belt

Design Guidelines
Urethane
Driving Lugs Belt Rolled angle wheel
Support (leg out) or equivalent.
Rails Attach wear strip material
Ashworth Edge Drive Unit to belt contact surfaces.
constructed to suit application.

Drive Inside of belt support by wheel leg.

POWERED TURN
Shaft Omit inside support rail in turn.

ASHWORTH EDGE DRIVE UNIT IDLER OR DRIVEN TURN WHEEL

Support Structure

For optimum operation, it is of great importance that the belt has the correct support structure. The conveyor
has to be level for even wear on the belt and support structure. An oblique conveyor will reduce the life of
the belt and support structure due to expedient wear. The design of the support structure, i.e., the choice and
placement of the wear strips, must consider the following factors:

 Belt type
 Load
 Horizontal or inclining conveyor
 Temperature conditions

Support structure should extend beyond belt edge for best support.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 215
 Conveyor Design

Typical Support Structures:

[Figure 46] [Figure 47]
design guidelines

Di
rec
tio
no
Di fT
rec rav
el
tio
no
fT
rav
el
Spacing 6 inch [152 mm] MAX

Herringbone rails: Ashworth recommended. (Figure Longitudinal Rails: (Figure 47) Flat wear strips the
46). Flat wear strips in a “V” configuration with the point full length of the conveyor, parallel to each other and
of the “V” pointing in the direction of travel. Low friction perpendicular to the terminal shafts. Low friction wear
wear strip material preferred to minimize belt wear. Rec- strip material preferred to minimize belt wear. Recom-
ommended spacing between rails of 4–12” depending mended spacing between rails of 4–12” depending on
on belt type, load, and other factors. This configuration belt type, load, and other factors. This configuration
distributes the wear over the entire belt width. does not distribute wear over the full width of the belt.
[Figure 48] [Figure 49]

Di
rec
tio
no
fT
rav
Free Turning Rollers el

Free Turning Rollers: Ashworth recommended. Slider bed: (Figure 49) A slider rail bed of low
(Figure 48) Roller supports minimize wear on the belt, friction material will, in most cases, afford the best
reduce belt tension, and aid in the tracking of friction- means of providing belt support as it fully supports
driven belts. the belt.

Many excellent Belt Support Materials are avail- For applications that experience Temperature
able. The most commonly used Ultra High Molecular Fluctuations, the wear strips should be attached in
Weight Polyethylene (UHMWPE). UHMWPE is avail- such a manner as to allow expansion and contrac-
able in numerous shapes and sizes. Special extruded tion with temperature. In other words, they should be
shapes are available in continuous coil lengths for secured at one end only.
ease of assembly.

216 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Conveyor Design

Belt Width + 1 in.

(Minimum)

Inside turn rail

wear strip

Design Guidelines
Extruded plastic wear strip
on flat stock rails.

Belt (ref.)

Extruded plastic wear strip

on flat stock rails.

TYPICAL SUPPORT RAIL

AND RETAINING RAIL CONSTRUCTION
As a rule, support rails are required at a maximum 18 inches apart on the load side and 24 inches apart on
the return side. Rollers may also be used. For light loads, the support rails may be placed further apart—con-
sult Ashworth Engineering for you particular application.
Slider Bed: A slider rail bed of low friction material will, in most cases, afford the best means of providing belt
support. Many excellent materials are available, such as Ultra High Molecular Weight Polyethylene (UHM-
WPE). Special extruded shapes in continuous coil lengths are available for ease of assembly. In most cases,
a roller bed of good quality can be used in straight runs, but is generally impractical for turns. Inclines and
declines in a belt path should be located in the straight runs and several feet from any turn wherever possible.
On inclines where turns are required, accepted practice is to use hold down rails over the belt edges.
Free Turning Rollers: Ashworth recommended. Most oven bands are supported by free turning, horizontally
adjustable rollers with externally mounted bearings. Locate bearings outside the oven to provide for adjust-
ments when the band is at baking temperature. Roller supports minimize wear on the band, account for lower
tension to overcome friction in the system, and aid in band tracking. For new installations, align all roller sup-
ports perpendicular to the oven centerline. If a replacement band is being installed, there is no need to align
supports perpendicular to the centerline unless the previous band was severely mistracking. The new band
will likely assume the same general path of the old band and tracking adjustments can start from that point.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 217
 Conveyor Design

Wearstrip Placement

+ .02" (5.0 mm)

A - .00" (0.0 mm)

Drive
design guidelines

Pick-up roll
sprockets

PD = pitch diameter Snub roll Visible slack belt

18 in.
(Approx.)

A = ½ x PD – ½ Belt Thickness RETURN RUN OR CHARGE END DRIVE

• Wear strip placement varies with belts. Reference the Techni-

cal Bulletin on the desired belt for more information.
CL of turn
• The values stated are only a guideline; they do not take into
1-1/2 x Belt width Drive
account the influence of speed. At speeds above 75 ft/min (Minimum) sprockets
(23 m/min) Ashworth recommends to increase distance A
and shortening the wear strips as much as one-belt pitch in
Visible sag
length.

DRIVE Support rails

18 in.
(Approx.)
Belts are designed for either positive or friction drives. Pick-up roll

Positive drives propel the belts by means of Ashworth DISCHARGE TERMINAL DRIVE
sprockets which are designed to engage the fully extended
belt. For this reason, the drive sprocket cannot be located immediately adjacent to a turn exit where the links
are partially closed. A straight run not less than 1-1/2 times the belt width must be provided to allow the pitch
to return to the full extended position. The location of the drive is important and can be critical. Complicated
layouts, long conveyors, and heavy loading will certainly require multiple drives. To avoid excessive belt stress
in case of a malfunction, a drive safety device
such as a torque limiter is recommended.

Friction Drives works by frictional contact between the drive drum and the belt. Typical belts used in this ap-
plication can be balanced weave, compound balanced weave, and flat wire. Terminal drums must be large
enough to ensure good contact and maximum flexibility as the belt travels around the drum. These drums are
typically several inches wider than the belt. Each drum must be level, parallel to each other, and perpendicular
to the centerline of the conveyor. They must also be clean with no product build-up on the surface. Sometimes
drums are lagged with urethane or other high friction material to increase friction between belt and drum.
Tracking is important to stabilize belt waver.

Adjustment Of Belt Length (Take-Up)

Automatic adjustment of the belt length is obtained by providing a catenary sag take-up on the belt return
path. Use of a catenary sag (length of unsupported belt) following the sprockets ensures the automatic adjust-
ment of belt length. The catenary sag will serve to absorb the elastic expansion under load, thermal expan-
sion, and the long-term elongation of the belt.
For standard applications, a catenary take-up is placed immediately following the drive sprockets. For ap-
plications at elevated temperatures, the expansion of the belt should be calculated first to determine whether
sufficient space is available.

218 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Conveyor Design

Belts Running in One Direction (Uni-directional)

• For conveyors operating within uniform operating conditions catenary sag is only necessary on the first 18
inches (457 mm) after the drive sprockets.

Design Guidelines
1 - 4” (25 -100 mm)

• For short conveyors under 6 feet (1.8 m) the belt can hang freely between the drive and idler terminals.

• For long conveyors over 6 feet (1.8 m) with large temperature changes (50°F [10°C] or greater) the catenary
sag should be distributed over longer sections; i.e., support the belt in the return with rollers to distribute the
sag over the length of the belt.

• Alternatively, for long belts and with high temperature variations (50°F [10°C] or greater) a roller can be
mounted free hanging in the return path allowing its weight to take-up the slack belt.

Belt Running In Both Directions (Bi-Directional)

Belt take-up can be a source of excessive belt stress. For this reason, where conditions permit, we recom-
mend the use of an unsupported span of belt approximately 18 inches long immediately following the drive, in
which the belt loop hangs free with sag of 2 inches or more. If a fixed mechanical take-up is used to facilitate
control of excess slack, sag must be visible in the free loop of belt following the drive sprockets. Where other
take-up arrangements are necessary, a minimum weight, gravity controlled type is recommended.
Adjustment of belt running in both directions can be made with either pull/pull or push/pull systems.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 219
 Conveyor Design

TRAVEL
[ A [ B [ B [ A
design guidelines

inch mm 3xP
A 20 500
B 50 1270
P = Belt Pitch
This pull/pull system requires only one reversible motor.

A TRAVEL A

This conveyor requires 2 motors (one each end). This construction

inch mm requires that the motors can be disconnected.
A 24 600

TRAVEL

A B A

idler drive sprocket

C
This pull/pull system requires only one
inch mm
pole-changeable motor. The system is only suitable
A 18-24 450-600 for short conveyors with small loads. For correct
B 100-120 2540-3048 working of the system the load on the belt in the
catenary should be approximately 1.3 times higher
C 0.5-1.5 13-38 than the load in the upper belt path. See calculations
for catenary sag. The load from the catenary sag must
be considered when dimensioning the drive shaft.

Sprockets
• The basic requirements for belt conveyors are to ensure an evenly distributed load on the belt and support
structure, that the belt has the necessary strength, and the placement of the sprockets is correct.
• When constructing a belt conveyor, it is important to allow for adjustment. By using adjustable bearings at the
drive end as well as the idler end, it is easy to allow for adjustment.
Note: The use of setscrews in plastic sprockets may cause breaks in the sprockets if the setscrews are over tightened.

220 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Conveyor Design

Alignment Of Sprockets
Shafts
Proper alignment of the sprocket shafts is critical for smooth operation. The conveyor must be absolutely level
and the shafts must be perpendicular to the centerline of the conveyor. The following methods are acceptable
for aligning the drive and idle shafts.

Design Guidelines
Mounting Of Sprockets
Sprockets with a Round Bore
Round bore sprockets are recommended for conveyors with constant ambient temperature and for conveyors
with light loading. Sprockets with keyways are used at the drive end and, when sprockets are positioned, the
center sprocket is fixed axially with either set screws or collar rings.

Sprockets with a Square Bore

Square bore sprockets are recommended for conveyors with a working temperature different from the sur-
rounding temperature and for conveyors with high tension. Mount the sprockets on the shaft and fix the center
sprockets with collar rings to prevent axial movement and ensure even pull.

Determining Number Of Sprockets

The number of sprockets for the belt depends on the load on the belt and the temperature under which the
belt is operating.
Ashworth Bros. recommends a minimum of one (1) sprocket per 6 inches (152.4 mm) of belt width for plastic
and flatwire type belts. Omni-Grid® and Omni-Pro® Belts typically require only two sprockets per driveshaft.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 221
 Conveyor Design

■ For Flat wire belts positively driven with sprockets or a waffle roll (a continuous belt-width toothed member,
available via special order), overall diameters will range from 4-1/8 inches (104.8 mm) to 14-11/16 (373.1
mm). The quantity is determined for belt tension, but there is a maximum spacing of 6 inches (152 mm).
Location—Sprocket should be place in odd numbered openings, ensuring outside sprockets are located in
the third openings from each belt edge. This assists the belt in resisting fatigue fractures by providing two
load-carrying legs.
Hubs—Must be oriented in the same direction to keep teeth perfectly lined up and distribute stress evenly
design guidelines

across the belt width. Idlers should be placed in even numbered openings, ensuring that outside sprockets
are located in the second openings from each belt edge.

The required number of sprockets for the belt is determined as follows:

Minimum number of sprockets per shaft is calculated by dividing the belt width by sum of maximum sprocket
spacing and sprocket width. Round calculated number up to nearest whole number.

DIRECTION OF TRAVEL
Example for a metal belt with a width of 26 inches:
Minimum number of sprockets per shaft = belt width/
(max spacing number of sprockets)
26 inch wide belt (660.4 mm)/6 inch = 4.33 sprockets* Drive
Sprockets
■ Always round up to the next highest whole
number
■ A minimum of 5 sprockets is required for both Idler
Sprockets
the drive and idler shafts.

Metric
Number of sprockets = 660.4 mm/152.4 mm = 4.33 sprockets
■ Always round up to the next highest whole number
■ A minimum of 5 sprockets is required for both the drive and idler shafts.
Cleatrac® belts are an exception to this rule. Please see Technical Product Bulletin “033 Cleatrac® Belt
and Drive System” for Cleatrac® sprocket calculations.

Chordal Action
Sprocket driven conveyor belts will experience variation in linear speed as the sprocket drives the belt. Be-
cause belts hinge or rotate about the set pitch of the belt they can only bend about the rods or pitch points.
This creates a variation in the radius of engagement between the tangent and chord positions. This phenom-
enon is referred to as chordal action.

Chordal Rise

When the sprockets are rotating at a constant speed, the belt speed is not steady due to change in engage-
ment radius (chordal rise). Chordal action varies based on the number of teeth on the sprockets.
This variation in speed is calculated as following:

222 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Conveyor Design

Chordal Action (ratio of speed change) = 1 – cos(180°/N)

Where N equals the number of teeth on the sprocket

Speed Variation vs. Number of Teeth

30

25
% Speed Variation

20

Design Guidelines
15

10

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
Number of T eet h

When the values for chordal action are graphed it becomes clear that, as the number of teeth are increased
on the sprocket, the resulting chordal action or variation in belt speed is reduced dramatically. As noted in the
graph above, the speed variation drops to around 4% when an 11-tooth sprocket is used. A speed variation
of this amount is seldom noticeable, which is why Ashworth recommends the selected sprocket for any of our
belt types have no less than 11 sprocket teeth.

Sprocket Material Selection

Ashworth recommends using plastic (UHMWPE) sprockets on the majority of conveyor applications. Plastic
sprockets are recommended since they wear extremely well and operate quieter than metal sprockets. How-
ever, in applications operating above 150 °F (65°C), metal sprockets are preferred as the plastic will deform
and wear faster at elevated temperatures.
Metal sprockets are recommended for applications where elevated temperatures are present, when the prod-
uct being conveyed is abrasive, or when the belt is being operated at very high tensions. Stainless steel is the
material of choice for wet or food applications. For dry applications or the general conveying of non-food or
packaged products, cast iron or fully machined plain steel sprockets can be used.

Filler Rolls
Ashworth recommends filler rolls be used on shafts where only drive sprockets are used; i.e., Omni-Pro®,
Advantage™ , and Omni-Grid®. The filler (or support) rolls are required to keep the belt from deflecting across
its width. The maximum diameter for the filler rolls depends on the size of the sprockets being used. The
diameter required for the filler rolls can be calculated knowing the pitch diameter of the chosen sprockets.

Max. Dia. = PD x cosine(180/#) – MT

Max. Dia. = maximum diameter for the filler rolls

PD = Pitch diameter of sprocket
# = Number of teeth on the sprocket
MT = Mesh (Belt) thickness

Mesh thickness for Omni-Pro® and Omni-Grid® belts can be estimated by adding the cross rod diameter plus
two times the diameter of the mesh overlay.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 223
 Conveyor Design

Catenary Sag (Vertical Distance from Top to Bottom of Belt Arch)

A free hanging conveyor belt will form a belt arch between two supports. Knowing the amount of belt in the
arch and load from the belt is important in determining both load at the sprockets and the required belt length.

L = Length of belt in arch–ft (m)

design guidelines

F = Tension from the belt arch, lbf/ft (N/m) of belt width

D = Distance between supports–ft (m)
w = Belt weight–lb/ft2 (kg/m2)
S = Catenary sag–ft (m)
C = Force conversion factor
Imperial: 1.0
Metric: 9.8

Length of belt arch

L ≈ [(2.66 x S2) / D] + D

Example: Catenary Sag

W: 1.5 lb/ft2 (7.5 kg/m2)
5 ft (1.52 m)

0.67 ft (0.203 m)

Length of belt arch:

L ≈ [(2.66 x S2) / D] + D

Imperial: L = [(2.66 x .672) / 5] + 5 = 5.24 ft

Metric: L = [(2.66 x .2032) / 1.52] + 1.52 = 1.6 m

Load from belt arch:

F = (D2 x W x C ) / (8 x S)

224 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Conveyor Design

Imperial: F = (52 x 1.5 x 1) / (8 x .67) = 7 lbf/ft

Metric: F = (1.522 x 7.5 x 9.8) / (8 x .203) = 104.6 N/m

Expansion/Contraction Of The Belt

Expansion/contraction of the belt may occur at operating conditions where the belt is exposed to changes in

Design Guidelines
temperature. Such changes in the belt width and belt length must be taken into consideration when the con-
veyor is constructed.

∆L = length or width expansion–inch (mm)

L = length or width of belt at temperature T1–ft (m)
T2 = working temperature °F (°C)
T1 = surrounding temperature °F (°C)
ρ = expansion coefficient–see table

Expansion coefficients (ρ):

Belt Material inch /(ft x °F) mm/(m x °C)

Acetal 6.00E-4 0.12
High Carbon Steel 0.76E-4 0.012
Stainless Steel T304/T316 1.19E-4 0.018

The change in dimensions can be calculated as follows:

∆L = L x ρ x (T2–T1)

Example: Expansion/Contraction of the Belt

An example belt application would be: A belt 3 feet (0.91 m) wide, conveyor length 25 ft (7.62 m), ambient
temperature +72°F (+22°C), operating temperature +150°F (+65°C)

Expansion in width:
Imperial: ∆L = 3 x 0.001 x (150–72) Metric: ∆L = 0.91 x 0.15 x (65–22)
∆L = 0.23 inch ∆L = 5.8 mm

Expansion in length:
Imperial: ∆L = 25 x 0.001 x (150–72) Metric: ∆L = 7.62 x 0.15 x (65–22)
∆L = 1.95 inch ∆L = 49.5 mm

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 225
 Conveyor Design

Friction Coefficients
Friction coefficient between Belt and Wear Strips, Metal Belts
Belt Material Type of Belt Support f
Free Turning Rollers 0.10
UHMWPE with clean or packaged product 0.20
Stainless Steel or High Carbon UHMWPE with breaded or flour based product 0.27
UHMWPE with greasy, fried product 0.30
design guidelines

UHMWPE with sticky, glazed, sugar based product 0.35

Mild Steel with temperatures up to 1000°F (538°C) 0.35
Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel (not recommended with metal belts) 0.40
Mild Steel with temperatures up to 1000°F (538°C) 0.40
High Carbon
Stainless Steel (not recommended with metal belts) 0.35

Friction coefficient between Belt and Wear Strips, Plastic Belts

Wear Strip Material
Belt Material Lubrication Stainless Steel Polyethylene
Dry 0.28 0.15
Polypropylene
Water 0.26 0.13
Dry 0.16 0.32
Polyethylene
Water 0.14 0.30
Dry 0.30 0.24
Delrin—Acetal
Water 0.23 0.20
Dry 0.24 0.19
Anti-static/Low Friction—Acetal
Water 0.17 0.15
Dry 0.20 0.18
Super Low Friction—Acetal
Water 0.15 0.10
Values will be 0.1 to 0.2 higher at the starting moment.

Friction coefficient between Belt and Product

Product Material
Belt Material Lubrication Glass* Metal Plastic Cardboard
Dry 0.19 0.32 0.17 0.22
PP
Water 0.17 0.30 0.15 ---
Dry 0.10 0.13 0.10 0.15
PE
Water 0.09 0.11 0.09 ---
Dry 0.18 0.24 0.22 0.27
D-Acetal
Water 0.16 0.21 0.19 ---
Dry 0.15 0.20 0.18 0.21
AS/LF–Acetal
Water 0.12 0.18 0.16 ---
Dry 0.12 0.15 0.15 0.19
SLF-Acetal
Water 0.10 0.14 0.14 ---
Values will be 0.1 to 0.2 higher at the starting moment.
* Do not use plastic modules if broken glass comes on the conveyor.

226 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Conveyor Design

Location of Finger/Transfer Plates

Customer to determine type of support.
Locate as close as possible to sprocket
without risk of interference.
Customer to determine type of
support for transfer comb
segments, also include provisions
for adjustment.

Design Guidelines
H3=3/8” Max. Tooth Height

Note:
1. Operate belt and track belt before installing transfer plates.
2. At terminals where the transfer plate is used, sprocket teeth
must be reduced to 3/8” overall height for H3 EZ transfer.
3. Return support rails must have a 1” minimum width to insure
that pickets do not straddle the rails.
4. Belt has a definite top and bottom and cannot be inverted.

H3 EZ TRANSFER
Sprocket A Dim. B Dim.
Type in. mm in. mm
#6-18 Tooth 3-1/8 to 3-3/8 79.4 to 85.7 3-5/8 84.1
#8-23 Tooth 3-5/16 to 3-7/16 84.1 to 87.3 4-1/4 108

The diagram shown is to be used as a guide in the placement fingerplates to provide the smoothest possible
transfer from the belt to the fingerplate.
The main consideration will be proper clearance for the belt and mounting of the fingerplate because the plates
are produced in standard modular sizes. The belt widths must be in intervals coincidental with the finger spacing.
Contact Ashworth Engineering for other options specific for your application and system design.
This belt is used with sprockets to insure proper alignment with transfer plate fingers.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 227
 Conveyor Design

NOTES
design guidelines

228 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Conveyor Design

Design Guidelines
Corrosion Resistance

Corrosion may occur should the belt be subjected to certain chemicals. The corrosion resistance of the con-
veyor and belt materials to a number of pure liquids is shown in the table below. Note that the concentration and
temperature of the liquid in most cases are decisive as to whether or not the material is resistant.
Use this table as a guide. Other liquid solutions besides those listed, as well as mixed solutions, may attack the
conveyor and belt materials. Chemicals can affect the weight, strength, color, dimensions, flexibility, and surface
appearance of plastics. The basic interactions that cause these changes are (1) chemical attack on the polymer
chain; (2) physical change, including absorption of solvents, resulting in the softening and swelling of the plastic,
or dissolution of the plastic in a solvent; (3) stress cracking from the interaction of the "stress-cracking agent"
with molded-in or external stresses.
The reactive combination of compounds of two or more classes may cause an undesirable chemical effect. Oth-
er factors affecting chemical resistance include: temperature, pressure, internal or external stresses, and length
of exposure to and concentration of the chemical. As temperature increases, resistance to attack decreases.
In general, plastic belts are not resistant to liquids with a pH-value lower than 4.5 or higher than 9.0. Cleaning
with strong detergents should be avoided. Metal belts are not resistant to liquids with a pH-value lower than 6 or
higher than 13.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 229
 Conveyor Design

Corrosion Resistance
Martensitic/Ferritic Austenitic PA6
Chemical Name D, LF, SLF, AS PP PE GR AS PVDF PC
stainless steel stainless steel PA66
Acetic Ether - ** ** ** -
Acetone 10% ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** - *
Alcohol ** ** ** ** ** ** ** *
Aluminum Chloride - ** ** ** * ** ** **
design guidelines

Aluminum Fluoride ** ** **
Aluminum Hydroxide ** ** ** ** *
Aluminum Nitrate ** ** ** ** **
Aluminum Sulfate - ** ** ** ** **
Ammonia ** ** - ** ** * ** * - *
Aniline ** ** ** ** * * ** ** **
Arcenic Acid ** ** ** ** **
Benzene ** ** ** * - * -
Benzoic Acid ** * ** ** ** ** *
Borax ** ** * ** ** **
Boric Acid ** ** ** ** * ** ** *
Brake Fluid ** ** **
Bromic Acid - - - - - ** -
Bromine - - - - - - ** -
Butyl Acetate ** - - ** - ** **
Butyric Acid * ** ** ** - - *
Carbon Dioxide ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** **
Carbon Disulfide ** ** ** * * ** - ** -
Carbon Tetrachloride ** ** * - - - ** -
Chlorine Water * * - ** - - - ** * -
Chlorobenzene - ** * - - ** * ** -
Chloroform ** ** - - - - * ** - **
Chloromethyl ** ** - - -
Chloromethylene ** ** * - - **
Chromic Acid 50% - * - ** ** * -
Citric Acid * ** * ** ** * ** ** ** **
Cresol ** ** ** * -
Crude Oil ** ** ** ** * ** * ** **
Cyclohexane ** - - ** **
Cyclohexanol ** * - ** ** *
Cyclohexanone ** * * ** *
Dextrin ** ** **
Diethyl Ether * * -
Dimethylamine ** * ** - **
Ethyl Acetate ** ** - * **
Ethyl Ether ** ** ** - - - **
Ferric Chloride - - * ** ** - ** ** *
Ferric Nitrate ** ** ** ** **
Ferric Sulfate ** ** ** ** ** **
Formaldehyde ** ** ** ** * ** ** ** * **
Formic Acid - * - ** ** * ** *
Fuel Oil * * * *
Glycerin ** ** ** ** ** ** ** * **
Hydrobromic Acid 50% - ** **
Test Temperature: + 73 °F (+23 °C) ** = Excellent Resistance * = Satisfactory Resistance –= Unsatisfactory Resistance

230 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
 Conveyor Design

Corrosion Resistance (Continued)

Martensitic/Ferritic Austenitic PA6
Chemical Name D, LF, SLF, AS PP PE GR AS PVDF PC
stainless steel stainless steel PA66
Hydrochloric Acid 10% - * - ** ** - ** ** ** **
Hydrofluoric Acid - - - ** ** - ** ** -
Fuel Oil * * * *
Glycerin ** ** ** ** ** ** ** * **
Hydrobromic Acid 50% - ** **

Design Guidelines
Hydrochloric Acid 10% - * - ** ** - ** ** ** **
Hydrofluoric Acid - - - ** ** - ** ** -
Hydrogen Fluoride - ** **
Hydrogen Peroxide ** ** * * ** * * ** * *
Hydrogen Sulfide 2% * ** - ** ** ** ** ** **
Iodine (dry) ** ** - * - - - ** -
Iodine (fluid) - * - - - - - ** ** -
Lactic Acid 10% * * ** ** ** ** ** ** ** *
Linseed Oil ** ** ** ** ** ** ** **
Lubricating Oil ** ** ** ** * * **
Hydrogen Fluoride - ** **
Hydrogen Peroxide ** ** * * ** * * ** * *
Hydrogen Sulfide 2% * ** - ** ** ** ** ** **
Iodine (dry) ** ** - * - - - ** -
Iodine (fluid) - * - - - - - ** ** -
Lactic Acid 10% * * ** ** ** ** ** ** ** *
Linseed Oil ** ** ** ** ** ** ** **
Lubricating Oil ** ** ** ** * * **
Malic Acid ** ** * ** ** *
Mercury Chloride 5% - ** ** ** ** - ** ** **
Mercury Cyanide - * ** **
Mercury Nitrate ** ** ** ** **
Monochloroacetic Acid - * ** **
Motor Oil ** ** ** ** * ** **
Nitric Acid 10% * ** - * * - - ** * -
Nitrobenzene * * - * ** ** - *
Oleic Acid ** ** * ** * ** ** **
Oxalic Acid 10% * * - ** ** * ** ** **
Ozone - - * - * ** ** *
Palmitic Acid 10% ** ** ** **
Palmitic Acid 70% ** ** ** **
Perchloric Acid 10% ** ** **
Perchloric Acid 70% **
Perchloroethylene ** - - -
Petrol ** ** ** ** ** -
Petroleum ** ** ** * ** ** * ** - **
Phenol 10% - * * ** ** - ** ** - -
Phosphoric Acid 30% - ** - ** ** - ** ** ** **
Phosphoric Acid 85% - * - ** ** - * ** - **
Silver Nitrate * ** ** ** ** **
Stearic Acid ** ** ** * **
Succinic Acid ** **
Sulfur * * ** - ** ** **
Test Temperature: + 73 °F (+23 °C) ** = Excellent Resistance * = Satisfactory Resistance –= Unsatisfactory Resistance

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 231
 Conveyor Design

Corrosion Resistance (Continued)

Martensitic/Ferritic Austenitic PA6
Chemical Name D, LF, SLF, AS PP PE GR AS PVDF PC
stainless steel stainless steel PA66
Sulfur Chloride * ** - **
Sulfur Dioxide - * - * ** - * * *
Sulfuric Acid 60% - - - ** * - ** - -
Sulphurous Acid - * - ** ** ** *
Tannic Acid (Tannin) * * ** ** * **
design guidelines

Tartaric Acid * ** * ** ** *
Toluene ** ** ** - ** - ** - **
Tomato Juice ** ** **
Trichlroacetic Acid * - ** **
Turpentine * - **
Vegetable Oil ** ** * * **
Vinegar * ** - ** ** ** -
Zinc Chloride * * ** ** ** ** ** *
Test Temperature: + 73 °F (+23 °C) ** = Excellent Resistance * = Satisfactory Resistance –= Unsatisfactory Resistance

Thermal Characteristics For Steel And Plastic

Recommended Temperature Range
Temperature Range
°F °C
Austenitic stainless steel - 94 to + 806 - 70 to + 430
Martensitic/ferritic stainless steel - 94 to + 806 - 70 to + 430
Special hardened steel - 94 to + 806 - 70 to + 430
Acetal (D, LF, SLF) - 40 to + 194 - 40 to + 90
Polypropylene (PP) + 33 to + 219 + 1 to + 104
Polyethylene (PE) - 58 to + 176 - 50 to + 80
Glass reinforced polyester (GR) - 40 to + 257 - 40 to + 125
Antistatic material (AS) - 40 to + 194 - 40 to + 90
Polycarbonate (PC) - 4 to + 266 - 20 to + 130
Polyamide (PA66) - 40 to + 284 - 40 to + 140
Flame retardant polyamide (FR) + 33 to + 219 + 1 to + 104
Polyethersulfon (PESU) +65 to + 390 +20 to + 200
Polyvinylidenflouride (PVDF) - 40 to + 212 - 40 to + 100

232 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
Glossary of Terms
A5SC Flat Wire Belt: Designed for the can industry by Ash- Brazed Edge or Soldered Edge: An edge finish com-
worth. Its special construction allows it to run under inverted pleted by brazing or soldering only.
cans, without pinching and upsetting them, which can occur
at the discharge of the dryer section in a can washer, where Burrs: Metal protrusions on metal parts due to dull tooling,
the cans transfer onto the take-away conveyor. improperly punched, or cut parts of the belt.

Advantage™ Belts: Hybrid belts comprised of acetal links Cage: Large cylindrical shaped core of a spiral system.
connected by stainless steel rods. Rods are designed to eas- The system’s main driving component. (See also Drum.)
ily snap in/out for quick replacement and maintenance. First
and only NSF certified and USDA accepted plastic belting.
Cage Bars: The vertical members that form the driving
surface of the cage or drum in a lotension spiral system.
Auxiliary Drive: The sprocket drive that sets the belt
speed. This normally is located at the discharge of a spiral
Catenary: Unsupported section of belt, typically immedi-
conveyor just before the take-up. (See also Take-up)
ately following drive sprockets, which accumulate belt and
acts as a weighted take-up.
Baking Band: The tightly woven wire mesh of Ashworth's
Baking Bands provides uniform heat distribution along with
Cantilever: Horizontal structural member on which the
excellent air circulation and product support for all but the
belt supports are mounted with one end attached to the
most fluid of doughs. The density of the band maintains
support columns and the other end free. Typically found on
even heating for a consistent bottom bake across the
lotension systems.
entire width of the belt.

Center Link Position: Distance between inside edge of

Balanced Weave: A woven mesh consisting of alternating
belt and centerline of center link in small radius belts.
right and left-hand spirals joined by crimped connecting
rods to form a continuous belt. In some meshes, straight
connecting rods are used. Chain Driven Belts: A belt construction which provides
positive traction by incorporating two or more rows of chain
attached to cross rods or flatbar. Chains commonly used for
Bar Capping: Wear strips, typically UHMWPE, installed
this purpose include attachment, engineering, pintle, or roller.
on the cage bars.

Chordal Action: Variation in speed or surging of the belt

Bar Links: Links typically used on Omni-Flex® belts that
caused by the acceleration and deceleration of the belt as
determine the strength of the belt. The bar links are as-
it goes around the sprocket. Also known as Pitch Line Rise
sembled in a “shingled” configuration to allow the links to
and Fall.
nest as the inside belt edge collapses in a turn.

Christmas Tree: Condition due to high tension. The inside

Belt: A complete product consisting of a skeleton with or
edge of the belt rises up off the belt supports. The belt may
without mesh and attachments suitable for flexing around
get caught between the drum and inside belt supports.
pulleys, sprockets or drive rolls used primarily as a means
(See Reverse Christmas Tree.)
of conveyance. Also called a "band" (in the baking indus-
try), or a "mat" (in the can making industry).
Cleatrac® Belting (CTB): Precision balanced weave wire
mesh consisting of alternating right and left-hand spirals joined
Belt Supports: Structure on which the belt rides. Typical
by crimped connecting rods, driven by matching sprockets.
belt supports are UHMWPE and metal rails which can be
GLOSSARY

arranged in a herringbone pattern or arranged horizontally

Column: The structural member that forms the main sup-
in the direction of belt travel.
port for the entire spiral system and is located circumferen-
tially around the system.
Belt Trackers (Control Rolls): Devices used to guide
the belt’s path. Control rolls are placed 1.5 x belt width
from terminals.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 233
 Compound Balanced Weave: A mesh consisting of alter- Double Weave (Duplex) Edges: Edge construction of
nating right and left-hand spirals nested together and joined double weave design extending in from both edges to a
by three or more crimped connecting rods. In some meshes, specific distance.
straight connecting rods are used.
Down Cage: A spiral system where the belt travels from
Compressed Spiral Edges: An edge finish in which the top to bottom. (See also Up Cage.)
outer turns of the spirals are compressed to a specified
distance. Drum: Large cylindrical shaped core of a spiral system.
The system’s main driving component. (See also Cage.)
Connector Rod: A wire or rod of any shape (usually
round), either straight or crimped, used for joining belt Drum Diameter: Diameter of the drum or cage.
components.
Edge Drives: Designed to reduce tension to acceptable
Conventional Weave: A mesh consisting of a series of levels in applications where long belts pass through a
either all right or all left-hand spirals, each turned into the series of turns and straight runs, often resulting in tension
preceding spiral to form a continuous belt. (For basic types, levels which exceed recommended limits.
see Uni-Directional and Sectional Weave.)
Elevated Temperatures: Thermal expansion of the belt
Crimped Connectors: Round wire formed into peaks and width may adversely affect sprocket engagement with the
valleys to house spirals. The design pre-seats and stabilizes belt openings.
spirals to reduce break-in stretch and prevent lateral spiral
movement.
Elongated Spiral Edge: A retaining edge fabricated by
adding elongated spirals to the turned-up connectors or
Cross Over: Length of straight running belt between cen- rod reinforcements.
ters of two cages on a two cage/one belt system.
End Lock: Rod cap with locking lip inserted into the mod-
Dancer Roll: Weighted roll at the bottom of a take-up loop. ule along both edges of the belt to secure rod position.

Dirty Systems: Process dirt and belt wear debris may con- ExactaStack™: Self-stacking belt available in all widths,
taminate product, increase system friction, and accelerate tier heights, and mesh configurations for both spliced-in
belt wear, thus reducing the useful life of the belt if the user sections and complete belt replacements. No system drive
does not practice proper cleaning. Cleaning practices and modifications required.
schedules are application specific.
Extended Sidebar Chain: A retaining edge provided by
Dividers: Devices used to separate a belt into longitudi- special attachments on the chain.
nal product lanes. These can be created with woven wire
designs or plate attachments.
EZ Transfer Finger Plate: Eliminates the need for transfer
dead plates at terminal discharges as the tines of the plates
Double Balanced Weave: A mesh consisting of pairs of fill the space between the raised leg pickets or modules.
interlaced right and left-hand spirals joined by crimped or
straight rod connectors so that the pairs of spirals are inter- Fatigue Resistant Cleatrac: Provides up to 2.5 times the
spaced by the adjacent spirals. working strength of our standard Cleatrac belts. Fatigue
Resistant Cleatrac belting can be used in applications re-
Double Rod Reinforced Weave (Dual or Duplex Weave): quiring longer conveyor lengths and increased belt strength.
A mesh consisting of pairs of either all right-hand or all
left-hand spirals, each pair being turned into the preceding Filled Edges: Short lengths of wire (any shape) affixed
GlOSSARY

pair, and reinforced with a rod through the hinging point of between connectors.
the spirals.

234 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
Filler Rod: A rod of any shape (usually round) inserted Inside Turn Radius: Turn radius measured to the inside
through a spiral or spirals to fill the mesh. These rods do not edge of the belt.
connect spirals or belt components.
Integral Guard Edge: Inside leg link raised to prevent
Flat Bar: A commercially available or manufacturable flat product from falling off belt. Integral guard edge links offer
bar used as cross supports to connect chain. Occasion- improved cleanup and sanitation over guard edge plates.
ally, flat bar is inserted through mesh to act as a filler bar
or assembled under the mesh with the mesh welded to the Interlocking Plate: A retaining edge consisting of a series
flat bar. of formed plates which “interlock” with each other to form a
guard edge.
Flat Wire Belt: Continuous assembly of flat wire pickets
connected by a straight round connector inserted through Interlocking Looped Edge: A retaining edge formed by ex-
positioned holes. tending ends of straight wire connectors or reinforcing wires
into interlocking loop design at prescribed angles to the belt.
Flights (Lifts, Cleats): Devices attached across the width
of the belt at prescribed intervals to prevent the product Internal Pigtails: Secures the rod position within the over-
from sliding on the inclines and declines. These may be lay spirals. They are recommended for applications with a
fabricated from woven wire spirals and formed or unformed soft or wet product. Internal pigtails may be added to any
sheet metal. Omni-Tough® overlay at the time of fabrication. Minimum
belt width for this feature is 12" (305 mm) nominal.
Flip-up: Condition due to high tension. The outside edge
of the belt rises up off the belt supports. The belt may get Interwoven Weave: A mesh consisting of two conventional
caught between the drum and inside belt support. Also weaves in which one is woven into the other and some-
called Reverse Christmas Tree. (See Christmas Tree.) times reinforced by straight rods through the hinging points
of the spirals.
Flip-up Detection: Electrical or mechanical/electrical
device(s) that detect a edge flip-up condition. Knuckled Edge: An edge finish which is complete without
welding. The edge is finished by bending back the ends of
Guard Edge Plate: Plates assembled between links and the spirals to form a loop, generally permitting each indi-
mesh to prevent product from falling off belt. Guard edge vidual spiral to flex as a single link in the belt.
plates are tack welded to links as needed to secure position.
Knuckled and Welded Edge: An edge finish which is knuck-
Herringbone: Arrangement of support rails in a “V- led with ends of the wire forming the knuckle loop, and tack
shape”. Tip of “V” points in direction of belt travel. Pro- welded or brazed to the spiral to prevent opening of loops.
vides even distribution of wear and helps keep the belt
centered in its path. Ladder Edge: An edge finish formed by extending rein-
forcing wires or connectors beyond the spiral finish and
High Tension: Tension reaching or exceeding the capabili- creating an edge in the appearance of ladder chain.
ties of the belt. Can result from system layout, high coef-
ficient of friction between belt and product (dirty system), Ladder Edge, Welded: An edge finish similar to Ladder
or product loading. Edge with loops tack welded or brazed.

Hold Downs: Members that limit the amount the belt Lane Dividers: Detachable or non-detachable plates as-
edges can rise in a Christmas Tree or flip-up condition. sembled into the belt’s width to create product lanes. Spiral
wire lane dividers also available.
In-Run: The length of belt from the load point to point tan-
GLOSSARY

gent to the cage of a spiral system or turn of a fixed turn Lehr Mesh: A balanced weave wire mesh consisting of
conveyor. Also known as in-feed. alternating right and left-hand flattened spirals fully seated
into specifically formed crimped connector rods—com-
Inside Radius: The distance from the rotational axis (cen- monly used in glass processing systems.
ter) of the drum to the driving surface of the drum.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 235
 Limit Switches: Switches installed to sound an alarm or and expand longitudinally. This allows the belt to negoti-
stop the system if the position of the take-up roll goes too ate spirals and turns. Each rod is secured via buttonhead
high or too low. They can detect high tension and prevent welds, and belt strength can be increased by adding single
some jams. or double bar links to the outside edge of the belt.

Loop: One complete turn within a spiral. Omni-Pro®: Turn-curve belt with metal links and rods and
assembled with a zero tension, 360 buttonless welds, ca-
Looped Edge (Wicket): A retaining edge formed by extend- pable of accommodating turns in a conveyor system. Wire
ing pairs of connectors or rod reinforcements, and turning. mesh overlays are available for greater product support.
They can also be used in straight-run applications.
Main Drive: The motor, reducer, and other power trans-
mission devices that turn the cage or drum of a spiral Omni-Tough®: An overlay with a flat surface made from
system. Also known as the cage drive. high tensile strength spring stainless steel wire with a
high resilience to impact. Omni-Tough® is available in
Mesh: Woven wire surface on which the product rests. most mesh configurations.

Mesh Designation (Flat Wire): Flat wire belts are con- Opening: Open space on the carrying surface of the mesh
structed in specific mesh designations or opening sizes, between wires.
such as 1x1, 1/2x1, 1/2x1/2, with other modifications which
may vary according to belt width. Opening—Lateral: The nominal inside distance between
parallel wires, measured along a line perpendicular to the
Mesh Designation (Woven): Woven mesh is designat- angle of weave to the nearest intersecting wire whether in
ed with a letter (Balanced,Conventional,Unilateral) and the same or adjacent spiral. (This definition does not apply
three numbers to describe mesh construction. to Compound Balanced Weave.)

Mobius: Technique where return path is arranged to Opening—Longitudinal: The nominal inside distance
make the belt turn itself over each successive pass along the angle of weave measured between the con-
through the system. nectors of the spirals. (This definition does not apply to
Compound Balanced Weave.)
Multi-Strand Weave: A mesh consisting of alternating
right and left-hand double spirals (side by side as single Out-Run: Length of belt from the point tangent to the cage
units) joined by straight connecting rods. or turn to discharge of the product. Also known as out-feed.

Nose Roll: Machined radius plate or roller, plastic or Overdrive: The amount of slippage between the belt and
metal, located at the conveyor terminals which the belt the drum or cage in a spiral system.
wraps around, allowing a close transfer.
PDCE: Positive Drive Chain Edge. Totally customisable
® ®
Omni-Grid : Omni-Grid belts are precision crafted from metal belting with good uniformity of pitch, high tensile
premium quality stainless steel to exacting standards. The strength with a relatively light belt/chain weight, and good
finish is smooth and burr-free for quick and easy cleaning, durability under severe loads.
maximizing production. Available in a variety of configura-
tions to negotiate tight turn radii. Picket: A continuous corrugation of flat strip with pre-
positioned holes. Applicable to flat wire belts.
Offset Guard Edge: A retaining edge similar to the Shingle
type except having a formed vertical step in each place. Pitch Line Rise and Fall: Also known as Chordal Action.
GlOSSARY

Omni-Flex®: A turn-curve belt based off Ashworth's basic Prestoflex®: Plastic belting with a connectorless construc-
flatwire belt. Flat wire pickets are manufactured with slots, tion made up of plastic modules, which snap or unsnap
rather than holes, in order to allow the pickets to collapse together for quick and uncomplicated repairs.

236 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
Plastic Modular Belt: Plastic modules assembled with Side Travel: The continuous movement of a belt in a direc-
adjacent modules using a round stainless steel rod in- tion either right or left of the centerline of the conveyor.
serted through the modules. (See Waver.)

Radius Weight: Simplified formula for estimating belt ten- Small Radius Omni-Grid® (3/4" & 1" ): Belt consists of
sion while in contact with the drum in a spiral system. It is an assembly of rods and links. A center row of heavy duty
another term used to describe the system tension. non-collapsing links forms two product lanes: for 3/4" pitch
belts  there are standard links on inside and outside belt
Reduced Radius Omni-Grid®: Smallest turn belt radius edges; for 1" pitch belts there are standard collapsing links
available with no center link assembled into the belt. on inside edge with 1.75" (44.5 mm) pitch collapsing links
on the outside edge. All belts are double welded.
Reinforcing Rod: A rod of any shape (usually round) inserted
through the bends of the spirals for the purpose of strengthen- Space Saver Omni-Grid® (1"): Belt consists of an as-
ing the fabric. It does not join spirals or serve as a connector. sembly of rods and links. A dual row of heavy duty, non-
collapsing links are used on the inside edge and a long
pitch-expanding link is used on the outside edge.
Relieved and Reinforced Turned-up Fabric: A retaining
edge similar to a relieved turned-up mesh except that hair-
pin reinforcements are inserted in the disconnected spirals. Sprockets: Used to drive positive-drive belts. These
sprockets are generally cast from carbon, stainless steel,
or machined UHMWPE and are finished in sizes suitable
Relieved Turned-up Fabric: A retaining edge similar to a
for application.
turned-up mesh edge providing flexibility by the omission
of connectors or rod reinforcements in the turned-up por-
tion of the mesh at prescribed spacing. Staggered Style Guard Edges: A retaining edge consist-
ing of alternating overlapped inside and outside flat plates.
Return Path: The path the belt takes in moving from the
discharge back to the in-feed. Stress Corrosion Cracking: The fracture of a metal in a
corrosive environment. Austenitic stainless steel belts are
susceptible to this phenomenon under certain conditions.
Rod Looped Edge: An edge finish similar to the Lad-
der Edge except that reinforcing wires or connectors are
Strip Sizes: Strip sizes for flat wire and Omni-Flex® are
extended and knuckled on themselves.
generally supplied in dimensions within the accepted toler-
ances of flat wire manufacturers. Strip sizes also designate
Rod Reinforced Weave: Mesh constructed in the same the height and thickness of a flat wire strip.
manner as Conventional Weave, and reinforced by inser-
tion of a rod through the hinging point of the spirals.
Stripper Bar: Plain rod mounted between the underside of
the sprocket and the belt to help disengage the belt from
Round Wire Sizes: Round wire sizes generally referred the sprocket as the belt begins its return run.
to are the nearest American Steel and Wire or Washburn &
Moen gauge number with its decimal equivalent and supplied
Super Small Radius Omni-Grid® (SSOG): Lotension belt
within the standard wire tolerances of wire manufacturers.
with an inside turn radius equal to 0.8 times the belt width.
SSOG has the industry's smallest turn radius for spiral and
Sectional Weave: A mesh consisting of alternating sec- turn curve applications. Maximizes utilization of available
tions of right and left conventional weave usually joined by floor space, and can turn either left or right, pivoting about
means of straight or crimped wires. a center link

Shingle Style Guard Edge: A retaining edge consisting

Surge: A loping or jerky operation of the belt due to too
of overlapping flat plates with one edge of the plate on
GLOSSARY

much overdrive, varying coefficients of friction of belt sup-

the outside of the preceding plate and the other edge on
ports, and drive problems.
the inside.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 237
 Glossary

Swing Wide: The occasional tendency of a belt to swing Trigger Lock: Flexible clip molded into the ends of plastic
outward in an area prior to or upon leaving a turn or the drum. modules to secure rod position.

Tack Weld: This process prevents picket compression or Tungsten Mesh: Conventional weave wire mesh consist-
narrowing associated with high belt tension. Typically as- ing of only left-hand spirals, wound one into the next so as
sociated with flat wire belts 60" (1524 mm) or greater. to form a continuous fabric. Special material allows for use
in temperature up to 3632°F (2000°C).
Take-Up: The area of the system where variations in belt
length are accommodated or “taken up”. Turn Ratio: The ratio of inside turn radius to the belt width.

Take-Up Drive: A name often given to the system sprock- Turn-up Guard Edge: A retaining edge formed by extend-
et drive. This drive sets the belt speed and dwell time for ing individual connectors or rod reinforcements, and turn-
the system and is located just before the take-up. ing them up at prescribed angles and spacings.

Take-Up Tower: The structure or area where the take- Turned-up Fabric: A retaining edge formed by turn-
up, take-up drive, limit switches, and dancer roll are ing up a portion of the belt at a prescribed angle to the
located in a spiral. carrying surface.

Tensile Stress: This can result from the fabrication of the Turning Radius: The radius around which a belt may be
material or applied stresses to the material in operation. flexed. It is commonly referred to as Inside Turning Radius
Most commonly caused from high tension in the system. and is established by the nesting of links or pickets at the
inside edge of the turn and by the belt width.
Tension Drive: Also known as Take-Up Drive or Auxiliary Drive.
Uni-Directional Weave: A conventional weave mesh in
Tension Link: Outermost link in a spiral/turn-curve which all spirals are of the same weave, either right or left.
belt to which all system tension is transferred in a Also known as One-Directional weave.
spiral application.
Up Cage: A spiral system where the belt travels from bot-
Tension Switches: Switches installed to sound an alarm tom to top. (See also Down Cage.)
or stop the system if the position of the take-up roll goes
too high or too low. Limit switches can detect high tension Waver: The inherent deviation from a straight line along
and prevent some jam-ups. the mesh edges. (See also Side Travel.)

Tier: A 360° element of the spiral, either ascending or Wear Edges: An additional feature extended beyond the
descending one level. edge of the belt to act as a buffer.

Tier Height: The vertical distance from one belt level Welded Edge: An edge finish on a woven belt completed
on the drum to the next higher or lower level. This is a by welding only.
measurement of distance. Also known as Tier Pitch or
Tier Spacing.
Welded Knuckled Edge: An edge finish that is knuckled,
and the knuckles completely filled by welding or brazing.
Tier Pitch: Also known as Tier Height.
WG Woven Wire: WG belts are constructed with alternating
Tier Spacing: Also known as Tier Height. right- and left-hand spirals joined by a crimped connector.
European Standard.
GlOSSARY

ToughMat®: PTFE Coated fiberglass or Kevlar® mat for

IBO/OBO ovens and dryers.

238 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
Appendix A:
Wire Selection Guide

GUIDE FOR SELECTION OF WIRE ANALYSIS FOR ASHWORTH METAL BELTS

Appendix
Maximum
Trade Name Description and Application
Operating Temp. °F

Plain Steel Low Carbon Used in dry atmosphere for light and moderated loads, where no severe wear is expected, and in low
600
C1008 temperature ovens.

For damp or mildly corrosive atmospheres and non-caustic washing operations. Furnished in low carbon for
Galvanized C1008 C1040 350
moderate loads and in high carbon for heavy loads.

High Carbon C1040 Used in dry atmospheres for heavy loads, where severe wear is expected, and in moderate temperature
1050
C1065 furnaces, as for glass annealing, metal tempering bluing, etc.

These two alloys, although varying in their chemical composition, have qualities superior to high carbon steel
6150 Alloy Mayari ‘R* 1100
for Lehr belt applications at the glass annealing temperature range.

For temperatures above 1000°F up to 1300°F, with substantially better oxidation resistance, surface and
3% Chrome 1300
structural stability than 1% Chrome plus a gain in strength.

For resistance to corrosion from atmosphere, fresh water, steam, food, dairy products, nitric acid and other
oxidizing solutions. Type 430 has greater corrosion resistance than Type 410 and does not embrittle as read-
17% Chrome T430 1400
ily. Although it resists progressive scaling up to 1400°F it is not commonly used in high temperature work
except where sulphurous gases are present, because of its serious loss of strength above 1100°F.

Type 304 affords greater resistance to corrosion than Type 430 especially for marine and industrial atmo-
spheres, polluted water, high temperature steam, food, dairy products, organic chemicals, and non-oxidizing
18-8 T304 1500 for reducing solutions. Although it resists progressive scaling up to 1500°F, it is no commonly used in high
temperature applications because it is subject to carbide precipitation and embrittlement in the 800-1500°F
temperature range. For the 800-1500°F-temperature range refer to data tabulated for Type 347.

The addition of Molybdenum (Mo) to the basic 18-8 analysis provides for greater resistance to the same
chemical compounds, which are moderately corrosive to Type 304. Type 316 is particularly effective in resist-
ing corrosion from sulfuric acid compounds. It also resists pitting corrosion that occurs in the 18-8 type with
18-12 Mo T316 1500
acetic and phosphoric acids, chlorides, bromides and iodides. Muriatic or hydrochloric acids will attack Type
316 and Type 304. Nitric acid, however, will attack Type 316 more readily than Type 304. For high tempera-
ture applications, Type 347 is preferred. Refer to data tabulated for Type 347.

This alloy has been very extensively used in high temperature belt applications up to 2050°F, because of its
high strength, good resistance to oxidation and moderate cost. Type 314 is widely used in copper brazing
work and for sintering of powdered metals. Its high silicon content greatly increases its resistance to oxida-
tion and carburization. Because of its moderately high carbon content, when operated for prolonged periods
25-20 Si T-314 2050
in the 800-1500°F, range this alloy is subject to carbide precipitation at the grain boundaries with consequent
possible embrittlement and inter-granular corrosion. Carbides, when formed are readily re-dissolved by
bringing the belt temperature above 1950°F, holding this temperature for at least one hour, followed by a
rapid air quench.

In oxidizing atmospheres below 1950°F, and under cyclic heating conditions, Alloy 35-19 because of its high
nickel content is preferred to Type 314. 35-19 develops a scale that is much more adherent to the base metal
35-19 2050
than is the case with Type 314 and has greater strength, less elongation and less carbide embrittlement than
Type 314. The 35Ni-19 Cr Alloy has good resistance to thermal shock.

This Alloy is similar to 35-19 with Columbium added as a stabilizing agent to prevent the precipitation of
carbides. In addition, it also has higher Silicon content than that of 35-19, which improves its resistance to
35-19 Cb 2050 oxidation and carburization. Recommended where there is extended exposure in the 1200° to 1700°F range
and where the maximum temperature does not exceed 2050°F. It has good resistance to carburizing and
carbonitriding at temperatures up to 1750°F.
*Mayari’R is a registered Trademark of Bethlehem Steel Corporation., Inc.

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 239
 GUIDE FOR SELECTION OF WIRE ANALYSIS FOR ASHWORTH METAL BELTS
APpendix

Maximum
Trade Name Description and Application
Operating Temp. °F

This standard Inconel has been appreciably improved chemically. Tests show much better scaling resistance
in cyclic heating applications in an oxidizing atmosphere than the earlier Inconel analysis. In sulfur-free atmo-
spheres, it may be used up to 2100°F. In sulphurous atmospheres, its use is limited to 1500°F oxidizing and
1000°F reducing.
Inconel* Alloy #600 2150
It has greater strength than Type 314 or 35-19 above 1800°F. Inconel has good resistance to inter-granular
deterioration at high temperatures and its resistance to ammonia, nitrogen and hydrogen make it useful in
nitriding work. It has good resistance to molten aluminum brazing flux.

This new alloy is basically a Columbium (Cb) stabilized type of standard Inconel, free from the brittleness and
loss of ductility caused by carbide precipitation. With a 78% nickel content, much greater than the 40% mini-
Inconel* Alloy #604 2200 mum required for elimination of sigma phase formation, it will not embrittle from this cause. It is particularly
suitable for carburizing atmospheres and in installations where the belt is subject to alternate slightly reducing
and slightly oxidizing conditions.

This high Nickel alloy has been extensively used for many years providing good belt life at elevated tempera-
tures. 80-20 Cb (Columbium) has excellent oxidation resistance and high strength properties for the recom-
80-20 Cb 2100 mended operating temperature range. The addition of Columbium as a stabilizing element renders this Alloy
resistant to the so-called green rot phenomenon, which may occur, in the 1600-1900°F-temperature range.
Such a condition would be encountered where the Chromium while reducing to nickel.

Exceptional strength and oxidation resistance up to 2200°F is a characteristic of this Alloy. It forms a tightly
Hastelloy* Alloy X 2200 adherent oxide scale, which does not spall at high temperatures. Also has unusual resistance to reducing and
neutral atmospheres. High cost has limited its use for mesh belt applications.

This alloy is a 70% nickel and 30% Chrome alloy, which has food oxidation resistance in both oxidizing and
Tophet 30* 2200
exothermic atmospheres at temperatures in excess of 2150°F.
* Inconel is a registered Trademark of INCO Alloys International.
Hastelloy is a registered Trademark of Haynes International, Inc. Tophet is a registered Trademark of CRS Holdings, Inc

It is to be noted that strength is only one factor in the selection of mesh and alloy for any high temperature application. Strength
values reported by various reliable research laboratories show considerable variation, and analyses of mesh belt applications
in the field, under presumably identical conditions, often show a wide variation in useful life. Allowances must by made for
commercial variations in chemical composition and mechanical properties of wire, different types of mesh construction, type
of corrosion, influence of atmosphere, time at the critical temperature, thermal shock, mechanical abuse, non-uniform loading,
pulley sizes and various other conditions. No specific factors can be given for these variables. The data tabulated can serve as
a valuable guide.

240 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
Appendix B:
Common Conversion Formulas

Appendix
US Customary Units Multiply by Metric (SI) Multiply by US Customary Units

Length
Inches 25.4 Millimeters 0.039 Inches
Feet 0.305 Meters 3.281 Feet

Area
Square Feet 0.093 Square Meters 10.764 Square Feet

Weight
Pound 0.454 Kilograms 2.205 Pound

Tension
lb/ft 1.488 kg/m 0.672 lb/ft

Temperature
Formula Formula
Fahrenheit (°F - 32)/1.8 Celsius (°C*1.8)+32 Fahrenheit

www. a s h wo r th . c o m 241
 NOTES
APpendix

Disclaimer
The information contained in this publication is provided only as an aid and service to our customers. Ashworth does not warrant the accuracy or applicability of
such information. Ashworth is specifically not responsible for property damage and/or personal injury, direct or indirect for damages and/or failures caused by
improper machine design, application, installation, operation, abuse and/or misuse of its products whether or not based on information contained herein. Ashworth
does not warrant that the design and/or operational function of any machine that incorporates, and/or intends to incorporate Ashworth products, conforms to
any local, state, and/or federal regulations and standards relating to public safety, worker safety, safety guards, sanitation safety, fire safety, or any other safety
regulations. ALL PURCHASERS AND USERS SHOULD CONSULT THEIR APPROPRIATE LOCAL, STATE AND FEDERAL REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS.

Copyright ©2012 Ashworth Bros., Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA.

242 www. a s h wo r th . c o m
METAL OR PLASTIC | LOTENSION & STACKER | TURN-CURVE & STRAIGHT RUNNING

Conveyor Belt Product Catalog - Volume II

www.ashworth.com

Americas Europe, Middle East & Africa Asia - Pacific

Ashworth Bros., Inc. Ashworth Belts B.V. Ashworth Japan K.K.

Winchester, Virginia Amsterdam, The Netherlands Tokyo, Japan

Phone: +1 540 662 3494 Phone: +31 20 5813220 Phone: +81 03 6806 0745
Toll Free Phone: +1 800 682 4594 Fax: +31 20 5813229 Fax: +81 03 6806 0746
Fax: +1 540 662 3150 [email protected]
Toll Free Fax: +1 800 532 1730
[email protected]

Factory Service Corp. Ashworth Europe, Ltd. Asia/Pacific Regional Office

Faribault, Minnesota Birmingham, England Singapore
Phone: +1 540 665 1300 Phone: +44 01 384 355000 Phone: +65 6883 9552
Toll Free Phone: +1 866 204 1414 Fax: +44 01 384 355001
Fax: +1 507 334 3300 [email protected]
[email protected]